This is a modern-English version of The Radio Boys Rescue the Lost Alaska Expedition, originally written by Breckenridge, Gerald. It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling, and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.

Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.



 
 
 


 
 

“What does she say, Frank? Any luck yet?” Page 40
“What’s she saying, Frank? Any luck yet?” Page 40

 
 
 


 
 

THE RADIO BOYS

THE RADIO KIDS

RESCUE THE

SAVE THE

LOST ALASKA EXPEDITION

LOST ALASKA ADVENTURE

 

By GERALD BRECKENRIDGE

By GERALD BRECKENRIDGE

AUTHOR OF

WRITTEN BY

 

“The Radio Boys on the Mexican Border,” “The Radio

“The Radio Boys on the Mexican Border,” “The Radio

Boys on Secret Service Duty,” “The Radio Boys

"Boys on Secret Service Duty," "The Radio Boys"

with the Revenue Guards,” “The Radio Boys’

with the Revenue Guards,” “The Radio Boys’

Search for the Inca’s Treasure.”

Search for the Inca Treasure.


A. L. BURT COMPANY

A.L. Burt Company

Publishers—New York

Publishers - NYC

 
 
 


 
 

THE RADIO BOYS SERIES

THE RADIO BOYS COLLECTION

 

A Series of Stories for Boys of All Ages

A Collection of Stories for Boys of Every Age

 

By GERALD BRECKENRIDGE

By GERALD BRECKENRIDGE

 

The Radio Boys on the Mexican Border

The Radio Boys on the Mexican Border

The Radio Boys on Secret Service Duty

The Radio Boys on Secret Service Duty

The Radio Boys with the Revenue Guards

The Radio Boys with the Revenue Guards

The Radio Boys’ Search for the Inca’s Treasure

The Radio Boys' Quest for the Inca's Treasure

The Radio Boys Rescue the Lost Alaska Expedition

The Radio Boys Save the Missing Alaska Expedition

 

Copyright, 1922

Copyright, 1922

By A. L. BURT COMPANY

By A. L. BURT COMPANY

 

THE RADIO BOYS RESCUE THE LOST ALASKA EXPEDITION

THE RADIO BOYS SAVE THE LOST ALASKA EXPEDITION

 

Made in “U. S. A.”

Made in the USA

 
 
 


 
 

3The Radio Boys Rescue the Lost Alaska Expedition

CHAPTER I.—THE LOST EXPEDITION.

“Strange that you boys should be talking about the ‘Lost Expedition.’”

"Isn't it odd that you guys are talking about the 'Lost Expedition'?"

“Oh, hello, Dad. Why strange?”

“Oh, hi, Dad. Why weird?”

“Because I have just come from a conference with a man who knows all there is to know about it. And he was telling me——.”

“Because I just came from a conference with a guy who knows everything about it. And he was telling me——.”

Mr. Hampton advanced from the doorway into the sitting room, and looked at the faces of the three boys in turn. They were his son, Jack, and the latter’s chums, Bob Temple and Frank Merrick, who together had gone through many adventures related in other books of “The Radio Boys” series.

Mr. Hampton stepped from the doorway into the living room and glanced at the faces of the three boys one by one. They were his son, Jack, and his friends, Bob Temple and Frank Merrick, who had shared many adventures together in other books of “The Radio Boys” series.

It was the sitting room of a suite in a Seattle hotel. Here the four, arriving from South America, after finding and losing “The Enchanted 4 City of the Incas” as told of in “The Radio Boys Search for the Incas’ Treasure,” were ensconced on their way to their Long Island homes.

It was the living room of a suite in a Seattle hotel. Here, the four of them, arriving from South America after finding and losing “The Enchanted City of the Incas,” as described in “The Radio Boys Search for the Incas’ Treasure,” were settled in on their way to their homes in Long Island.

“Well, Dad, what was this man telling you?”

“Well, Dad, what was this guy saying to you?”

“Yes, Mr. Hampton, tell us,” added Frank “We’re curious.”

“Yes, Mr. Hampton, go ahead,” Frank added. “We're interested.”

“What do you know about the ‘Lost Expedition?’” countered Mr. Hampton. “I stood in the doorway unobserved a moment and heard you discussing it.”

“What do you know about the ‘Lost Expedition?’” replied Mr. Hampton. “I was standing in the doorway for a moment without being seen and heard you talking about it.”

“Nothing but what this article in the Sunday paper tells,” said big Bob, grumblingly, “And the fellow that wrote this yarn didn’t know very much. It’s mostly talk.”

“Nothing but what this article in the Sunday paper says,” grumbled big Bob, “And the guy who wrote this story didn’t know much. It’s mostly just discussion.”

Mr. Hampton nodded.

Mr. Hampton agreed.

“Speculation, I suppose,” he said. “Well, that’s the best the writer could do. The facts aren’t generally known. However, wait a minute until I get off this wet coat and get into something comfortable. It’s raining again.”

“Just a guess, I guess,” he said. “Well, that’s the best the writer could manage. The facts aren’t really out there. But hang on a minute while I take off this wet coat and put on something comfy. It’s raining again.”

“Raining again?” said Jack. “Doesn’t it ever stop here?”

“Raining again?” Jack asked. “Does it ever stop here?”

“Oh, that’s just the Seattle Winter,” said his father. “The rains are necessary, and, really, they are so mild one doesn’t mind them after a time.”

“Oh, that’s just the Seattle winter,” said his father. “The rains are necessary, and honestly, they’re so mild that you don’t really mind them after a while.”

“Huh,” grumbled big Bob. “I’d think these people would grow web feet.”

“Huh,” grumbled big Bob. “I’d think these people would grow webbed feet.”

“Look here,” said Mr. Hampton, after getting into 5 his smoking jacket and slippers. “What I learned today ought to interest you boys.”

“Listen up,” said Mr. Hampton, after putting on his smoking jacket and slippers. “What I found out today should interest you guys.”

“Why, Dad?” Jack leaned forward eagerly.

“Why, Dad?” Jack leaned forward excitedly.

“Well, wait until I tell you a bit about it,” said his father. “Then you’ll see.”

“Well, wait until I tell you a little about it,” said his father. “Then you’ll see.”

Then, while the three young fellows paid close attention, Mr. Hampton proceeded to relate the story of the “Lost Expedition” so-called, the expedition headed by Thorwald Thorwaldsson, the Norwegian explorer, which had outfitted at Seattle the previous Spring, set out for an unnamed destination in the Far North, and had never been heard of since.

Then, while the three young guys paid close attention, Mr. Hampton started to tell the story of the "Lost Expedition," which was led by Thorwald Thorwaldsson, the Norwegian explorer. It had set out from Seattle the previous spring, aiming for an unknown location in the Far North, and had not been heard from since.

A great deal of secrecy as to its objects had attended the departure of this expedition in its sturdy schooner, and many were the wild guesses and surmises concerning it advanced in the papers and among the hangers-on along the Seattle waterfront. Some said confidently that the expedition was going to attempt to reach the North Pole by airplane, for an airplane was carried dismantled on the schooner. Others declared the object sought was gold. And, in this regard, the vague rumors of vast gold fields found in the past by this or that old-time prospector who died without making his secret public, were brought to light and furbished up with a wealth of apocryphal detail in order to bear out the contention. 6

A lot of secrecy surrounded the purpose of this expedition as it set off on its sturdy schooner, leading to many wild guesses and theories in the newspapers and among the regulars at the Seattle waterfront. Some confidently claimed that the expedition aimed to reach the North Pole by airplane, especially since a dismantled airplane was aboard the schooner. Others insisted the real goal was to find gold. In this context, the vague rumors about vast gold fields supposedly discovered in the past by various old-time prospectors, who died without revealing their secrets, were revived and embellished with a wealth of invented details to support this idea. 6

“But none of these assumptions,” said Mr. Hampton, “was correct. The real object of the expedition never was made public, for the very good reason that none of those in the know—and their numbers are few—ever betrayed a word, or hint, of the secret.”

“But none of these assumptions,” said Mr. Hampton, “were correct. The true purpose of the expedition was never disclosed, and for a very good reason: none of the few people who knew ever revealed a word or even hinted at the secret.”

“And you know it?” asked Jack, with quickened interest.

“And you know it?” Jack asked, his interest suddenly piqued.

Mr. Hampton nodded, and smiled teasingly.

Mr. Hampton nodded and smiled playfully.

“Come on, Mr. Hampton, tell us,” said Frank.

“Come on, Mr. Hampton, just tell us,” Frank said.

“You better, Mr. Hampton, or he’ll burst with curiosity,” advised big Bob. “Show that boy a secret and he’s not content until he takes it apart.”

“You better, Mr. Hampton, or he’ll burst with curiosity,” advised big Bob. “Show that boy a secret and he won’t be satisfied until he figures it out.”

“How about yourself?” said Frank, indignantly. “I suppose you don’t care to hear, hey? Oh, no.”

“How about you?” Frank said, upset. “I guess you don't want to hear, right? Oh, no.”

Mr. Hampton interrupted.

Mr. Hampton cut in.

“Wait a minute, Bob. No need to perjure yourself. I know all you boys are eager to know the answer to the mystery of the ‘Lost Expedition.’ Well, I can tell it to you in one word. It is——”

“Hold on a second, Bob. No need to lie under oath. I know you guys are excited to find out the answer to the mystery of the ‘Lost Expedition.’ I can sum it up in one word. It is——”

He paused. Then added:

He paused, then added:

“Oil.”

“Oil.”

“Oil?”

"Oil?"

All three listeners asked the question as if in one breath. Big Bob was no less inquisitive than the others, despite his twigging of Frank for his curiosity.

All three listeners asked the question as if they were all saying it at the same time. Big Bob was just as curious as the others, even though he teased Frank for being so nosy.

Mr. Hampton nodded. 7

Mr. Hampton nodded.

“Yes,” he said. “Oil.”

“Yes,” he said. “Oil.”

For a moment he was silent, collecting his thoughts. Then he leaned forward, cleared his throat and continued:

For a moment, he was quiet, gathering his thoughts. Then he leaned forward, cleared his throat, and went on:

“Perhaps my words are a disappointment to you. The Northland for you, probably, is invested in a mysterious glamor. It means either men struggling through incalculable hardships to win their way to the North Pole, to the top of the world, or else fighting against all the mighty forces of Nature in a grim, ice-locked land to wrest a stream of golden wealth from the bosom of the Earth.

“Maybe my words are a letdown to you. For you, the Northland is probably wrapped in a mysterious allure. It either represents men battling through immeasurable hardships to reach the North Pole, the pinnacle of the world, or fighting against the immense forces of Nature in a harsh, ice-bound land to extract a flow of golden wealth from the heart of the Earth.

“Ah, yes,” he continued, smiling slightly, “I know how you feel. Whenever our preconceived and heroic notions are upset we feel a sense of disappointment. But, consider for a moment, the meaning of this matter. Here, far away in the Northland, in a remote district to which so far as known only two white men have ever penetrated, lies a mighty river flowing north into the Arctic Ocean, along the banks of which are such vast deposits of oil that it oozes through the soil and into the river to such an extent that the river in reality is a river of oil and never freezes.”

“Ah, yes,” he continued, smiling slightly, “I know how you feel. Whenever our idealistic and heroic ideas are challenged, we feel disappointed. But, take a moment to think about the significance of this situation. Here, far up in the North, in a remote area that only two white men are known to have ever reached, there’s a huge river flowing north into the Arctic Ocean. Along its banks, there are such vast oil deposits that it seeps through the soil and into the river, to the point where the river is essentially a river of oil and never freezes.”

“A river of oil that never freezes, Dad?” said Jack. “Do you expect us to believe that?”

“A river of oil that never freezes, Dad?” Jack said. “Do you really expect us to believe that?”

“And flowing north, too?” said Frank, whose 8 quick mind had seized upon that point of contrariety in Nature.

“And it flows north as well?” said Frank, whose 8 sharp mind had caught on to that contradictory aspect of Nature.

Mr. Hampton smiled.

Mr. Hampton smiled.

“Well, boys, it is hard to believe, I’ll admit,” he said. “Yet that this river does flow north is undoubted. That it never freezes, however, is an exaggeration. The truth is, probably, that at spots so much oil seeps into the water that soft spots are formed.

“Well, guys, it’s hard to believe, I’ll admit,” he said. “But it’s a fact that this river flows north. The claim that it never freezes, though, is an exaggeration. The reality is, probably, that in some places so much oil seeps into the water that soft spots are created.

“Hitherto,” he continued, “there have been only two rivers known that flow north into the Arctic in that region—the MacKenzie and the Coppermine, along the shores of which are vast deposits of copper that some day, undoubtedly, will be opened up to exploitation. However, this other northward-flowing river in the midst of a vast oil field must now be added to the list, if the word of the lone explorer is to believed, of the one man who has been there and lived to return with the tale.”

“Until now,” he continued, “there have only been two rivers known to flow north into the Arctic in that area—the MacKenzie and the Coppermine, along whose shores are huge deposits of copper that will eventually be tapped for mining. However, this other northward-flowing river in the middle of a vast oil field must now be added to the list, if we are to believe the word of the lone explorer, the one man who has been there and lived to tell the story.”

“But I thought you said this river was known to two white men, Dad?” objected Jack.

“But I thought you said this river was known to two white men, Dad?” Jack protested.

“So I did. So I did,” declared his father. “And two there were—Cameron and Farrell. But Cameron died on the trip to the outside, and Farrell alone lived despite incredible hardships, to finally reach Edmonton with the tale. Now he, too, is gone—for he was a member of Thorwaldsson’s ‘Lost Expedition.’ 9

“So I did. So I did,” his father said. “And there were two—Cameron and Farrell. But Cameron died on the journey to the outside, and only Farrell survived despite facing unbelievable challenges, ultimately making it to Edmonton with the story. Now he, too, is gone—because he was part of Thorwaldsson’s ‘Lost Expedition.’ 9

“When he reached Edmonton, a thriving Canadian city, Farrell, an adventurous fellow who at one time had worked in the Southwestern oil fields as an employee of the syndicate of independent operators which once employed me there as superintendent, realized the value of his discovery and kept his mouth closed until he got in touch with Anderson, the big man of the syndicate. Anderson saw at once the importance of the find. But he also saw that Farrell’s marvelous oil field would virtually have to be rediscovered before steps to develop it could be taken. For, in struggling through to the outside, Farrell had suffered the loss of his compass, had been turned about in Winter fogs, had lain delirious for a long period in the igloo of friendly Eskimos within the Arctic Circle and, in general, had suffered so many hardships that his mind was clouded and he had no clear idea of where lay this oil field.

“When he arrived in Edmonton, a bustling Canadian city, Farrell, an adventurous guy who once worked in the Southwestern oil fields for the group of independent operators that had previously hired me as superintendent, realized the significance of his discovery and kept it to himself until he reached out to Anderson, the big boss of the syndicate. Anderson immediately recognized the importance of the find. However, he also understood that Farrell’s incredible oil field would essentially need to be rediscovered before any steps could be taken to develop it. While making his way out, Farrell had lost his compass, gotten disoriented in the winter fogs, spent a long time delirious in the igloo of friendly Eskimos within the Arctic Circle, and overall endured so many hardships that his mind was clouded, leaving him with no clear idea of where this oil field was located.”

“Anderson, however, placed such faith in Farrell’s report that he decided to outfit an expedition to retrace the footsteps of Farrell and Cameron into the Arctic in the hope of thus once more coming upon the oil field. Inasmuch as they had gone in through Alaska, that was the way which Thorwaldsson’s expedition took.”

“Anderson, however, had so much faith in Farrell’s report that he chose to organize an expedition to follow the paths of Farrell and Cameron into the Arctic, hoping to find the oil field again. Since they had entered through Alaska, that was the route Thorwaldsson’s expedition took.”

Mr. Hampton paused. Jack, who had been eyeing his father closely, now put a hand on his arm. 10

Mr. Hampton paused. Jack, who had been watching his father closely, now placed a hand on his arm. 10

“And now what, Dad?” he asked.

“And now what, Dad?” he asked.

“Now Anderson wants me to attempt to go after the ‘Lost Expedition’ and try to relocate the oil fields as well as find some trace of Thorwaldsson,” said Mr. Hampton.

“Now Anderson wants me to try to track down the ‘Lost Expedition’ and look for the oil fields, as well as find any sign of Thorwaldsson,” said Mr. Hampton.

“I thought so,” said Jack, in a tone of satisfaction. “When do we start?”

“I thought so,” said Jack, sounding pleased. “When do we begin?”

“We?” Mr. Hampton chuckled. “I like that. Just as cool as you please about it, too. We? Well, well.”

“We?” Mr. Hampton laughed. “I like that. You’re so casually confident about it, too. We? Well, well.”

“Do we leave at once?” asked Jack, imperturbably, not one whit disturbed by his father’s pleasantry.

“Are we leaving right now?” asked Jack, unbothered, not the slightest bit affected by his father’s joke.

Mr. Hampton shook his head.

Mr. Hampton shook his head.

“Whether I take you at all is questionable,” he said. “Certainly, I have no intention of going at once. If I go at all, it will not be until the Arctic Summer begins.”

“Whether I'll take you at all is uncertain,” he said. “I definitely don't plan on leaving right away. If I do go, it won't be until the Arctic summer starts.”

“Meantime, I suppose, I’m to return to Yale.”

“Meanwhile, I guess I’m supposed to go back to Yale.”

“Yes, you’ve missed a half year, thanks to our adventures in search of the Incas’ treasure in South America, but that is no reason why you should miss the balance of the term. I’ll tell you what,” he added, taking pity on the three, “if you fellows go back to college and study hard to make up for lost time until Summer, and if the ‘Lost Expedition’ is still lost at that time, why, I’ll see what can be done.”

“Yes, you’ve missed half a year because of our adventures searching for the Incas’ treasure in South America, but that doesn’t mean you should miss the rest of the term. Here’s the deal,” he continued, feeling sorry for the three, “if you guys go back to college and work hard to catch up until summer, and if the ‘Lost Expedition’ is still missing by then, I’ll see what we can do.”

“Hurray,” cried Jack. “That’s a promise.”

“Yay,” shouted Jack. “That's a promise.”

11CHAPTER II.—SETTING OUT FROM NOME.

“Well, boys, where do we go from here?”

“Well, guys, where do we go from here?”

It was Frank who asked the question, and he sat on a heap of luggage on the beach at Nome, with Jack and Bob beside him looking alternately at the mountain beyond the Alaskan outpost and at Mr. Hampton deep in conversation with a short sturdy figure of a man, clad in khaki breeches, high leather boots and a flannel shirt, a short distance away. The figure was that of Tom Farnum, scout of the independent oil interests at Nome.

It was Frank who asked the question, and he sat on a pile of luggage on the beach at Nome, with Jack and Bob next to him, looking back and forth between the mountain beyond the Alaskan outpost and Mr. Hampton, who was deep in conversation with a short, sturdy man dressed in khaki pants, tall leather boots, and a flannel shirt, a short distance away. The man was Tom Farnum, a scout for the independent oil interests at Nome.

It was Summer, and Summer in Alaska as the boys were beginning to realize meant hot weather, indeed. All had their coats off, and were perspiring. Only an hour before they had been put ashore by the steamer from Seattle, and Mr. Hampton had left them on the beach with their luggage while he went in search of Tom Farnum, who had failed to meet them at the landing as they had expected.

It was summer, and summer in Alaska, as the boys were starting to understand, meant hot weather for sure. They all had their jackets off and were sweating. Just an hour earlier, they had been dropped off by the steamer from Seattle, and Mr. Hampton had left them on the beach with their bags while he went to look for Tom Farnum, who hadn’t met them at the landing as they had expected.

“Where do we go from here?” Jack repeated 12 Frank’s question. “Well, if you ask me, almost any place would be better than Nome.”

“Where do we go from here?” Jack repeated 12 Frank’s question. “Honestly, anywhere would be better than Nome.”

He looked with disfavor at the little town sprawling at the base of the mountain.

He looked at the small town at the foot of the mountain with disapproval.

“Not just what I expected,” he said. “I’ve heard of Nome all my life, it seems, and now, just look at it. Why, it’s hardly a spot on the map.”

“Not exactly what I expected,” he said. “I’ve heard about Nome my whole life, and now, just look at it. It’s barely a dot on the map.”

“But what a history it has had, Jack,” said Frank. “Don’t judge by appearances too much. Remember this town has seen the Gold Rush.”

“But what a history it has, Jack,” Frank said. “Don’t judge too much by appearances. Remember, this town went through the Gold Rush.”

“I wonder what Dad is talking about,” said Jack, ignoring Frank’s remark.

“I wonder what Dad is talking about,” Jack said, tuning out Frank’s comment.

“Probably discussing how soon we can get away,” said big Bob, speaking for the first time. “At any rate,” he added, “I see your father and his companion pointing to that gasoline schooner off shore.”

“Probably talking about when we can leave,” said big Bob, speaking for the first time. “Anyway,” he added, “I see your dad and his friend pointing to that gas boat off the coast.”

At this moment, their doubts were resolved, for Mr. Hampton and his companion ended their conversation and approached the boys.

At that moment, their doubts were cleared up, as Mr. Hampton and his friend finished their conversation and walked over to the boys.

“Well, boys, we’ll soon be under way,” said Mr. Hampton. Whereupon he introduced Farnum all around. The latter was a prepossessing man with a weather-beaten face and a grizzled mustache, above which jutted a promontory of a nose between deep-set, wide, blue eyes.

“Well, guys, we’ll be on our way soon,” said Mr. Hampton. Then he introduced Farnum to everyone. Farnum was an attractive man with a weathered face and a grizzled mustache, above which protruded a prominent nose between deep-set, wide, blue eyes.

“That is our schooner out there,” Mr. Hampton continued, indicating the boat to which Bob earlier had drawn attention. “Mr. Farnum,” he added, 13 “has stated casually around Nome that he is taking a party of hunters up the MacKenzie. We’ll get away at once, as nothing is to be gained by a stay in Nome and as, furthermore, we wish to avoid inquiries into our aims. The story Farnum has told will do well enough.”

“That’s our schooner out there,” Mr. Hampton continued, pointing to the boat Bob had mentioned earlier. “Mr. Farnum,” he added, 13 “has mentioned casually around Nome that he's taking a group of hunters up the MacKenzie. We’ll leave right away since there’s no benefit to staying in Nome, and we also want to steer clear of questions about our plans. The story Farnum has told will work just fine.”

Farnum nodded.

Farnum nodded.

“Just a white lie,” he said, grinning. “No use letting the curious know all your secrets.”

“Just a little white lie,” he said, grinning. “No point in letting the nosy know all your secrets.”

Then followed an hour of brisk work, at the end of which period the luggage was safely stowed aboard the gasoline schooner, and its screw began to turn. As the little vessel began to throb and draw away from Nome, the boys leaned overside and watched the prospect dwindle in the distance until the houses seemed like toys and the mountainside like a painted backdrop in the theater.

Then came an hour of fast-paced work, and by the end of it, the luggage was securely packed onto the gasoline schooner, and its propeller started to spin. As the small boat began to vibrate and pull away from Nome, the boys leaned over the side and watched the view shrink in the distance until the houses looked like toys and the mountainside resembled a painted backdrop in a theater.

“Hurray,” cried Bob, at last, “we’re off for the Great Unknown.”

“Hurray,” cried Bob, finally, “we’re off to the Great Unknown.”

“Yes,” agreed Frank, “I really feel that way, too. All the way up from Seattle, I felt as if I were nothing more than a tourist, traveling a beaten route. But this, well, this is different.”

“Yes,” Frank agreed, “I feel the same way. The whole trip from Seattle felt like I was just a tourist on a well-trodden path. But this, well, this is something else.”

After that they were silent a long time, while the schooner shook and throbbed and steadily pushed its way up the coast, each boy busy with his thoughts. Yet those thoughts were much the same.

After that, they were quiet for a long time as the schooner shook and throbbed, steadily making its way up the coast, each boy lost in his own thoughts. Yet those thoughts were largely the same.

Following that eventful discussion in Seattle, on 14 their return from South America and their adventures there in The Enchanted City of the Incas, they had gone back to Yale and studied hard to make up for lost time in the first half of the term. All three were clever and had the knack of concentrating at their tasks, and all as a consequence had succeeded in making up back work in classroom and lecture. As a result they had entered the succeeding term, or at least were prepared to do so, without conditions. This was a matter for congratulation, indeed, and deserving of especial reward.

Following that eventful discussion in Seattle, on 14 their return from South America and their adventures there in The Enchanted City of the Incas, they went back to Yale and studied hard to make up for lost time in the first half of the term. All three were smart and knew how to focus on their tasks, and as a result, they successfully caught up on their work in class and lectures. Consequently, they entered the next term—or at least were ready to— without any conditions. This was truly something to celebrate and was deserving of special recognition.

That reward had been theirs. For Mr. Hampton and Mr. Temple both decided that their respective sons and Frank, Mr. Temple’s ward, should be permitted to accompany Mr. Hampton on his trip to attempt to find some trace of the “Lost Expedition” and of the reputed oil field in search of which Thorwaldsson had set out.

That reward was meant for them. Mr. Hampton and Mr. Temple both agreed that their sons and Frank, Mr. Temple’s ward, should be allowed to go with Mr. Hampton on his trip to try to find any sign of the “Lost Expedition” and the rumored oil field that Thorwaldsson had gone to search for.

“Farnum is reputed a wizard in knowledge of the Northland,” Mr. Hampton had explained to Mr. Temple, “and, as a consequence, I do not consider that we will run any danger. Our greatest danger, of course, would be to become trapped in the Far North in the Fall and be prevented by the rigors of Winter from regaining the outside. For I do not intend to spend the Winter there. Instead, I hope to be back in civilization by the early Fall.

“Farnum is known for his knowledge of the Northland,” Mr. Hampton had explained to Mr. Temple, “and because of that, I don't think we'll be in any danger. Our biggest risk, of course, would be getting stuck in the Far North in the Fall and being unable to get back to the outside due to the harshness of Winter. I have no plans to spend the Winter there. Instead, I hope to be back in civilization by early Fall.

“That,” he added, “will give us plenty of opportunity 15 to seek traces of the ‘Lost Expedition.’ I have been in communication with Farnum. His plan is for us to push up the MacKenzie to one of its tributaries, and then strike eastward. We will leave the gasoline schooner to make its way back to Nome, while we push on overland, lightening our journey on rivers and lakes, in the hope of finding the River of Oil flowing north.

"That," he added, "will give us plenty of chances to look for signs of the 'Lost Expedition.' I've been in touch with Farnum. His plan is for us to travel up the MacKenzie to one of its tributaries, and then head east. We'll leave the gasoline schooner to return to Nome while we continue overland, making our journey easier on rivers and lakes, hoping to find the River of Oil flowing north.

“If we are unsuccessful, when the seasonal warnings of approaching Winter come, we will turn to the southeast and come out in northern Canada.

“If we don’t succeed, when the seasonal alerts of Winter’s approach arrive, we will head southeast and emerge in northern Canada.

“The boys are hard and fit, and such a trip will be of inestimable value for them. It will make them self-reliant and teach them to depend upon themselves. Not that they are not in a fair way to be youths of that sort already,” he added, smiling. “If you could have seen them in South America, George, it would have done your heart good.”

“The boys are tough and in good shape, and this trip will be incredibly valuable for them. It will help them become self-reliant and learn to depend on themselves. Not that they aren’t already becoming that kind of young man,” he added, smiling. “If you could have seen them in South America, George, it would have warmed your heart.”

“I know, I know,” said Mr. Temple, shaking his head slightly, and smiling. “Several years ago, that time when you were captive in Mexico and they set out to rescue you—”

“I know, I know,” Mr. Temple said, shaking his head a bit and smiling. “A few years back, when you were held in Mexico and they went to save you—”

“Yes, and did,” supplied Mr. Hampton.

“Yes, and did,” said Mr. Hampton.

“And did,” agreed Mr. Temple. “Well, they showed the stuff that was in them then. And the very same Summer, when I took them to San Francisco on what I considered was going to be a 16 little pleasure trip combining a bit of business with sight-seeing, and—”

“And did,” Mr. Temple agreed. “Well, they revealed what was inside them then. That same summer, when I took them to San Francisco on what I thought was going to be a 16 little pleasure trip, mixing a bit of business with sightseeing, and—”

“And you became involved with the Chinese smugglers, and imprisoned, and ended up by busting up their show—”

“And you got involved with the Chinese smugglers, got locked up, and ended up ruining their operation—”

“Yes,” resumed Mr. Temple, “and ended up by bringing the whole outfit into the hands of Uncle Sam’s men. Well, I can tell you, they certainly showed their calibre.”

“Yeah,” Mr. Temple continued, “and ended up handing the whole operation over to Uncle Sam’s guys. Let me tell you, they definitely showed what they’re made of.”

“So, I reckon it will be all right to take them along on this trip,” said Mr. Hampton.

“So, I think it will be fine to bring them along on this trip,” said Mr. Hampton.

“I suppose so,” agreed Mr. Temple. “But innocent as it looks now, I have my doubts. I have my doubts. Wherever those three boys are found, there you can look for things to move fast. Trouble courts them, it seems to me.”

“I guess so,” Mr. Temple agreed. “But as innocent as it seems right now, I have my doubts. I have my doubts. Wherever those three boys are, you can expect things to heat up. Trouble seems to find them.”

Accordingly, the boys had been told they would be taken on the trip into the Far North. And wildly excited they had gone about their preparations. Jack, the keenest radio enthusiast, was all for packing up radio field equipment of every sort right at home. But his father had dissuaded him, pointing out that Seattle was a large city and there everything necessary in the way of an outfit could be purchased, thus saving the trouble and expense of transporting overland to the Pacific port.

Accordingly, the boys had been told they would be taken on a trip to the Far North. Wildly excited, they went about their preparations. Jack, the most enthusiastic radio fan, wanted to pack all kinds of radio equipment right at home. But his dad talked him out of it, explaining that Seattle was a big city where they could buy everything they needed, saving the hassle and cost of transporting it all overland to the Pacific port.

“All right, Dad,” Jack had agreed. “But, remember, the selection of the radio equipment is to 17 be left to the fellows and me. We’ve had a lot of experience with the value of radio when in a tight place, especially in South America, and we want to put that experience to use and be prepared for every contingency this time.”

“All right, Dad,” Jack agreed. “But remember, the choice of radio equipment is up to the guys and me. We’ve learned a lot about the importance of radio in tough situations, especially in South America, and we want to use that experience to be ready for anything this time.”

To this Mr. Hampton readily had agreed, with the result that in Seattle the three boys had revelled in the radio equipment stores, which they found well stocked, as the use of radio had developed greatly on the Pacific.

To this, Mr. Hampton gladly agreed, resulting in the three boys enjoying the radio equipment stores in Seattle, which they found well-stocked, as radio usage had greatly expanded on the Pacific.

In consequence, their outfit included radio field equipment of the most powerful, yet most compact, designs. For while Mr. Hampton fully realized the value of having the very best yet he had issued a solemn warning that bulk must be considered.

In response, their gear included radio field equipment that was both the most powerful and the most compact. While Mr. Hampton fully understood the importance of having the very best, he had issued a serious warning that size needed to be taken into account.

“We will have to travel as lightly as consistent with safety and the purpose of our expedition,” he had said. “So don’t pile up anything too heavy or bulky, or it will have to be discarded.”

“We need to pack as lightly as we can while still being safe and fulfilling the purpose of our trip,” he said. “So don’t load up on anything too heavy or bulky, or it will have to be left behind.”

Jack knew well that the distance which can be covered with a radiophone transmitter is only about one-fourth as great as that of a wireless telegraph transmitter having the same input of initial current. Therefore, as a means of sending messages, supposedly for aid, over long distances, the wireless telegraph would be the better, inasmuch as equipment for it would be less bulky to transport than equipment for transmitting the human voice. Nevertheless, 18 he was reluctant to place their sole dependence upon the wireless telegraph.

Jack understood that the range of a radiophone transmitter is only about a quarter of that of a wireless telegraph transmitter with the same initial current input. So, for sending messages—supposedly for help—over long distances, the wireless telegraph would be more effective, especially since its equipment is lighter and easier to transport than that used for transmitting the human voice. Still, 18 he was hesitant to rely exclusively on the wireless telegraph.

“You see, Dad,” he had pointed out to his father, when the outfit was being assembled, “to reach the outside we shall have to depend upon wireless telegraph. But we will also need the radiophone for this reason: that each one of us ought to have a means of calling the main party in case we become separated through going on scouting or hunting expeditions, or for any reason.”

“You see, Dad,” he pointed out to his father, when they were putting the gear together, “to connect with the outside world, we’ll need to rely on wireless telegraphy. But we also need the radio phone for this reason: each of us should have a way to contact the main group if we get separated while scouting or hunting, or for any other reason.”

“Well, that sounds sensible,” his father had agreed. “Go ahead with your plans, but, remember, hold down the bulk.”

“Well, that sounds reasonable,” his father had agreed. “Go ahead with your plans, but remember, keep the main thing in check.”

The result was that equipment capable of telegraphing five hundred miles was assembled, but also Jack made up five light field sets of radio, one for each of their party and for Farnum, which the user could pack in his clothing and which had a radius up to twenty-five miles. The instrument was Jack’s now famous ring radio, worn on the finger, with a setting only one inch by five-eighths of an inch. Formerly an umbrella as aerial had been employed but Jack had done entirely away with that in his improved set.

The result was that equipment able to send telegraphs over five hundred miles was put together, but Jack also created five lightweight radio sets for each member of their group and for Farnum. These sets could easily be carried in clothing and had a range of up to twenty-five miles. The device was Jack's now-famous ring radio, which could be worn on the finger and measured only one inch by five-eighths of an inch. Previously, an umbrella had been used as an antenna, but Jack completely eliminated that in his upgraded version.

“Well, fellows,” said Jack, at last, as Nome faded entirely from view, “I wonder what lies ahead. I wonder whether Thorwaldsson’s expedition was stricken down by a plague, which seems hardly 19 likely, as in that case surely somebody would have managed to get word to the outside by wireless or airplane, or whether it fell victim to a surprise attack by Indians at night, as I understand from Dad that Farnum believes.”

“Well, guys,” Jack said finally, as Nome disappeared completely from sight, “I’m curious about what’s ahead. I wonder if Thorwaldsson’s expedition was hit by a plague, which seems pretty unlikely, since someone would have definitely found a way to inform the outside world by radio or airplane, or if it was caught off guard by a surprise attack from Indians at night, like Dad says Farnum believes.”

“Is that so,” said Frank, in surprise. “That’s the first I heard of that.”

“Really?” Frank said, surprised. “That’s the first I’m hearing of it.”

“Yes,” said Jack. “Dad told me of it when we were coming aboard this schooner. He said it was the first intimation Farnum had given him that such might be the case, and also his first intimation that there were hostile Indians in this country into which we are going. If it weren’t too late, he told me, he would have turned back rather than imperil us, as it is, we shall go pretty warily and try to steer clear of the hostile Indian country.”

“Yes,” said Jack. “Dad mentioned it when we were getting on this schooner. He said it was the first hint Farnum had given him that it might be true, and also his first indication that there were hostile Indians in the area we’re heading into. If it weren’t too late, he told me, he would have turned back to avoid putting us in danger. As it stands, we’ll proceed cautiously and try to stay away from the hostile Indian territory.”

“Whew,” said Bob, “this sounds interesting, hey, what?”

“Wow,” said Bob, “this sounds interesting, right?”

His eyes began to shine.

His eyes started to sparkle.

“Old Bob. Always ready for a fight,” said Frank. “Well, let’s give him one.”

“Old Bob. Always up for a brawl,” said Frank. “Well, let’s give him one.”

And incontinently, he and Jack fell upon the big fellow and a tussle followed that ended only when they almost fell overboard.

And without hesitation, he and Jack jumped on the big guy, and a struggle ensued that only ended when they nearly fell overboard.

20CHAPTER III.—IN THE WILDERNESS.

“Well, boys, tomorrow we leave the schooner.”

“Well, guys, tomorrow we leave the boat.”

It was Tom Farnum who made the announcement over dinner which was eaten on deck. The boat was anchored offshore, far up the Hare Indian River, one of the great tributaries of the MacKenzie. How long it was since they had left Nome none could tell, for in that land of perpetual daylight it was hard to keep track of time.

It was Tom Farnum who made the announcement over dinner, which they ate on deck. The boat was anchored offshore, far up the Hare Indian River, one of the major tributaries of the Mackenzie. No one could say how long it had been since they left Nome, because in that land of constant daylight, it was difficult to keep track of time.

“Tomorrow,” said big Bob, “when is tomorrow?”

“Tomorrow,” said big Bob, “what day is tomorrow?”

He looked at the sun which was still high, despite the lateness of the hour, and would make only an ineffectual attempt to dip below the horizon at midnight, before resuming its upward climb.

He looked at the sun, which was still high in the sky, even though it was late, and would only make a weak attempt to dip below the horizon at midnight before starting its ascent again.

Everybody laughed.

Everyone laughed.

“What a topsy turvy land,” said Jack. “Well, I, for one, will be glad to go ashore and stretch my legs. Wonderful as the trip has been so far, I’m eager to get started.”

“What a crazy place,” said Jack. “Well, I, for one, will be glad to get on solid ground and stretch my legs. As amazing as the trip has been so far, I’m ready to get going.”

“Same here,” agreed Frank. 21

“Me too,” agreed Frank.

Little of moment had occurred to interrupt the monotony of the trip up the coast and along the northern edge of Alaska and the North American continent to the mouth of the MacKenzie. Of course, occasional ice floes had been encountered and the little schooner had been compelled to make wide detours. But that was to be expected in that Far Northern latitude.

Little of significance had happened to break the monotony of the trip up the coast and along the northern edge of Alaska and the North American continent to the mouth of the Mackenzie. Of course, we had run into some ice floes now and then, which forced the small schooner to take wide detours. But that was to be expected in that far northern latitude.

In fact, when they had arrived at the mouth of the MacKenzie, the ice was only recently dissipated from the great river. There, at a dock where a little sidewheel steamer that plied on the MacKenzie in Summer was tied up for repairs, they had replenished their stock of gasoline and then continued the ascent, passing between willowed banks, where huddled occasional trading posts surrounded by native villages, with the snow-capped mountain peaks always in the distance.

In fact, when they reached the mouth of the MacKenzie, the ice had just melted from the big river. There, at a dock where a small sidewheel steamer that operated on the MacKenzie in the summer was moored for repairs, they refueled their gasoline supply and then continued their journey upstream, passing between banks lined with willows, where sporadic trading posts were clustered around native villages, with snow-covered mountain peaks always in the background.

Then they had reached the mouth of the Hare Indian River and soon had put beyond them all appearance of the presence of man.

Then they had reached the mouth of the Hare Indian River and soon left behind any sign of human presence.

“This is the way Thorwaldsson’s party expected to go,” Farnum had said. “For it was this route which Farrell and Cameron, the two prospectors, followed on their way in. They were prospecting for gold, you know, had no idea of finding oil. It was their original intention to strike northeast across the numerous streams at the head of the Hare 22 Indian in search of gold. And Farrell reported, when he reached the outside, that he had found traces and, in fact, several sizable pockets of gold.”

“This is how Thorwaldsson’s group thought they would travel,” Farnum had said. “This was the path that Farrell and Cameron, the two prospectors, took when they came in. They were looking for gold, you know, and had no idea there was oil. They originally planned to head northeast across the many streams at the head of the Hare 22 Indian in search of gold. And Farrell reported, when he made it back, that he had found signs and, in fact, several significant pockets of gold.”

Accordingly they pushed on up the Hare Indian a number of days until, in fact, the extra supplies of gasoline which had been taken aboard on leaving the MacKenzie dwindled to the point where it became advisable for the party to go ashore in order that the schooner might turn about and have sufficient fuel to make its way downstream to the supply depot.

Accordingly, they continued up the Hare Indian for several days until the extra gasoline they had taken on when they left the MacKenzie ran low enough that it was sensible for the team to go ashore so the schooner could turn around and have enough fuel to make it back downstream to the supply depot.

It was a period of time that, in fact, however, could hardly be considered in terms of days. So far north had the party come that the sun shone perpetually. It was only at midnight, for a brief space, that it dipped to the horizon.

It was a time that really couldn’t be measured in days. The group had traveled so far north that the sun shone continuously. It only dipped to the horizon for a short moment at midnight.

And what a gorgeous time it had proven to be for all concerned, but especially for the boys. As the powerful little schooner forged ahead, there was not a bend the rounding of which did not afford a surprise. Sometimes it would be caribou or reindeer, probably an escape from some Eskimo herd, which would be surprised standing in the water, and breaking for the timber on the bank at their approach. Again brown bear would be seen on the bank, or beaver swimming strongly across the stream. As for fishing, it was an Izaak Walton paradise. All Bob, Frank and Jack did for hours on end was to 23 lean overside with hooks baited with bacon rind dangling in the water astern, and pull in speckled beauties. And many a meal was made, too, on wild duck or geese, picked off with a light rifle.

And it was such a fantastic time for everyone involved, especially for the boys. As the powerful little schooner moved forward, every bend in the water revealed a new surprise. Sometimes it would be caribou or reindeer, likely an escape from some Eskimo herd, startled as they stood in the water, rushing into the woods on the bank at the sight of them. Other times, they would spot a brown bear on the bank or see a beaver swimming purposefully across the stream. When it came to fishing, it was a paradise straight out of Izaak Walton's dreams. Bob, Frank, and Jack spent hours simply leaning over the side with hooks baited with bacon rind hanging in the water behind them, reeling in speckled beauties. They also enjoyed many meals of wild duck or geese, which they shot with a light rifle.

Then came the time when Tom Farnum announced that they would stay ashore on the morrow. And little sleep did the boys have that night, as they lay awake on deck, whispering to each other, an awning shading them from the sun.

Then the time came when Tom Farnum announced that they would stay on land the next day. The boys hardly slept that night as they lay awake on deck, whispering to each other, with an awning shading them from the sun.

Early the next morning they went ashore with their outfit, and then watched the gasoline schooner throb off downstream, around the last bend, and out of sight. As it disappeared, for the first time there came to each of the three boys the feeling of isolation natural to their situation. The last settlement was two hundred miles behind them. They were going into the great unknown, into the regions marked “Unexplored” on the maps of that great northern rim of the North American continent.

Early the next morning, they went ashore with their gear and watched the gas-powered boat hum away downstream, around the last bend, and out of sight. As it vanished, each of the three boys felt the sense of isolation that came naturally with their situation for the first time. The last settlement was two hundred miles back. They were heading into the great unknown, into areas labeled “Unexplored” on the maps of that vast northern edge of the North American continent.

True, the weather was fine now and the country green and pleasant about them. But how long would that endure? What if they were beset by oncoming Winter before they could make their way to the outside? What if they were attacked by hostile Indians? What obscure fate had met the Thorwaldsson expedition, traces of which they sought?

True, the weather was nice now and the countryside was green and pleasant around them. But how long would that last? What if they were hit by the coming Winter before they could get outside? What if they were attacked by hostile Native Americans? What unknown fate had befallen the Thorwaldsson expedition, the remnants of which they were searching for?

Into the mind of each thronged such thoughts, as 24 they stood in unwonted silence. Then Mr. Hampton called to them.

Into the mind of each crowded such thoughts, as 24 they stood in unexpected silence. Then Mr. Hampton called to them.

“No time for day-dreaming. Each man to his job.”

“No time for daydreaming. Everyone needs to focus on their tasks.”

With him Tom Farnum had brought two trusted men. They hailed from Nome, but were old-timers who had been up and down Alaska for many years. Both were men of forty, sober, steady fellows who would be useful in helping distribute the burden of packs, and would, moreover, be of inestimable value in keeping the party supplied with game as well as in almost any situation that might arise. They were grizzled, weather-beaten men of medium height, both with stout frames, and because of their long existence in the lonesome north little given to talking. Their names were Dick Fairwell and Art Bowman, and they were “Dick” and “Art” to each other and the other members of the party. The boys had taken a liking to both.

With him, Tom Farnum brought two trusted guys. They were from Nome but had been traveling around Alaska for many years. Both were about forty, reliable, steady men who would be helpful in sharing the load of packs and, in addition, would be extremely valuable in keeping the group supplied with game and in nearly any situation that might come up. They were rugged, weathered men of average height, both with solid builds, and because of their long time in the lonely north, they didn't talk much. Their names were Dick Fairwell and Art Bowman, and they were “Dick” and “Art” to each other and the other members of the group. The younger guys had taken a liking to both of them.

Two light canoes had been brought along from Nome, lashed to the deck of the schooner, and in these the seven set out. The boys with Dick occupied one canoe, the other three men with a larger portion of the luggage the other.

Two light canoes were brought from Nome, secured on the deck of the schooner, and in these, the seven launched. The boys with Dick took one canoe, while the other three men handled the larger share of the luggage in the other.

When everything was in readiness, following a light breakfast on the bank, the two canoes set out, that containing Farnum, Mr. Hampton and Art taking the lead. About ten miles upstream a rapids 25 was encountered, and around this the first portage was made. Then once more they took to the water.

When everything was ready, after a light breakfast by the riverbank, the two canoes set off, with Farnum, Mr. Hampton, and Art in the lead. About ten miles upstream, they came across some rapids, and they made their first portage around it. Then they got back in the water again.

Day followed day, in this fashion, as they pushed steadily forward, until almost a week had elapsed. On the fifth day Tom Farnum let out a whoop of joy and headed his canoe for the right bank of the stream at a little gravelly beach. His sharp eye had detected a small cairn of stones on the edge of the brush, and when the others came up with him and stepped from their craft he was busily demolishing the stones comprising the mound.

Day after day went by as they made steady progress, and almost a week had passed. On the fifth day, Tom Farnum let out a shout of joy and steered his canoe toward the right bank of the stream at a small gravelly beach. His keen eye had spotted a small pile of stones at the edge of the brush, and when the others caught up with him and got out of their boats, he was busy taking apart the stones that made up the mound.

“A marker,” was the only explanation he vouchsafed. “Must have been left by Thorwaldsson. Ah.”

“A marker,” was the only explanation he gave. “Must have been left by Thorwaldsson. Ah.”

At the exclamation he stood upright, holding a small metal box in his hand. The lid was rusted on, and in his impatience, Farnum whipped out a knife and gouged it off while the others crowded around him. Inside was a fold of oilskin, which he ripped open. A folded paper was revealed, which he opened. Then he read aloud the message thereon.

At the shout, he stood up straight, holding a small metal box in his hand. The lid was rusted shut, and in his impatience, Farnum pulled out a knife and pried it off while the others gathered around him. Inside was a piece of oilskin, which he tore open. A folded piece of paper was inside, which he unfolded. Then he read the message out loud.

“It’s from Thorwaldsson all right. Listen,” he said, and read:

“It’s definitely from Thorwaldsson. Listen,” he said, and read:

“Please notify Mr. Otto Anderson, Ashland Block, Seattle, Wash., that I passed here July 2. Party intact with exception of crew sent as he ordered. Farrell says we are on right track.

“Please inform Mr. Otto Anderson, Ashland Block, Seattle, WA, that I passed through here on July 2. The party is all accounted for, except for the crew sent as he requested. Farrell says we are on the right track.”

Thorwaldsson.

Thorwaldsson.

26

“What does he mean by that reference to the crew?” asked Jack.

“What does he mean by that mention of the crew?” Jack asked.

“Well,” said Farnum, glancing at Mr. Hampton, “as your father knows, that is one of the unexplained and puzzling facts of the situation, that about the ship. You see, a skeleton crew was to be left aboard the ship and it was to winter in the MacKenzie. But of ship or crew, we have found no trace. Search for the ship was prosecuted at the first opportunity this Spring, but it had disappeared. I made a trip up the MacKenzie myself, but the only information I could gather was an occasional rumor at a trading post that a schooner had gone by, on its way out, at night. A ship that might have been the Viking, Thorwaldsson’s craft. That was last Fall. Perhaps, the skeleton crew feared to winter in the MacKenzie and started for the outside, and was caught in a storm which it was not sufficiently strong to weather. Only three or four men were to be left aboard. That is the only explanation I could think of.”

“Well,” said Farnum, glancing at Mr. Hampton, “as your father knows, this is one of the unexplained and puzzling facts of the situation regarding the ship. A skeleton crew was supposed to stay aboard the ship for the winter in the MacKenzie. But we haven't found any trace of the ship or the crew. We searched for the ship at the first opportunity this spring, but it had vanished. I personally went up the MacKenzie, but the only information I could gather was an occasional rumor at a trading post that a schooner had passed by, heading out at night. It could have been the Viking, Thorwaldsson’s ship. That was last fall. Maybe the skeleton crew got scared about staying the winter in the MacKenzie and decided to leave, only to be caught in a storm they weren't strong enough to survive. Only three or four men were supposed to stay aboard. That’s the only explanation I can think of.”

Mr. Hampton nodded.

Mr. Hampton nodded.

“As I said before,” he stated, “that seems a reasonable explanation. Three or four men, left alone, might have feared to face the Winter iced in, or might have been stricken ill, and so, for some reason that appeared good enough to them, might have decided to violate orders and start out. As to the 27 disappearance of the ship, many an undermanned vessel has gone down in a storm, without leaving a trace.”

“As I mentioned earlier,” he said, “that seems like a reasonable explanation. Three or four men, left alone, might have been too scared to face the frozen Winter, or they might have fallen ill, and for some reason that made sense to them, they might have decided to ignore orders and head out. Regarding the 27 disappearance of the ship, many under-crewed vessels have sunk in a storm without a trace.”

“But, Dad, you’ve said nothing about this,” protested Jack.

“But, Dad, you haven't said anything about this,” protested Jack.

Mr. Hampton smiled slightly.

Mr. Hampton gave a slight smile.

“There are a lot of things which I know I have never told you, Jack,” he said. “If I really have neglected to speak of this, however, it has been through an oversight. I’ve had a lot of things on my mind. But, come. We know this is the way Thorwaldsson passed. We are on the right track. So let us push on. We have still four hours of travel to do before making camp.”

“There are a lot of things I know I’ve never told you, Jack,” he said. “If I’ve really forgotten to mention this, it’s just been an oversight. I’ve had a lot on my mind. But come on. We know this is how Thorwaldsson passed. We’re on the right track. So let’s keep going. We still have four hours of travel before we set up camp.”

28CHAPTER IV.—STRIKING GOLD.

Life flowed along very pleasantly indeed, for the boys, during the weeks that followed. They were so far north that the sun shone constantly, and never a cloud came to trouble the sky, never a storm to drive them to take shelter. When they camped it was usually in the dim cool recesses of a forest of firs, beneath the dense shade of which could be found the only semblance of night.

Life was really great for the boys in the weeks that followed. They were so far north that the sun always shone, and there wasn’t a single cloud to spoil the sky, nor a storm to force them to seek shelter. When they set up camp, it was usually in the cool, shaded areas of a fir forest, where they could find the closest thing to night.

Never before had they known the delights of camp life, as they were now living it. It was like being on one continuous picnic. For a considerable period of time they found themselves in a mesh or network of streams and lakes, through which Tom Farnum guided them steadily northeastward, with never a sign of doubt as to the course to take.

Never before had they experienced the joys of camping as they were now. It felt like one long picnic. For quite a while, they found themselves surrounded by a web of streams and lakes, with Tom Farnum leading them steadily northeast without a hint of uncertainty about the direction to take.

They wondered about this, asked why they took certain forks of river or stream, why avoided others. Tom answered readily enough. From Mr. Anderson he had received a minute report containing every 29 scrap of data Farrell had been able to furnish as to the course taken by him and Cameron on going into the wild country.

They were curious about this, questioning why they chose certain forks in the river or stream and why they avoided others. Tom responded quickly. He had received a detailed report from Mr. Anderson that included every piece of information Farrell had provided about the route he and Cameron took when they ventured into the wilderness.

“So you see,” he added, “while I may not be following in the exact footsteps of Thorwaldsson, yet I am going over the same general route. Sooner or later we will cover the same ground which he covered again, and then I expect we shall find some other record which he has left behind, just as in the case of that note on the Hare Indian.”

“So you see,” he added, “while I might not be following Thorwaldsson's exact path, I’m still going through the same general area. Sooner or later we will go over the same ground he did, and then I expect we’ll find some other record he left behind, just like that note on the Hare Indian.”

This was enough for the boys. It satisfied their curiosity. They dismissed, or practically so, from their minds all worry as to the “Lost Expedition.” They were too busy enjoying life as they found it each waiting moment.

This was enough for the boys. It satisfied their curiosity. They mostly pushed aside any worries about the “Lost Expedition.” They were too busy enjoying life as it came at them in every moment.

Around each bend in a stream that their paddles took them, on the shore of each deep, silent lake, was some new marvel. Now it would be a bear grunting on the bank. Again, a deer, probably a runaway from some Eskimo herd on Summer pasture as Farnum explained, standing in the stream, and starting with a snort into the timber at their approach. Occasionally a gray wolf could be seen loping in the distance. Now and again a beaver cut across stream.

Around every curve in the stream where their paddles took them, by the edge of each deep, quiet lake, there was something new to marvel at. Sometimes it would be a bear grunting on the bank. Other times, a deer—likely a runaway from some Eskimo herd on summer pasture, as Farnum explained—would stand in the stream and take off with a snort into the trees at the sound of their approach. Occasionally, a gray wolf could be spotted loping in the distance. Every now and then, a beaver would swim across the stream.

With their light rifles the boys occasionally were permitted to pick off some game, usually wild ducks or geese, of which there were numbers along the 30 watercourses. But nothing was shot wantonly. Many a time, youthful fingers itched on the trigger, only to be restrained by the thought of the cruel uselessness of shooting merely for sport.

With their light rifles, the boys were sometimes allowed to take down some game, usually wild ducks or geese, which were plentiful along the 30 waterways. But they never shot for no reason. Many times, their young fingers itched on the trigger but were held back by the realization of the pointless cruelty of shooting just for fun.

Of other inhabitants in this vast northern wilderness, none were encountered. And at this the boys marvelled. It was as if they had the world to themselves. They could not understand it. To them it was a paradise.

Of the other people in this huge northern wilderness, none were found. The boys were amazed by this. It felt like they had the entire world to themselves. They couldn’t figure it out. To them, it was paradise.

“Wait till you see this in Winter,” said Farnum grimly. “Or rather, pray that you never do. It is a land of perpetual night, and the temperature is so low that when you stop moving you must have a fire or you will freeze to death. And it isn’t every day that you can travel. For this isn’t a land of tame Winter as you boys know it. Out of the north comes storms succeeding storm, pitiless in severity. Even the creatures of the wild cannot stand it, in many cases, and drift to the south.”

“Wait until you see this in winter,” Farnum said grimly. “Or better yet, hope you never do. It’s a place of endless night, and the temperature drops so low that if you stop moving, you need a fire or you’ll freeze to death. And you can’t travel every day. This isn’t the tame winter you guys are used to. From the north come storm after storm, relentless in their fury. Even the wild animals can’t handle it and often move south.”

“But how about the Eskimo?” asked Jack. “This is their country, isn’t it? How do they stand it?”

“But what about the Eskimo?” Jack asked. “This is their land, right? How do they cope with it?”

“Sometimes they don’t,” said Farnum. “When the hunting is poor and famine stalks through the Eskimo village, only the hardiest survive.”

“Sometimes they don’t,” said Farnum. “When the hunting is bad and hunger runs through the Eskimo village, only the strongest survive.”

“Where do they live, anyway?” struck in Frank. “Why aren’t they around here? Why haven’t we seen any?”

“Where do they live, anyway?” Frank said. “Why aren’t they around here? Why haven’t we seen any?”

“They may have seen us,” said Farnum, “and are 31 avoiding us. They are a timorous people, know the white man only by tradition. To the Eskimo, the white man is a sort of god, at least to the Eskimo of all this country north of us. Back along the coast of Alaska, of course, some sort of contact has been made. But these Eskimo never come in touch with the whites. They are a migratory people. In Summer they range far and wide on the hunt. In the Winter, they retire to the edge of the Arctic Ocean.”

“They might have spotted us,” said Farnum, “and are keeping their distance. They’re a fearful people and only know about white people through stories. To the Eskimo, white people are almost like gods, especially for the Eskimo living in this area north of us. Along the coast of Alaska, there’s been some kind of interaction, of course. But these Eskimos have no contact with white people. They’re a nomadic group. In the summer, they travel extensively for hunting. In the winter, they retreat to the edge of the Arctic Ocean.”

“But why?” asked Bob, in surprise. “I should think that would be the very place for them to steer away from.”

“But why?” Bob asked, surprised. “I would think that would be the exact place for them to avoid.”

“Oh, no,” said Farnum. “You see, all game goes far to the south in Winter, so the Eskimo goes to the ocean because it is the home of the only game left—the seal. He builds his snow house or igloo and camps near the air holes of the seal, spearing them as they come up for air. Occasionally he slays a polar bear, too.”

“Oh, no,” said Farnum. “You see, all the game migrates far to the south in the winter, so the Eskimo goes to the ocean because that's where the only game left is—the seal. He builds his snow house or igloo and camps near the air holes of the seal, spearing them as they come up for air. Occasionally, he also hunts a polar bear.”

“I confess I know very little about the Eskimo,” said Jack. “What are his weapons?”

“I admit I don’t know much about the Eskimo,” said Jack. “What weapons do they use?”

“Bows and arrows tipped with flint or copper, copper-pointed spears, and wooden knives edged with copper,” said Farnum.

“Bows and arrows tipped with flint or copper, copper-pointed spears, and wooden knives sharpened with copper,” said Farnum.

“But, a bear,” cried Bob, incredulously. “How could an Eskimo kill a great polar bear with such weapons?”

“But a bear,” Bob exclaimed, incredulously. “How could an Eskimo take down a huge polar bear with those kinds of weapons?”

“Single-handed, he couldn’t,” said Farnum. “But 32 when the bear is hunted, the whole tribe of hunters go together. They attack in a circle. Their spears or harpoons have lines attached. And as these harpoons sink into the body of the bear, the lines pull him this way and that as he charges on his tormenters. Eventually, if the Eskimo are lucky, they have him so surrounded that he cannot move. Then one dashes in and administers the death blow.”

“On his own, he couldn’t,” said Farnum. “But 32 when the bear is hunted, the whole group of hunters comes together. They attack in a circle. Their spears or harpoons have lines attached. And as these harpoons sink into the bear's body, the lines pull him this way and that as he charges at his attackers. Eventually, if the Eskimos are lucky, they surround him so he can't move. Then someone rushes in and delivers the final blow.”

“Then necessity forces them to live in tribal groups?” asked Jack.

“Then necessity makes them live in tribal groups?” asked Jack.

Farnum nodded.

Farnum nodded.

“In the Summer they often hunt alone, ranging far, for they are great travelers. But in Winter, the hunters are all back with the tribe.”

“In the summer, they often hunt alone, traveling far because they are great travelers. But in the winter, all the hunters return to the tribe.”

“And the Indians?” asked Frank.

“And the Native Americans?” asked Frank.

Farnum’s face darkened.

Farnum’s expression soured.

“There are not many,” he said. “I wish there were less. You may say all you please about the ‘noble red man.’ But all I ever heard about the Indians of the Far North doesn’t predispose me in their favor. They are cutthroats, thieves and liars. Usually they hunt somewhat to the south of us, and make their way in towards the northern Canadian settlements as Winter approaches. Let’s hope we encounter none of them.”

“There aren't many,” he said. “I wish there were fewer. You can say all you want about the ‘noble red man.’ But everything I’ve heard about the Indians of the Far North doesn’t make me feel positively toward them. They’re murderers, thieves, and liars. They usually hunt a bit south of us and head towards the northern Canadian settlements as winter comes. Let’s hope we don’t run into any of them.”

The boys wondered as they went along whether this were gold-producing country into which they were pushing. They spoke of the matter to Dick, 33 their canoe mate, at times. Taciturn though he was usually, at every mention of gold his eyes brightened, and he became almost voluble.

The boys wondered as they traveled whether they were entering a gold-rich area. They occasionally brought it up with Dick, their canoe mate. Usually quiet, he would light up at the mention of gold and become quite talkative. 33

“Never been this far north,” he said on one occasion, “no white man ever has been in here, reckon. But I’d like to stop at the foot o’ some of these rapids and wash a little gravel for luck. I sure would like to.”

“Never been this far north,” he said one time, “no white man has ever been in here, I guess. But I’d like to stop at the bottom of some of these rapids and wash a bit of gravel for luck. I really would.”

“Let’s do it the next rapids we come to,” suggested Frank, with eager interest. “It wouldn’t take long, would it?”

“Let’s do it at the next rapids we get to,” Frank suggested eagerly. “It won’t take long, right?”

“Orders is not to waste time.”

“Orders are not to waste time.”

“Well, I’ll speak to father,” said Jack. “I’m sure he’d let us try it just once.”

“Well, I’ll talk to Dad,” said Jack. “I’m sure he’d let us give it a shot just once.”

In this surmise he was correct, for the noon halt happened to be at the foot of a rapids that would necessitate a portage, and Dick and Art reported the graveled bank showed signs of “color.” Even Farnum, his mind concentrated on the task of getting his party along and on the job in hand, showed interest when addressed on the subject. With pick and pan, therefore, the two men got busy, while the boys watched with breathless interest the process of rocking the pan and washing out the gravel.

In this assumption, he was right, because the lunch break was at the base of some rapids that required a portage, and Dick and Art said the gravel bank showed signs of “color.” Even Farnum, focused on getting his group moving and on the task at hand, showed interest when the topic came up. So, with pick and pan, the two men got to work, while the boys watched with eager curiosity as they rocked the pan and washed out the gravel.

“Whoopee,” cried Dick, suddenly. “Thar she is. Color in the pan.” 34

“Whoopee,” shouted Dick, suddenly. “There she is. Color in the pan.” 34

“Sure as I’m born,” ejaculated his partner. “Strong, too.”

“Sure as I’m born,” his partner exclaimed. “Strong, too.”

All the boys could discern, however, were some dully gleaming particles at the bottom of the pan, out of which most of the gravel had been washed with the water. They had half expected to spy nuggets. Farnum and Mr. Hampton, however, were as eagerly interested as the two old-timers.

All the boys could see, though, were some dimly shining particles at the bottom of the pan, from which most of the gravel had been washed away with the water. They had half expected to find nuggets. Farnum and Mr. Hampton were just as eagerly interested as the two old-timers.

“Try another pan, men,” suggested Mr. Hampton. “Let us go a little farther upstream.”

“Try a different pan, guys,” suggested Mr. Hampton. “Let’s go a bit farther upstream.”

Once more the process was repeated. This time the pan was rich in “pay” and the excitement of the four older men mounted, hectic spots glowing dull beneath their tan in the cheeks of the two old-timers especially.

Once again, the process was repeated. This time the pan was full of “pay” and the excitement of the four older men grew, with flushed spots appearing on the tanned cheeks of the two old-timers in particular.

Then Dick, who was wielding the pick, attacked a clump of rocks in the edge of the stream at the very foot of the rapids, standing in his boots almost knee-deep in the water. For several minutes he picked and pried and finally, with a shout of delight, turned to his audience behind him on the bank and, having plunged an arm into the water, held it up dripping.

Then Dick, who was using the pick, attacked a pile of rocks at the edge of the stream right at the foot of the rapids, standing in his boots almost knee-deep in the water. For several minutes he picked and pried, and finally, with a shout of joy, turned to the people watching him on the bank and, having plunged an arm into the water, held it up dripping.

“Look,” was all he said.

"Look," was all he said.

They gazed, all eyes.

They all stared.

“Well! Well!” cried Art.

"Wow! Wow!" exclaimed Art.

A small but sizable nugget lay on Dick’s outstretched palm. 35

A small but significant nugget rested on Dick’s open palm. 35

“What luck,” cried Jack. “You certainly looked in the right place.”

“What luck,” shouted Jack. “You definitely looked in the right spot.”

“Bet there’s more gold around here,” cried Frank. “Maybe a bonanza. Who knows?”

“Bet there’s more gold around here,” shouted Frank. “Maybe a jackpot. Who knows?”

“You ought to stake a claim, Dick,” said big Bob. “I don’t know much about the process. But that’s the thing to do, isn’t it?”

“You should definitely stake a claim, Dick,” said big Bob. “I don’t know a lot about how it works. But that’s the right move, right?”

“Huh,” said Dick, generously. “Belongs to you boys well as me. You thought of it.”

“Huh,” said Dick, generously. “It belongs to you guys as much as it does to me. You thought of it.”

“Oughter work it,” spoke up Art. “Might take out a good poke this Summer.”

“Ought to work on it,” Art said. “It might pay off this Summer.”

This remark recalled Tom Farnum to the object of his expedition.

This comment brought Tom Farnum back to the purpose of his journey.

“No, no, men,” he said, sharply. “Don’t get bitten with the gold fever now. We’ve got work ahead of us, work that we contracted to do.”

“No, no, guys,” he said, sharply. “Don’t get caught up in the gold rush now. We have work ahead of us, work we agreed to do.”

“Right,” said Dick.

"Okay," said Dick.

Art’s face fell, but he, too, nodded agreement.

Art's expression changed, but he also nodded in agreement.

“Just the same,” said Farnum, softening, “there’s nothing to prevent you two from staking a claim. Some day you may come back to work it.”

“Still,” said Farnum, easing up, “there’s nothing stopping you two from claiming a spot. Someday you might return to develop it.”

“Belongs to us no more’n the rest o’ you,” said Dick, sturdily. “The young fellers wanted us to make a try at it here just for luck, an’ we did.”

“Doesn't belong to us any more than it does to the rest of you,” said Dick, firmly. “The younger guys asked us to give it a shot here just for luck, and we did.”

A warm debate followed, the boys protesting they were not entitled to any part in the find. Finally Dick capitulated.

A heated debate followed, with the boys arguing that they shouldn't be involved in the discovery at all. Finally, Dick gave in.

“Tell you what,” he said. “Art an’ me’ll stake 36 this claim an’ file on it. But if we ever come back to work her an’ she pays, we’ll declare you in.”

“Here’s the deal,” he said. “Art and I will claim this and file on it. But if we ever come back to work it and she pays, we’ll include you.”

“Not unless you let us help to finance the expedition,” said Jack, turning for confirmation to his comrades. “Isn’t that right, fellows.”

“Not unless you let us help fund the expedition,” said Jack, looking to his friends for confirmation. “Isn’t that right, guys?”

Bob and Frank agreed. Farnum put an end to the discussion.

Bob and Frank agreed. Farnum ended the conversation.

“Good enough,” he said. “Let it go at that. Now we must buckle into the job. Do you realize we’ve spent more than two hours here, when we should have stopped only a half hour? We’ve got to make this portage and push on. Come on. Everybody to his task.”

“Good enough,” he said. “Let’s leave it at that. Now we need to get to work. Do you realize we’ve spent over two hours here when we should have only taken half an hour? We need to finish this portage and keep moving. Come on. Everyone get to work.”

37CHAPTER V.—A SURPRISE THROUGH THE AIR

Joyously though time flew by for the boys, with Mr. Hampton and Tom Farnum it was a different matter. They were worried, that became increasingly plain. Finally, although Mr. Hampton purposely refrained from saying anything to disturb the boys, Jack took note of his father’s perturbation and questioned him about it.

Joyfully, time passed quickly for the boys, but for Mr. Hampton and Tom Farnum, it was a different story. Their worry was becoming more obvious. Eventually, even though Mr. Hampton intentionally held back from saying anything to upset the boys, Jack noticed his father’s unease and asked him about it.

“Well, Jack,” said his father, “we’ve been weeks on the trail. We can’t proceed much farther, without being compelled to start out. And yet so far we have discovered no further trace of Thorwaldsson’s party. When we entered the MacKenzie, which flows north, we were going to the south. Going up the Hare Indian we struck east. Since getting into the streams, rivers and lakes we have been going east. Shortly we shall strike the Coppermine, Beyond that lies the river of oil, as reported by Farrell.

“Well, Jack,” said his father, “we’ve been on the trail for weeks. We can’t go much further without having to turn back. And so far, we haven’t found any trace of Thorwaldsson’s group. When we got to the MacKenzie River, which flows north, we were heading south. After that, we followed the Hare Indian River east. Since we entered the streams, rivers, and lakes, we’ve been moving east. Soon we’ll reach the Coppermine River. Beyond that is the oil river, as Farrell reported.”

“So far we have made good time. With luck, we 38 shall be able to reach that territory before having to turn back or, rather, for we shall not retrace our steps, turn south. And we should have struck some other trace of Thorwaldsson’s party long ere this, if we are on the right track. However, you boys need not worry about this, so let’s talk of something else.”

“So far, we’ve been making good progress. If all goes well, we 38 should be able to get to that area before we have to turn back, or rather, before we head south. By now, we should have found some other sign of Thorwaldsson’s group if we’re on the right path. But you guys don’t need to stress about this, so let’s discuss something else.”

Seeing that his father had sunk into one of his rare periods when he wished to be alone with his meditations and did not welcome intrusion even from Jack, the latter moved away to join his comrades.

Seeing that his father had fallen into one of his rare moods when he wanted to be alone with his thoughts and didn’t welcome interruptions, not even from Jack, the latter moved away to join his friends.

“Dad’s plainly worried,” he said. And he explained the circumstances. “Wish I could find some way to make him forget his troubles,” he said.

“Dad's obviously worried,” he said. And he explained the situation. “I wish I could do something to help him forget his problems,” he said.

“I know what,” said Frank. “He loves music. We’re camping for the night. Although”—with a look at the sun—“there isn’t much night, is there? Well, anyhow, it’s nighttime in Edmonton, where that new broadcasting station was set up last Spring. Let’s rig up our radio and see if we can’t pick up their concert, just for luck. What do you say?”

“I know what,” said Frank. “He loves music. We’re camping for the night. Although”—glancing at the sun—“there isn’t much night, is there? Well, anyway, it’s nighttime in Edmonton, where that new broadcasting station was established last spring. Let’s set up our radio and see if we can pick up their concert, just for luck. What do you think?”

“I say, good,” declared Jack.

“Sounds good,” declared Jack.

“Edmonton’s long way off,” objected Bob.

“Edmonton’s a long way off,” Bob said.

“That’s nothing,” said Jack. “I believe we can pick it up all right.”

“That’s nothing,” Jack said. “I think we can handle it just fine.”

“In this northern country we have no static problem, anyway,” said Frank. “We couldn’t send to Edmonton with our equipment, but I’ll bet we can catch.” 39

“In this northern country, we don’t have any fixed issues, anyway,” said Frank. “We couldn’t send to Edmonton with our equipment, but I bet we can catch.” 39

While Farnum and Mr. Hampton put their heads together in low-whispered conversation, poring over a map, and while Art and Dick lay outstretched under some fir trees, already disposed for sleep, the three boys quietly got out the necessary equipment from among the luggage and set to work.

While Farnum and Mr. Hampton huddled together in a quiet conversation, studying a map, and while Art and Dick relaxed under some fir trees, ready to fall asleep, the three boys quietly pulled out the necessary gear from the luggage and got to work.

“A short distance up the stream,” said Frank, “I saw two firs taller than most, standing alone. They’re a pretty good distance apart, too. We can climb up those trees and string the aerial between them.”

“A short distance up the stream,” said Frank, “I saw two fir trees taller than most, standing alone. They’re quite a distance apart, too. We can climb those trees and string the aerial between them.”

They made their way to the trees noted by Frank, and found them exactly suited to the purpose. Jack and Frank, were lighter than Bob, took turns climbing the trees, and the wires were strung without any great difficulty. They worked busily, and when everything was all connected up, Bob looked at his watch.

They headed to the trees that Frank had pointed out and found them perfect for what they needed. Jack and Frank, who were lighter than Bob, took turns climbing the trees, and they strung the wires up without much trouble. They worked diligently, and when everything was connected, Bob checked his watch.

“Allowing for the difference in time,” he said, “they’re about ready to begin their concert. On what meter wave length does the Edmonton station send, Frank?”

“Considering the time difference,” he said, “they're just about to start their concert. What wavelength does the Edmonton station broadcast on, Frank?”

“I don’t recall. About three hundred and fifty, I suppose. We’ll tune up and try, anyway.”

“I don’t remember. About three hundred and fifty, I guess. We’ll get ready and give it a shot, anyway.”

“What dubs we are, fellows, not to have thought of this before,” said Jack.

“What fools we are, guys, not to have thought of this before,” said Jack.

“Oh, well,” said Bob, “broadcast concerts never did interest me much, anyway. I like to do the sending 40 myself, we’ve always been dog-tired when we made camp at night, and ready to turn in as quickly as Art and Dick. If it hadn’t been for your thought of bringing some relaxation and amusement to your father tonight, Jack, we’d have been asleep already.”

“Oh, well,” said Bob, “broadcast concerts never really interested me much, anyway. I prefer to handle the sending myself. We’ve always been exhausted when we set up camp at night, and ready to call it a day as quickly as Art and Dick. If it hadn’t been for your idea of bringing some relaxation

“I guess that’s right, old thing,” Jack replied. “You would have been asleep, anyway, even if the rest of us kept tossing. But what does she say, Frank? Any luck yet?”

“I guess that’s true, old buddy,” Jack replied. “You would have been asleep, anyway, even if the rest of us kept tossing. But what does she say, Frank? Any luck yet?”

Frank, who had been manipulating the controls, looked up mirthfully.

Frank, who had been adjusting the controls, looked up with a smile.

“What do you think of your musical program, Jack?” he replied. “Listen in a minute will you? They’re sending out a crop and weather report.”

“What do you think of your music program, Jack?” he replied. “Can you listen for a minute? They’re broadcasting a crop and weather report.”

Jack’s face fell, then he, too, laughed.

Jack's expression dropped, but then he laughed as well.

“Oh, well,” he said, “that’s just a preliminary. The concert will follow.”

“Oh, well,” he said, “that’s just the opening act. The concert will come next.”

“No,” answered Frank, who had resumed his headpiece, “now it’s a bulletin report on the day’s news events. Listen. Why, great—”

“No,” replied Frank, who had put his headset back on, “now it’s a bulletin report on today’s news. Listen. Wow—”

His voice died. Over his face came an expression of surprise.

His voice faded. An expression of surprise crossed his face.

Jack and Bob sprang to take up the other headpieces attached to the box. Over their features also spread amazement and even consternation. They listened intently. Then all three simultaneously tore off the receivers and looked at each other. 41

Jack and Bob quickly grabbed the other headsets attached to the box. They also showed amazement and even shock on their faces. They listened carefully. Then all three of them simultaneously ripped off the receivers and glanced at each other. 41

“Whew, what do you know about that?” said Bob, in an awed tone.

“Wow, what do you think about that?” said Bob, in a amazed tone.

“And on the very night that we decided to set up the radio, too,” said Frank.

“And on the very night that we decided to set up the radio, too,” Frank said.

“It seems like the hand of fate,” declared Jack. “Say, we must get father and Tom Farnum.”

“It feels like fate,” said Jack. “We need to get Dad and Tom Farnum.”

“Thorwaldsson’s airship found wrecked on land near the mouth of the MacKenzie,” said Bob. “And the skeleton of the aviator. Can you beat it?” he ejaculated again.

“Thorwaldsson’s airship was found wrecked on land near the mouth of the MacKenzie,” Bob said. “And the skeleton of the aviator. Can you believe it?” he exclaimed again.

“Hey, Jack, wait a minute,” cried Frank, running after his companion, who already had started for camp. “Discovered by Indians who were bringing out furs, did you get that?”

“Hey, Jack, hold on a second,” Frank called out, chasing after his friend, who had already set off for camp. “Did you catch that? We got discovered by Indians who were bringing out furs!”

Jack nodded, but saved his breath as he continued to run. Frank fell in beside him, Bob pounding at his heels.

Jack nodded but held his breath as he kept running. Frank fell in next to him, with Bob chasing right behind.

In a few moments they burst excitedly upon the graveled beach by the river, where camp had been made for the night. Dick and Art lay outstretched in slumber under the nearest fir trees. Mr. Hampton and Farnum were still deep in their discussion, and apparently had not even been aware of the absence of the boys, for they looked up in surprise as the latter approached.

In a few moments, they excitedly arrived at the gravel beach by the river, where they had set up camp for the night. Dick and Art were sprawled out, fast asleep under the closest fir trees. Mr. Hampton and Farnum were still engrossed in their conversation and seemed not to have noticed the boys were gone, as they looked up in surprise when the boys came closer.

“What is it, Jack? What’s the matter?” demanded Mr. Hampton, rising to his feet in alarm, as he noted his son’s excitement. 42

“What’s wrong, Jack? What’s going on?” asked Mr. Hampton, getting to his feet in concern as he noticed his son’s excitement. 42

Quickly, Jack related what had occurred, describing their setting up of the radio, their picking-up of the Edmonton station’s nightly program, and their discovery that Thorwaldsson’s airship had been found far behind them near the mouth of the MacKenzie.

Quickly, Jack shared what had happened, describing setting up the radio, tuning into the Edmonton station’s nightly program, and discovering that Thorwaldsson’s airship had been located far behind them near the mouth of the MacKenzie.

“It was only a bulletin news report, Dad,” Jack explained, “yet I suppose it contains all the facts. Evidently the discovery of the airship had been made weeks ago by Indians, going to the mouth of the MacKenzie with their Winter catch of furs. But, of course, it took a long time for the news to reach civilization. It was just made public today. The very day, too, that we decided to rig up the radio. It certainly seems like the hand of fate, doesn’t it, Dad? If we had waited until tomorrow, or set up the radio yesterday, probably we would not have known of this discovery.”

“It was just a news bulletin, Dad,” Jack explained, “but I guess it has all the details. Apparently, the Indians found the airship weeks ago while heading to the mouth of the MacKenzie with their winter catch of furs. But it took a while for the news to get to civilization. It just became public today. And it’s the same day we decided to set up the radio. It really feels like fate, doesn’t it, Dad? If we had waited until tomorrow or set up the radio yesterday, we probably wouldn’t have heard about this discovery.”

Mr. Hampton nodded, but absently. Already his mind was busy with the problem.

Mr. Hampton nodded, but without really paying attention. His mind was already focused on the problem.

“Did the report state any message or papers of any sort were found on the body of the aviator?”

“Did the report say if any messages or documents were found on the aviator's body?”

“No. Only that the body had been there a long time, as nothing but the skeleton remained.”

“No. Just that the body had been there a long time, since only the skeleton was left.”

“And that was all?”

“Is that all?”

“That was all the definite information,” said Frank. “Of course, there was a word or two of speculation as to what had occurred. The theory 43 was advanced that the aviator was flying to summon aid for Thorwaldsson, who was in some predicament, but that some accident occurred to his engine while flying, and he fell to his death.”

“That was all the solid information,” Frank said. “Of course, there was some speculation about what happened. The theory 43 suggested that the pilot was flying to get help for Thorwaldsson, who was in trouble, but that something went wrong with his engine while in the air, leading to his crash.”

“A plausible enough theory,” said Farnum. “But, in that case, I can’t understand why the aviator did not bear some message from Thorwaldsson. Can you, Mr. Hampton?”

“A believable theory,” said Farnum. “But if that's the case, I don’t get why the aviator didn’t bring some message from Thorwaldsson. Do you understand it, Mr. Hampton?”

Mr. Hampton shook his head.

Mr. Hampton shook his head.

“That’s not the only puzzling thing,” he said. “The disappearance from the MacKenzie of Thorwaldsson’s ship, the death of the aviator, the lack of message on his body, the swallowing up of Thorwaldsson and his party, Thorwaldsson’s failure to send any radio messages—all these need explaining.

“That’s not the only confusing thing,” he said. “The disappearance of Thorwaldsson’s ship from the MacKenzie, the death of the pilot, the absence of a message on his body, the vanishing of Thorwaldsson and his group, and Thorwaldsson’s failure to send any radio messages—all of these need to be explained."

“We must face the fact,” he continued, “that some disaster of a totally unexpected nature has befallen Thorwaldsson’s expedition. And I mean by that a disaster of man’s agency. They were prepared for practically all eventualities in their grapple with nature. Although the Winter was severe, yet they were well provisioned, had Farrell who knew the country, and were prepared in every way for a lengthy stay. Even if worst came to worst, and Winter proved too much for them, some would have survived and brought out word of what had befallen.”

“We have to acknowledge,” he continued, “that a completely unexpected disaster has hit Thorwaldsson’s expedition. And by that, I mean a disaster caused by humans. They were ready for almost every scenario they might face in their struggle with nature. Although the winter was harsh, they were well-stocked, had Farrell who knew the area, and were equipped for a long stay. Even in the worst-case scenario, if the winter was too much for them, some would have survived and brought back news of what happened.”

“Then you think, Dad—” 44

“Then you think, Dad—”

Jack regarded his father, wide-eyed.

Jack looked at his dad, wide-eyed.

“I think, Jack,” said the latter firmly, “that it is time to take you boys into our complete confidence, Farnum and I have been talking this matter over. We feel pretty certain that some powerful man or group of men has knowledge of Farrell’s discovery of the river of oil, and is working against us. How to explain the obtaining of that knowledge I do not know, But, perhaps, some traitor in Anderson’s employ, somebody high in his confidence, got some word of it. Perhaps, Thorwaldsson in an unguarded moment, let some bit of information fall. Oil, you know, is a vital necessity of the world. Discovery of a vast new field would make great fortunes.

“I think, Jack,” said the latter firmly, “that it’s time to fully trust you guys. Farnum and I have been discussing this issue. We believe that some powerful individual or group is aware of Farrell’s discovery of the oil river and is working against us. I’m not sure how they got this information, but perhaps there’s a traitor in Anderson’s organization, someone he trusts, who leaked it. Maybe Thorwaldsson, in a moment of weakness, revealed some details. You know, oil is crucial for the world. Discovering a massive new field could lead to huge fortunes.”

“Whoever heard of it, heard of Farrell’s discovery, would realize that the only way to come upon it would be to follow the Thorwaldsson expedition, dog its steps and, at the psychological moment, strike. In other words, when the field was rediscovered by Farrell, wipe out the Thorwaldsson expedition, and claim possession.

“Whoever heard of it, heard of Farrell’s discovery, would realize that the only way to find it would be to follow the Thorwaldsson expedition, shadow its moves, and, at the right moment, make a move. In other words, when Farrell rediscovered the field, eliminate the Thorwaldsson expedition and take possession.”

“Events, as they have occurred, seem to fit in with this theory. The disappearance of Thorwaldsson’s ship from the MacKenzie. Apparently it traveled only at night, thus slipping by the scattered trading posts on the great river. It has never been heard of since. It might very easily have been scuttled and sunk, or else materially changed in appearance in 45 some little bay on that far northern coast of the Arctic. That would mean that the crew was bought up, but that is not an impossibility, for men I am sorry to say break faith for gain. As to the airship, the aviator whom I know of as a man true and tried, may have sought to make his escape to the outside when Thorwaldsson was captured—as I believe likely—and may have paid with his life for his devotion, through some unforeseen accident to his machine.”

“Events, as they have happened, seem to align with this theory. The disappearance of Thorwaldsson’s ship from the MacKenzie. It apparently only traveled at night, managing to avoid the scattered trading posts along the great river. It hasn’t been heard from since. It could have easily been scuttled and sunk, or changed in appearance in some small bay on that far northern coast of the Arctic. That would suggest that the crew was taken, but that isn’t impossible, as men, unfortunately, betray their loyalty for gain. As for the airship, the aviator I know to be trustworthy might have tried to escape to safety when Thorwaldsson was captured—something I believe is likely—and may have lost his life for his loyalty, due to some unforeseen accident with his machine.”

The boys stood stunned. Finally Jack broke silence.

The boys stood in shock. Finally, Jack spoke up.

“But, Dad, how terrible,” he said in a shocked tone. “To think of men being so unscrupulous.”

“But, Dad, how awful,” he said in a shocked tone. “To think that men can be so ruthless.”

“Not all men, Jack,” said his father. “Remember that.”

“Not all men, Jack,” his father said. “Keep that in mind.”

“Mr. Hampton,” said Frank. “What do you intend to do?”

“Mr. Hampton,” Frank said. “What do you plan to do?”

“Frankly, I don’t know,” said the latter. “Now that we are within striking distance of our objective—the river of oil—I do not want to give up. If it lies where we believe it to lie, we can reach it before necessity compels us to flee south to escape oncoming Winter. That will mean that we can map the route for future operation. I had at one time, too, although I did not mention it to you boys, some hope that we would be able to follow the river out into the Arctic and discover a route of approach by 46 water. But we may not have time for that. However, once we do locate the river by land approach, we will have a pretty accurate idea of whether it can be reached by ship through the Arctic Ocean in Summer.

“Honestly, I don’t know,” said the other. “Now that we’re close to our goal—the river of oil—I don’t want to give up. If it’s where we think it is, we can reach it before we have to head south to escape the coming Winter. That means we’ll be able to map the route for future operations. At one point, I had some hope, although I didn’t mention it to you guys, that we could follow the river into the Arctic and find a water route. But we might not have time for that. Still, once we find the river by land, we’ll have a good idea of whether it can be accessed by ship through the Arctic Ocean in Summer.

“But whether to push on and imperil you lads, and the rest of us, in the light of what we suspect lies ahead, I do not know. We shall have to sleep over it.”

“But I'm not sure if we should continue and put you guys, and the rest of us, in danger considering what we think is ahead. We'll need to think it over tonight.”

After some further conversation, all returned to where the boys had rigged up the radio. Dick and Art were childishly delighted at the concert, the first in their experience. Farnum was almost equally stirred. As to Mr. Hampton, for the time he forgot his worries in enjoyment of the music. As showmen, the boys were in the element.

After some more chatting, everyone went back to where the boys had set up the radio. Dick and Art were thrilled about the concert, their first one ever. Farnum was almost just as excited. As for Mr. Hampton, he momentarily forgot his worries and enjoyed the music. The boys were in their element as showmen.

More than an hour passed, and the concert was still in progress, when Frank, who had been absent unnoted suddenly approached from the thick forest of firs on the bend, below which lay their camp, with a face so pale that Jack, who first caught sight of him, became alarmed.

More than an hour passed, and the concert was still going on when Frank, who had gone unnoticed, suddenly emerged from the dense fir forest around the bend, just below their camp. His face was so pale that Jack, who spotted him first, felt a sense of alarm.

“What is it, Frank?” he asked, seizing his comrade by an arm.

“What’s wrong, Frank?” he asked, grabbing his friend by the arm.

For a moment Frank was speechless. He swallowed convulsively, but was unable to make a reply. The others looked at him in astonishment, 47 and all tore the headpieces off and neglected the closing number of the concert, as they stared at him.

For a moment, Frank was at a loss for words. He swallowed hard, but couldn’t respond. The others stared at him in shock, 47 and everyone ripped off their headpieces, ignoring the final number of the concert as they watched him.

With outstretched arm, Frank pointed towards the point of land, making a bend in the stream, beyond which lay their camp.

With his arm extended, Frank pointed to the stretch of land that curved in the stream, beyond which their camp was located.

48CHAPTER VI.—INDIANS!

“Indians.”

“Indigenous peoples.”

That was all Frank said, but it was sufficient. Over the faces of Mr. Hampton, Farnum and the two men, Dick and Art, came looks of alarm.

That was all Frank said, but it was enough. Looks of alarm spread over the faces of Mr. Hampton, Farnum, and the two men, Dick and Art.

“In camp,” asked Jack, a sudden thought striking him. “Maybe they’re just visitors.”

“In camp,” Jack asked, a sudden thought hitting him. “Maybe they’re just visitors.”

But Farnum shook his head decisively, before Frank could reply.

But Farnum shook his head firmly before Frank could respond.

“The only Indians in this country hate the white man,” he said. “They have had some cause, goodness knows. But the point is, they hate us.” Turning abruptly to Frank, he said:

“The only Native Americans in this country hate the white man,” he said. “They have every reason to, that’s for sure. But the point is, they hate us.” Turning suddenly to Frank, he said:

“Do they know where we are? Were you seen?”

“Do they know where we are? Did anyone see you?”

“I was approaching our camp from this side,” said Frank, who had recovered his speech. “I was in search of a handkerchief, for I’ve got a little cold, and found I did not have one with me. Anyway, my feet made no sound on the pine needles, and I was screened from the camp by the trees. Suddenly, 49 as I neared the last fringe, I saw a dozen Indians or more steal out of the trees on the other side of the clearing. They fell upon our belongings and started going through them. I hurried away to warn you.”

“I was coming toward our camp from this side,” Frank explained, having found his voice again. “I was looking for a handkerchief because I have a slight cold and realized I didn’t have one with me. Anyway, my feet were silent on the pine needles, and the trees hid me from the camp. Suddenly, 49 as I got close to the edge, I saw a dozen or more Indians emerge from the trees on the other side of the clearing. They attacked our stuff and started rummaging through it. I rushed away to warn you.”

“Quick,” said Farnum, “there is no time to lose. We are seven and all armed. They saw us depart and probably thought this was a grand chance to rifle our camp. Waited a while to see if we were coming back at once. I imagine they are just thieves. Well, we’ll give them a lesson. Come on.”

“Quick,” said Farnum, “there’s no time to waste. We’re seven and all armed. They saw us leave and probably thought this was a great opportunity to raid our camp. They waited a bit to see if we’d be coming back right away. I bet they’re just thieves. Well, let’s teach them a lesson. Let’s go.”

Mr. Hampton laid a detaining hand on Farnum’s arm.

Mr. Hampton placed a restraining hand on Farnum’s arm.

“Even if they are thieves,” he said. “We want no bloodshed. Shoot over their heads, if shooting is necessary.”

“Even if they’re thieves,” he said. “We don’t want any bloodshed. Shoot over their heads, if you have to shoot.”

Farnum’s face fell.

Farnum looked disappointed.

“All right, sir,” he said. “Just as you say. But we’ll have to hurry, or they’ll get away with everything and escape in our canoes. Then we would be out of luck, indeed.”

“All right, sir,” he said. “Just like you said. But we need to hurry, or they’ll get away with everything and escape in our canoes. Then we’d be in big trouble, for sure.”

With beating hearts, the party stole back through the trees, spread out with intervals of several yards between each. Dick and Art, who never stirred anywhere without their rifles with them, being old-timers who knew what it meant to be separated from their weapons in this wild land, were on the ends of the line. The boys had left their rifles behind, 50 as had Mr. Hampton. Farnum, however, had brought his, and held the middle position. The other four were armed with their revolvers.

With racing hearts, the group quietly made their way back through the trees, spaced out with several yards between each person. Dick and Art, who never went anywhere without their rifles because they were seasoned veterans aware of the dangers of being unarmed in this wild area, were on the ends of the line. The boys had left their rifles behind, 50 as had Mr. Hampton. Farnum, however, had brought his rifle and occupied the center position. The other four were carrying their revolvers.

As they neared the fringe of trees forming the last rampart between them and camp, crouching behind tree trunks as they stole forward, they could see a group of Indians still busy over their disordered luggage, which had been opened and tossed about near the fire. Another group was at the water’s edge, loading the canoes which had been drawn up on the sand.

As they got closer to the edge of the trees forming the final barrier between them and the camp, crouching behind tree trunks as they moved forward, they saw a group of Native Americans still working on their scattered belongings, which had been opened and tossed around near the fire. Another group was by the water's edge, loading the canoes that had been pulled up on the sand.

“Just in time,” thought Jack.

“Right on time,” thought Jack.

Then his eye was caught by a picturesque figure of a man emerging from the little tent which Mr. Hampton employed, because he was a sufferer from rheumatism and wanted some shelter to keep off night chills in case they were late in getting out of the country, but which at present frequently was not set up on their halts. The present occasion, however, a whim to sleep under canvas rather than the fir trees had possessed him, and the tent had been set up.

Then his eye was drawn to a striking figure of a man coming out of the small tent that Mr. Hampton used. He needed the tent because he had rheumatism and wanted some protection from nighttime chills in case they were delayed in leaving the area. However, it often wasn't set up during their stops. On this occasion, though, he had a sudden desire to sleep under the canvas instead of the fir trees, so the tent had been set up.

The man who caught Jack’s attention differed little in dress from Dick and Art, but about his head was bound a red bandanna handkerchief in piratical fashion, and this suggestion was increased by his long, drooping black mustaches. Jack could see him clearly, and thought that seldom had he 51 looked upon a more villainous countenance. The fellow held a piece of paper in his hand, and was reading it with evident satisfaction.

The man who grabbed Jack’s attention looked similar in clothes to Dick and Art, but he had a red bandana wrapped around his head like a pirate, which was emphasized by his long, drooping black mustache. Jack could see him clearly and thought he had rarely seen a more deceitful face. The guy was holding a piece of paper and reading it with obvious delight.

A low exclamation from Farnum, next in line on his left, drew Jack’s attention. He looked at the latter, crouching behind a tree. Farnum’s eyes were ablaze. He had raised his rifle and was pointing it at the man before the tent. The next moment there was a report, the paper fell from the fellow’s hand, and he emitted a howl of surprise and pain.

A low shout from Farnum, who was next in line to Jack's left, caught his attention. He glanced over at Farnum, who was crouched behind a tree. Farnum's eyes were on fire. He had raised his rifle and was aiming it at the guy in front of the tent. In the next moment, there was a loud bang, the paper dropped from the guy's hand, and he let out a scream of shock and pain.

“Just the hand,” Jack overheard Farnum say in a tone of vexation, as he prepared to fire again. But the other, seizing his wounded hand in the unwounded one, did not wait for the attack. Running low and in zigzag fashion, he darted for the cover of the trees on the other side of the camp, at the same time shouting an unintelligible warning to his companions.

“Just the hand,” Jack heard Farnum say irritably as he got ready to shoot again. But the other guy, gripping his injured hand with the uninjured one, didn’t wait for the attack. He crouched low and ran in a zigzag pattern, dashing for the cover of the trees on the other side of the camp while shouting a garbled warning to his teammates.

“Fire,” shrieked Farnum, pumping another shot after the fleeing man, that kicked up the dirt at his heels. “That’s Lupo the Wolf. Shoot to kill.”

“Fire,” yelled Farnum, taking another shot at the fleeing man that kicked up dirt at his feet. “That’s Lupo the Wolf. Shoot to kill.”

Jack shot with the rest, but remembering his father’s exhortation fired high. The volley was general. From the rifles of Art, Dick and Farnum came deeper notes of heavy weapons, while from the four revolvers of the others poured a succession of shots. It sounded as if an army were opening fire from the woods. 52

Jack shot with the others, but recalling his dad's advice, aimed high. The gunfire was widespread. Art, Dick, and Farnum's rifles produced deeper sounds of powerful weapons, while the four revolvers of the others fired off a stream of shots. It felt like an army was launching an attack from the woods. 52

The Indians did not stay upon the order of their going. Those grouped about the luggage ran after the disappearing man Farnum had called Lupo the Wolf, while the other group at the canoes dashed away along the graveled bank of the stream. One, however, sought to launch the canoes into the swift current before departing, but his first effort was ineffectual, and any further attempt was stopped by a bullet from Mr. Hampton’s revolver, which winged him in an arm and sent him scurrying after his fellows.

The Indians didn’t wait to leave. Those near the luggage chased after the man Farnum called Lupo the Wolf, while the other group at the canoes ran along the gravelly bank of the stream. One person, however, tried to push the canoes into the fast current before leaving, but his first attempt failed. Any further efforts were halted by a bullet from Mr. Hampton’s revolver, which grazed his arm and made him run back to join his companions.

“Dick, Art, here,” cried Farnum, peremptorily.

“Dick, Art, here,” shouted Farnum, decisively.

The two ran to his side.

The two rushed to his side.

“That was Lupo the Wolf,” Farnum explained rapidly, his voice betraying his excitement. “You can guess what that means?”

“That's Lupo the Wolf,” Farnum said quickly, his voice showing his excitement. “Can you guess what that means?”

The others nodded, with compressed lips.

The others nodded, their lips pressed together.

“I want you to trail them. Don’t run into danger, but see if their camp is nearby.”

“I want you to follow them. Don’t put yourself in danger, but check if their camp is close by.”

With nods of understanding, the two frontiersmen were off at the run, not crossing the open camp, but circling it amongst the trees. Then Farnum turned to Mr. Hampton, and the boys crowding at his heels.

With knowing nods, the two frontiersmen took off running, not crossing the open camp, but weaving through the trees around it. Then Farnum turned to Mr. Hampton and the boys gathered closely behind him.

“That wasn’t just an attack from Indian thieves,” he said. “Mr. Hampton”—and his voice took on a solemn tone—“that was a blow from the enemy.”

"That wasn’t just a raid by Indian thieves," he said. "Mr. Hampton"—and his voice became serious—"that was a strike from the enemy."

“What do you mean?” 53

"What do you mean?"

“They were desperadoes under the personal leadership of Lupo the Wolf.”

“They were outlaws under the personal leadership of Lupo the Wolf.”

“And he?”

"And him?"

“He is a cross-breed, half Indian, half white, and the most notorious bad man in the north. He is known not only throughout the length and breadth of Alaska, but throughout the Yukon of Canada, too. From Ketchikan to Arctic City, and from Nome to Dawson, he has gambled, fought, knifed, murdered, and never been brought to book. Ah, you consider Alaska is law-abiding these days. To a certain extent, the towns and mining camps have grown more orderly and there are sheriffs ‘north of 54.’ But might still rules in the camps.”

“He's a mixed-race guy, half Indian and half white, and he's the most infamous criminal in the north. He's known not just all over Alaska but also throughout the Yukon in Canada. From Ketchikan to Arctic City, and from Nome to Dawson, he's gambled, fought, stabbed, murdered, and has never faced justice. Ah, you think Alaska is law-abiding these days. To some degree, the towns and mining camps have become more orderly, and there are sheriffs ‘north of 54.’ But power still rules in the camps.”

Farnum spoke bitterly, and leaned a moment on his rifle. As it was evident, however, that he had not yet finished, the others did not interrupt. Presently he resumed.

Farnum spoke bitterly and leaned for a moment on his rifle. However, since it was clear that he wasn't done yet, the others didn't interrupt. Soon, he continued.

“Lupo recruits his men from the fisheries. Men of the lowest type come there in Summer, in droves, lured by the high wages. They form temporary alliances with the native women. Then in the Fall, they depart. You can guess what the children of such lawless unions are like. They are cross-breeds, inheriting the most vicious and lawless characteristics of the human race. It is from them Lupo recruits his following.”

“Lupo hires his crew from the fishing industry. Every summer, a lot of low-status men come in, attracted by the high pay. They often form short-term relationships with local women. Then, in the fall, they leave. You can imagine what the kids from these unstable unions are like. They are mixed breeds, inheriting the most aggressive and unruly traits of humanity. It's from them that Lupo builds his gang.”

“But why should they be away over here, in this 54 unpeopled wilderness?” asked Mr. Hampton. “Unless—” He paused and looked questioningly at Farnum.

“But why are they over here, in this 54 empty wilderness?” asked Mr. Hampton. “Unless—” He stopped and looked at Farnum with a questioning expression.

The latter nodded.

The latter agreed.

“That’s it,” he said. “Why? Unless, if you will let me finish for you, Lupo is on our trail. And that I believe to be the case. When Frank here first came with word of Indians in camp, I considered them merely raiders from some passing body of hunters. But when I found Lupo at their head, I knew better. The wonder to me is,” he said, growing thoughtful, “that he did not send men to trail us and kill us or take us prisoner.”

“That's it,” he said. “Why? Unless, if you let me finish for you, Lupo is after us. And I think that’s true. When Frank first showed up with news of Indians in the camp, I thought they were just raiders from a passing group of hunters. But when I found out Lupo was leading them, I realized I was wrong. What I find surprising is,” he said, becoming thoughtful, “that he didn't send men to follow us and either kill us or take us prisoner.”

Mr. Hampton shrugged.

Mr. Hampton shrugged.

“Even the cunningest slip up now and then,” he said. “Perhaps his men wanted to loot first. And, anyway, they had only been here a few moments when, thanks to Frank, we were able to surprise them. Well, thanks to our good angel, we came off as well as we did. Nothing stolen, our canoes still here, nobody hurt.”

“Even the cleverest make mistakes sometimes,” he said. “Maybe his men wanted to loot first. And anyway, they had only been here for a few moments when, thanks to Frank, we managed to catch them off guard. Well, thanks to our lucky stars, we got off as well as we did. Nothing stolen, our canoes are still here, and nobody's hurt.”

“Ah,” said Farnum, darkly, “we’re not out of the woods yet. If Lupo the Wolf is after us, well—there is trouble ahead.”

“Ah,” said Farnum, grimly, “we’re not in the clear yet. If Lupo the Wolf is after us, then we’re in for some trouble.”

55CHAPTER VII.—A MAN OF THE “MOUNTED.”

While Mr. Hampton and Farnum turned in to take inventory to discover what, if anything, had been stolen, the boys went back to take down and pack their radio outfit. As it lay in the opposite direction from that taken by the Indians who, moreover, were being tracked by Dick and Art and could not double back without warning being given, it was considered safe for the boys.

While Mr. Hampton and Farnum went to check inventory to see if anything had been stolen, the boys returned to dismantle and pack their radio gear. Since it was located in the opposite direction from where the Indians had gone, and since Dick and Art were tracking them and would have no chance to double back without being noticed, it was thought to be safe for the boys.

When they returned to camp, they found the two frontiersmen ahead of them. These reported the Indian camp pitched some two miles in their rear and that, upon arrival, Lupo and his men had packed up and taken canoe on the back track.

When they got back to camp, they found the two frontiersmen in front of them. They reported that the Indian camp was set up about two miles behind them and that, when they arrived, Lupo and his men had packed up and taken the canoe back.

“Now what does that mean?” asked Farnum, thoughtfully. “It is probable that Lupo has been behind us all the way, if what I suspect is true, namely that they have been trailing us. But why should they be fleeing now?”

“Now what does that mean?” Farnum asked thoughtfully. “It's likely that Lupo has been following us the whole time, if my suspicion is correct, which is that they have been tracking us. But why are they running away now?”

“They can’t have been close to us all the time, 56 Mr. Farnum,” said Bob, “or why weren’t we attacked before?”

“They can’t have been close to us all the time, 56 Mr. Farnum,” Bob said, “or why didn’t they attack us earlier?”

Farnum nodded.

Farnum nodded.

“That’s true enough,” he said. “It may be that Lupo started late and has been all this time catching up with us.”

"That's definitely true," he said. "It's possible that Lupo started late and has been trying to catch up with us this whole time."

Breaking a thoughtful silence, Mr. Hampton said:

Breaking a thoughtful silence, Mr. Hampton said:

“As a matter of fact, that seems the most probable explanation. The other side, Farnum, probably has a spy at Nome, of whom you are unaware. But the spy knows your identity. Your story of taking us into the wilderness to hunt may have deceived this spy. But then, later, word would reach him from Seattle of my identity. Not that it is commonly known. But if some traitor close to Anderson is trading on Farrell’s secret, my connection with Anderson would be suspected, especially as several years ago I worked with the Anderson oil crowd in New Mexico. So words would reach Nome to watch me. Then someone would start out on our trail.”

“As a matter of fact, that seems like the most likely explanation. The other side, Farnum, probably has a spy in Nome that you don’t know about. But this spy knows who you are. Your story about taking us into the wilderness to hunt might have fooled this spy. But later, word would reach him from Seattle about my identity. Not that it’s widely known. But if some traitor close to Anderson is exploiting Farrell’s secret, my connection with Anderson would be suspected, especially since I worked with the Anderson oil crew in New Mexico several years ago. So news would get to Nome to keep an eye on me. Then someone would set out to follow our trail.”

“And that someone was Lupo,” said Farnum. “A fine cutthroat.”

“And that someone was Lupo,” said Farnum. “A real ruthless criminal.”

An earnest discussion followed. What did this turning back of Lupo the Wolf mean? Did he intend to stick to their trail, but at a greater distance in the rear? Or did he plan to encircle them and 57 lie in ambush ahead? That his retreat was other than momentary, and meant he intended giving up their pursuit, nobody believed.

An intense conversation took place. What did Lupo the Wolf's retreat mean? Did he plan to follow them at a safer distance? Or was he trying to surround them and set up an ambush ahead? No one believed that his withdrawal was just temporary and that he actually intended to abandon the chase. 57

“Look here, Dad,” said Jack, during the course of this discussion, “don’t you consider it quite likely that Lupo intends to take us by surprise and attack us, rather than to retreat?”

“Hey Dad,” said Jack, during this discussion, “don’t you think it’s pretty likely that Lupo plans to surprise us and attack, instead of retreating?”

Mr. Hampton nodded.

Mr. Hampton agreed.

“I do, indeed, Jack,” he said. “A cutthroat such as Lupo would have brought his band of desperadoes here for only one purpose, and that is, to dispose of us. We were lucky this time by reason of the fact that they came upon our camp first, and stopped to loot. But from now on we shall have to be continually on our guard.”

“I really do, Jack,” he said. “A ruthless guy like Lupo would have brought his gang of outlaws here for just one reason: to take us out. We got lucky this time because they hit our camp first and decided to steal from us. But from now on, we need to stay alert all the time.”

“It’s a good thing, Mr. Hampton, that this is the long Summer, when daylight never fails,” said Frank. “That makes it easier to guard against a surprise attack.”

“It’s a good thing, Mr. Hampton, that this is the long Summer, when daylight never fails,” said Frank. “That makes it easier to guard against a surprise attack.”

“Yes,” Mr. Hampton agreed, “that makes it easier. But from now on, we shall have to be on the watch continually.”

“Yes,” Mr. Hampton agreed, “that makes it easier. But from now on, we need to stay vigilant all the time.”

He was silent a moment, thinking. Then he turned to the other members of the party, Farnum, Dick and Art being gathered about him as well as the boys, preparatory to the launching of the canoes, which were ready loaded.

He was silent for a moment, thinking. Then he turned to the other members of the group, with Farnum, Dick, and Art gathered around him along with the boys, getting ready to launch the canoes, which were already loaded.

“Are we making a mistake in letting these fellows 58 out of sight?” he asked. “Would it be better to set Dick and Art to watch them, and appoint a rendezvous where we can come together later?”

“Are we making a mistake by letting these guys 58 out of our sight?” he asked. “Would it be smarter to have Dick and Art keep an eye on them, and schedule a meeting point where we can regroup later?”

The two Alaskans were silent. Their faces, however, showed approval of the plan. Farnum struck his forehead with clenched fist in a characteristic gesture.

The two Alaskans were quiet. Their faces, though, showed they agreed with the plan. Farnum hit his forehead with a clenched fist in his usual gesture.

“Just what I would have proposed myself, if I had been awake,” he confessed. “Dick, Art, do you think you could pick up their trail?”

“Exactly what I would have suggested if I had been awake,” he admitted. “Dick, Art, do you think you could track their path?”

The two nodded.

The two agreed.

“They won’t back track far,” said Dick. “Art an’ me can follow ’em afoot. That last portage is only four miles back, an’ we can catch up with ’em there. Now about where to meet up with you again?”

“They won’t backtrack too far,” said Dick. “Art and I can follow them on foot. That last portage is only four miles back, and we can catch up with them there. Now, where should we meet up with you again?”

“None of us know this country,” said Farnum, “and so it will be difficulty to appoint a rendezvous. But, look here. Lupo undoubtedly intends to continue our pursuit, and won’t let our trail go cold. Consequently, you will be near us. I think the best plan will be to report to us at every camp. One of you can keep watch on Lupo while the other brings in a report.”

“None of us really know this country,” said Farnum, “so it’s going to be hard to pick a meeting spot. But, look. Lupo definitely plans to keep following us and won’t let our trail go cold. Because of that, you’ll need to stay close. I think the best strategy is for you to check in with us at every camp. One of you can keep an eye on Lupo while the other brings back a report.”

“Good enough,” said Dick, the more loquacious of the pair. “Look for us at tomorrow’s camp.”

“Sounds good,” said Dick, who was the more talkative one of the two. “Catch us at tomorrow’s camp.”

Supplied with bacon and a little flour sufficient for a meal or two, guns at the trail, the pair struck 59 swiftly on the back trail, disappeared among the trees at the bend and were gone from sight.

Supplied with bacon and a little flour enough for a meal or two, guns ready, the duo quickly made their way back along the trail, vanished among the trees at the bend, and were out of sight.

“All right, boys,” said Farnum. “Let’s get going. Can you manage your canoe all right by yourselves?”

“All right, guys,” said Farnum. “Let’s get moving. Can you handle your canoe okay on your own?”

Mr. Hampton laughed.

Mr. Hampton chuckled.

“I think they can scrape along, Farnum,” he said. “Probably we’ll be asking one of them to help us before long. Well, come on.”

“I think they can get by, Farnum,” he said. “We’ll probably be asking one of them for help soon. Well, let’s go.”

Paddles dipped into the stream once more, the canoes shot away, and, with Farnum leading to set the course, the boys fell in behind. In the leading canoe, as the two men settled down to the stroke a low-voiced conversation began that lasted a long time. What Mr. Hampton and Farnum were saying could not be heard, for the gap between the two canoes, though not great, was considerable. Moreover, they spoke in low tones. But the boys sensed an undercurrent of anxiety felt by both the older men. As for themselves, however, they were not worried. On the contrary, the excitement of finding themselves trailed had brightened them wonderfully.

Paddles hit the water again, the canoes sped off, and with Farnum leading the way, the boys followed behind. In the first canoe, as the two men settled into their rowing rhythm, a quiet conversation started that went on for quite a while. What Mr. Hampton and Farnum were discussing couldn’t be heard because the distance between the two canoes, while not huge, was still noticeable. Plus, they were speaking softly. However, the boys could pick up on the underlying tension that both older men were feeling. As for the boys themselves, they weren't concerned. On the contrary, the thrill of being chased had made them feel incredibly energized.

“Old expedition was getting too monotonous, anyway,” said Bob presently.

“Things were getting too boring with the old expedition, anyway,” Bob said after a moment.

“Oh, I suppose you’ll want to challenge the best Indian wrestler now, won’t you?” said Jack, in a tone of mock seriousness. 60

“Oh, I guess you’re going to want to take on the best Indian wrestler now, right?” said Jack, in a tone of playful seriousness. 60

“Yes, Bob, why didn’t you go back with Dick and Art and send in your challenge?” asked Frank, in the same jollying manner. “You know you haven’t been in a match with anybody for some time. Here was your chance, and you went and let it slip away from you. But, don’t worry, perhaps the Indians will return. Who knows? You may even have a chance to exchange courtesies with no less a personage than Lupo the Wolf himself.”

“Yes, Bob, why didn’t you go back with Dick and Art and submit your challenge?” Frank asked, in the same lighthearted way. “You know you haven’t competed against anyone in a while. Here was your chance, and you let it pass you by. But don’t worry, maybe the Indians will come back. Who knows? You might even get a chance to show some respect to none other than Lupo the Wolf himself.”

The big fellow grinned, but made no reply. And so the two canoes swept on between the low banks of the stream, one weighted with anxiety, the other filled with light-heartedness. The boys were not simpletons. They realized, indeed, that they were in a precarious situation. They were deep in the far northern wilderness. An enemy of superior numbers dogged their heels. In all that vast country, was none to whom they could look for help. But, for all that, they saw no occasion to worry. It was not the first time in which they found themselves in a ticklish situation. They had come unscathed out of other perils, even winning some honor in the encounter. They would do the same again. Thus they put the matter to themselves.

The big guy smiled but didn’t say anything. So the two canoes glided along the low banks of the stream, one filled with worry, the other with carefree joy. The boys weren't fools. They knew they were in a risky situation. They were deep in the remote northern wilderness, being pursued by an enemy with greater numbers. In that vast land, there was nobody they could turn to for help. Still, they didn’t see any reason to stress. This wasn’t the first time they had found themselves in a tricky spot. They had come out unscathed from other dangers, even earning some respect in the process. They believed they would do the same again. This is how they viewed the situation.

Hour after hour passed, during which period they twice encountered slight rapids, up which they waded with the canoes instead of portaging. All were tiring rapidly, for not only was their number 61 reduced by the absence of Dick and Art, and the work made correspondingly heavy, but in addition they were traveling now on reserve strength, as prior to making the last camp they already had done a big day’s work.

Hour after hour went by, during which they came across some small rapids twice, which they waded through with the canoes instead of carrying them around. Everyone was getting tired quickly, not only because they were fewer in number without Dick and Art, making the work heavier, but also because they were running on reserve energy, having already put in a full day’s effort before reaching the last camp.

Farnum, however, pushed ahead until at the end of four hours of travel they came to the shore of a small lake. Here, in a secluded cove, convenient to the stream on which they had been traveling, they were about to make camp, when Frank approached Mr. Hampton and Farnum and indicated an island a half mile away.

Farnum, however, continued forward until after four hours of travel they reached the edge of a small lake. Here, in a quiet cove that was close to the stream they had been following, they were getting ready to set up camp when Frank walked over to Mr. Hampton and Farnum and pointed out an island half a mile away.

“Isn’t that smoke over there?” he asked, pointing.

“Isn’t that smoke over there?” he asked, pointing.

Farnum stared, and in a moment his keen eyes confirmed Frank’s observation. Mr. Hampton put up the field glasses which he always carried strapped to him, and also saw the smoke. But he saw something more—a skin kayak drawn up on the shore of the island.

Farnum stared, and in a moment his sharp eyes confirmed Frank’s observation. Mr. Hampton put up the binoculars he always carried strapped to him and also saw the smoke. But he noticed something more—a skin kayak pulled up on the beach of the island.

“Hard to tell from that what sort of man is camping out there,” said Farnum, when informed of the kayak. “Everybody uses ’em in this country—Indian, Eskimo, and the occasional prospector. That smoke doesn’t indicate a big fire. Must be only one man, or maybe, two. Let’s investigate. If we decide to make camp out there, well, that island would be a good place and it would be hard to surprise us there if we kept guard.” 62

“It's hard to tell what kind of guy is camping out there,” said Farnum when he heard about the kayak. “Everyone uses them around here—Indians, Eskimos, and the occasional prospector. That smoke doesn’t suggest a large fire. There’s probably only one person, or maybe two. Let’s check it out. If we decide to camp out there, that island seems like a good spot, and it would be tough for anyone to catch us off guard if we stayed vigilant.” 62

Once more, paddles were plied, and the two canoes cut diagonally across the waters of the lake towards the island. As they approached, Farnum raised his voice in a hail. A moment later an answering shout came back. Then a figure stepped from the trees to the little stretch of sand upon which the kayak was drawn up and stood, watching their approach, hand shading eyes against the glare of the sun, head bare.

Once again, paddles were used, and the two canoes moved diagonally across the lake toward the island. As they got closer, Farnum called out. A moment later, he received a reply. Then a person stepped out from the trees onto the small patch of sand where the kayak was pulled up and stood, watching them come closer, hand shielding their eyes from the sun's glare, head bare.

“Great Godfrey’s ghost,” exclaimed Farnum in a low voice, turning his head slightly to address Mr. Hampton, “it’s a policeman.”

“Great Godfrey’s ghost,” Farnum exclaimed quietly, turning his head a bit to speak to Mr. Hampton, “it’s a cop.”

“What?”

“Excuse me?”

“A member of the Northwest—of the Canadian Mounted Police.”

“A member of the Northwest—of the Canadian Mounted Police.”

“What’s he doing here?”

"What’s he doing here?"

“I don’t know. But we’ll soon find out.”

"I’m not sure. But we’ll find out soon."

“Welcome, strangers,” said the other, a tall bronzed man, as they approached. “Just in time for a snack.”

“Welcome, newcomers,” said the other, a tall, tanned man, as they came closer. “Just in time for a snack.”

He advanced to the water’s edge, and stood ready to help. Farnum’s appraising eye took in the approach. Shoal water and a sandy beach! He decided to drive the canoe up on the sands. Shipping his paddle, he leaped from the bow into the water, as the forefoot of the canoe grated lightly. Relieved of his weight, the canoe rose at the bow and sank at the stern under Mr. Hampton. Seizing the bow, 63 Farnum ran it up on the beach, the uniformed man lending a hand. A moment later, Jack, who was in the bow of the boy’s canoe, repeated the maneuver. The two craft were drawn up side by side.

He walked up to the water's edge, ready to help. Farnum scanned the area as he approached. Shallow water and a sandy beach! He decided to pull the canoe onto the sand. Putting down his paddle, he jumped from the front of the canoe into the water as the front of the canoe scraped lightly. Without his weight, the canoe lifted at the front and sank at the back under Mr. Hampton. Grabbing the front, 63 Farnum pulled it onto the beach, with the uniformed man helping. A moment later, Jack, who was in the front of the boy's canoe, did the same. The two boats were positioned side by side.

“MacDonald’s my name,” said the Canadian simply.

“MacDonald’s my name,” said the Canadian casually.

“Know Arkell of Dawson?” asked Farnum.

“Do you know Arkell from Dawson?” asked Farnum.

“Know him well,” said the other. “One o’ the best on the Force.”

“Know him well,” said the other. “He’s one of the best on the Force.”

“Friend of mine,” said Farnum.

"My friend," said Farnum.

The two clasped hands warmly. Then Farnum introduced Mr. Hampton and the boys. MacDonald led the way to a sheltered spot among the trees, where a fire burned.

The two held hands warmly. Then Farnum introduced Mr. Hampton and the boys. MacDonald led the way to a cozy spot among the trees, where a fire was burning.

“Just about to broil some fish,” he said. “Lucky there’s plenty. I’m crazy about fishing,” he continued, “and when they bit here I pulled out mor’n I could use. Was wonderin’ what to do with ’em when I heard your hail. Guess I don’t need to worry about that any longer.”

“Just about to grill some fish,” he said. “Good thing there’s plenty. I love fishing,” he continued, “and when they were biting here, I caught more than I could use. I was wondering what to do with them when I heard you call out. I guess I don’t need to worry about that anymore.”

As he spoke he busied himself about preparations for dinner, and soon an appetizing odor of frying fish rose to assail the twitching nostrils of the hungry boys.

As he talked, he busied himself getting dinner ready, and soon a delicious smell of frying fish filled the air, teasing the eager noses of the hungry boys.

“Suppose I get another pan and help, sir,” proffered Bob.

“Maybe I can grab another pan and help, sir,” suggested Bob.

His comrades laughed, for the big fellow’s appetite was proverbial among them. MacDonald nodded with a 64 grin of understanding. Bob tore back to the canoes, and soon returned with a pan in hand. In a short time the fish were fried, and all hands fell to right heartily.

His friends laughed, because the big guy's appetite was legendary among them. MacDonald nodded with a knowing smile. Bob dashed back to the canoes and soon returned with a pan in hand. In no time, the fish were fried, and everyone dug in enthusiastically.

“Long way off your beat, aren’t you?” asked Farnum, of MacDonald, as they ate.

“Pretty far from your usual spot, right?” asked Farnum, to MacDonald, as they ate.

The other nodded. Then he regarded them sharply.

The other person nodded. Then he looked at them intently.

“Same to you,” he said. “First white men I’ve seen in many days.”

“Right back at you,” he said. “First white guys I’ve seen in days.”

Mr. Hampton read a challenge in the straight blue eyes under the grizzled brows, and met it promptly.

Mr. Hampton saw a challenge in the clear blue eyes beneath the gray brows and responded right away.

“Yes, and I’ll tell you why we are here,” he said. “I think our meeting with you was providential. If you have been in this country long, you may have heard something that will help us. At any rate, here’s our story.”

“Yes, and I’ll explain why we’re here,” he said. “I believe our meeting with you was meant to be. If you’ve been in this country for a while, you might have heard something that can assist us. Either way, here’s our story.”

Whereupon, he proceeded to relate the reason for their presence. He made a clean breast of it, keeping back nothing, telling MacDonald of the alleged oil discovery by Farrell and Cameron, Cameron’s death, Farrell’s return as guide to Thorwaldsson’s expedition, and their presence now in an attempt to trace the missing men.

Whereupon, he went on to explain why they were there. He came clean about everything, holding nothing back, telling MacDonald about the supposed oil discovery by Farrell and Cameron, Cameron’s death, Farrell’s return as a guide for Thorwaldsson’s expedition, and their current presence in an effort to find the missing men.

“So that’s that,” said MacDonald. “So that’s the reason for Thorwaldsson’s ‘Lost Expedition.’ And it was into this country he come! Well, well.” 65

“So that’s it,” said MacDonald. “So that’s why Thorwaldsson’s ‘Lost Expedition’ happened. And he came to this country! Well, well.” 65

In conclusion, Mr. Hampton told of their recent adventure with Lupo the Wolf. MacDonald manifested keen interest. His hand, as he poured tobacco into a pipe, shook slightly, and he spilled a little of the precious tobacco.

In conclusion, Mr. Hampton shared their recent adventure with Lupo the Wolf. MacDonald showed great interest. His hand shook a little as he poured tobacco into a pipe, and he spilled some of the precious tobacco.

“You ain’t heard of it likely,” he said. “You wouldn’t. But this Lupo killed my partner on the Force, an’ I asked the Inspector to let me go after him myself. I followed him in from Dawson an’ lost his trail several days ago. Now, well—”

“You probably haven't heard of it,” he said. “You wouldn’t. But this Lupo killed my partner on the Force, and I asked the Inspector to let me go after him myself. I followed him in from Dawson and lost his trail several days ago. Now, well—”

MacDonald averted his face, rose and walked down towards the lake shore, and the others respected his evident desire to be alone and did not follow.

MacDonald turned away, got up, and walked down to the lake shore. The others respected his clear wish to be alone and didn't follow him.

“Out after Lupo single-handed,” whispered Frank. “And the desperado surrounded by all his men, too.”

“Going after Lupo by himself,” Frank whispered. “And the outlaw surrounded by all his guys, too.”

Farnum nodded.

Farnum agreed.

“That means nothing to the Mounted,” said he.

"That doesn't mean anything to the Mounted," he said.

66CHAPTER VIII.—FIRST BLOOD.

So tired were all members of the party after their unexpected exertions of moving camp and trekking on, coming at the end of a day filled with fatiguing labor, that now a haven had been reached and they had relaxed from their tension, they were ready to go to sleep at once. First, however, preparations had to be made not only to keep guard but to keep watch also for Dick and Art. Although the latter did not know definitely, of course, where they were encamped, yet it would not be difficult for them to follow the trail at least to the shore of the lake.

Everyone in the group was so exhausted after their unexpected efforts to move camp and trek on, especially after a long day of tiring work, that now that they had reached a safe place and could finally relax, they were ready to fall asleep immediately. However, they first needed to prepare not just to keep watch but also to look out for Dick and Art. Although they didn’t know exactly where the camp was set up, it wouldn’t be hard for them to follow the trail at least to the edge of the lake.

“Look here,” said MacDonald, returning to join the conference, “I’m not near as tired as the rest of you. I’ll keep watch for your friends for a couple of hours while the rest of you get some sleep.”

“Look here,” said MacDonald, coming back to join the discussion, “I’m not nearly as tired as the rest of you. I’ll keep an eye out for your friends for a couple of hours while the rest of you get some sleep.”

“All right,” said Farnum, gratefully, “that is, if you promise to wake me at the end of two hours. I can use a little sleep right now.”

“Okay,” said Farnum, grateful, “that is, if you promise to wake me in two hours. I could really use some sleep right now.”

“Turn in, then,” said MacDonald. “These 67 spruces give you enough shade. And, anyway, I guess you don’t need much inducement to go to sleep.”

“Go to bed, then,” said MacDonald. “These spruces provide plenty of shade. And besides, I figure you don't need much encouragement to fall asleep.”

“I could sleep right out in the open sun with my face turned up to the sky,” said big Bob, yawning. “Well, nighty night, folks.”

“I could totally sleep outside in the bright sun with my face up to the sky,” said big Bob, yawning. “Well, good night, everyone.”

Nothing occurred during MacDonald’s watch, and at the end of the two-hour period he awakened Farnum, in keeping with the agreement.

Nothing happened during MacDonald’s watch, and at the end of the two-hour period, he woke up Farnum, as per their agreement.

“Thought some of letting you sleep on,” he said. “But, to tell you the truth, I been travelin’ hard myself, and need a little sleep, too.”

“Thought about letting you sleep,” he said. “But honestly, I’ve been traveling hard myself and need some sleep, too.”

“Right,” said Farnum. “I’d have been peeved if you hadn’t waked me.”

“Right,” said Farnum. “I would have been annoyed if you hadn’t woken me up.”

Several hours later, Farnum keeping lonely vigil among the bushes by the lake shore, descried a canoe shoot out of the mouth of the stream down which they, too, had come and swing into the lake. At first, as only the bow of the canoe appeared, he was startled, believing Lupo’s Indians already were on the trail. But a moment later, with relief and yet surprise to see them there, he made out the two figures in the boat as those of Dick and Art.

Several hours later, Farnum was keeping a lonely watch among the bushes by the lakeshore when he spotted a canoe coming out of the mouth of the stream they had also traveled down and heading into the lake. At first, seeing only the bow of the canoe, he was alarmed, thinking that Lupo’s Indians were already on the trail. But a moment later, feeling both relieved and surprised to see them there, he recognized the two figures in the boat as Dick and Art.

The pair rested on their paddles a moment, scanning the shore and also, Farnum noted, apparently casting anxious glances behind them. He was too far away, however, to see whether that were really the case. Farnum realized that, with 68 the skin kayak belonging to MacDonald now drawn safely out of sight among the bushes, beside their own canoes, Dick and Art would not have the same indications pointing to the island that had he on arrival. Therefore, he stepped from the bushes and was just about to set his cupped hand to his mouth and call when the unexpected occurred.

The two rested their paddles for a moment, scanning the shore and, as Farnum noticed, glancing back anxiously. He was too far away to tell if that was actually the case, though. Farnum realized that, with 68 MacDonald's kayak now hidden among the bushes next to their own canoes, Dick and Art didn’t have the same view of the island that he had when he arrived. So, he stepped out from the bushes and was just about to cup his hands and call out when something unexpected happened.

Dick and Art already had dipped their paddles into the water again and were making a wide swing with the evident intention of bringing the canoe parallel to the shore but some distance out, when Farnum’s startled eyes beheld another canoe arrive at the mouth of the stream behind them.

Dick and Art had already dipped their paddles into the water again and were making a wide swing, obviously trying to position the canoe parallel to the shore but still a bit out, when Farnum’s surprised eyes spotted another canoe coming into the mouth of the stream behind them.

Action was as quick as thought. Dick and Art evidently had managed to obtain one of Lupo’s canoes and were being closely pursued. How closely, moreover, apparently they did not know. He must warn them, not only of his presence and of help close at hand, but also of the danger behind them. The course they were taking would bear them away from the island and, unless changed at once, would make it possible for Lupo to cut them off from their friends.

Action was as quick as thought. Dick and Art had clearly managed to get one of Lupo’s canoes and were being closely chased. How closely, it seemed they didn't realize. He needed to warn them, not only about his presence and the help nearby but also about the danger behind them. The direction they were heading would take them away from the island, and unless they changed it immediately, it would allow Lupo to cut them off from their friends.

Although he had left his rifle at camp, as he stumbled out with sleep filling his eyes and dulling his brain, Farnum had his automatic swinging in the holster at his belt. Whipping it out, he shot three times in rapid succession. 69

Although he had left his rifle at camp, as he stumbled out with sleep in his eyes and fogging his mind, Farnum had his handgun swinging in the holster at his belt. He quickly pulled it out and fired three times in a row. 69

At the sound, Dick and Art stared towards the island where Farnum, stepping into the open, was vigorously waving his hat to attract their attention. Lupo’s men also set up a shout, as they churned the water racing to cut off their quarry.

At the sound, Dick and Art looked over at the island where Farnum, stepping into view, was energetically waving his hat to get their attention. Lupo’s guys also started yelling as they splashed through the water, racing to catch their target.

“What is it?” cried Frank, first of the aroused camp to gain Farnum’s side.

“What is it?” shouted Frank, the first of the awakened camp to reach Farnum’s side.

Then his glance took in the situation.

Then his gaze absorbed the situation.

“Look here, those fellows might pick off Art and Dick before they can gain safety, even if they don’t succeed in cutting them off,” he said. “Let’s get our rifles, fellows, and open fire. A long shot, but they’re coming closer.”

“Look, those guys might take out Art and Dick before they can reach safety, even if they don’t manage to cut them off,” he said. “Let’s grab our rifles, guys, and start shooting. It’s a long shot, but they’re getting closer.”

“Anyway, it will make them draw in their horns,” said Farnum. “Tell you what, you boys run and get the rifles, and Mr. Hampton and I will launch one of our canoes. We’ll go out to help Dick and Art, if those fellows keep closing in on them.”

“Anyway, it will make them hold back,” said Farnum. “I’ll tell you what, you guys go grab the rifles, and Mr. Hampton and I will launch one of our canoes. We’ll head out to help Dick and Art if those guys keep closing in on them.”

The three boys sped away, nothing loath, but when they returned they found Farnum’s plan unnecessary. As the two canoes had swept along, Dick, who was in the stern, suddenly had thrown down his paddle, and taken up his rifle, while Art had swung the canoe about with one dexterous stroke. Dick immediately had opened fire, and Art had followed suit.

The three boys took off quickly, eager to go, but when they came back, they realized Farnum's plan wasn't needed. As the two canoes moved quickly, Dick, sitting in the back, suddenly dropped his paddle and grabbed his rifle, while Art skillfully turned their canoe around with one smooth stroke. Dick immediately started shooting, and Art jumped in to do the same.

The boys heard the shots as they ran down towards the shore. When they reached the sand 70 they found Lupo’s men already had faced about and were hurrying towards the mainland. One of their number evidently was hit.

The boys heard the gunshots as they ran toward the shore. When they reached the sand 70 they saw that Lupo’s men had already turned around and were quickly heading back to the mainland. One of them was clearly injured.

“Main good shootin’ at long range a’ so quick after paddlin’,” commented MacDonald appreciatively.

“Great shooting at long range so soon after paddling,” MacDonald commented appreciatively.

Content with having beaten off their enemies, the two desisted, resumed their paddles and soon were within hailing distance. Greetings and congratulations were exchanged, and Dick and Art ran their canoe on shore. As soon as the first hubbub of exclamations died away, Mr. Hampton led the way to the camp. MacDonald put the coffee pot on the fire and between draughts of the strong, hot liquid Dick told their story.

Content with having driven off their enemies, the two stopped, picked up their paddles again, and soon were close enough to shout to each other. They exchanged greetings and congratulations, and Dick and Art brought their canoe ashore. Once the initial excitement of exclamations faded, Mr. Hampton led the way to the camp. MacDonald placed the coffee pot on the fire, and between sips of the strong, hot coffee, Dick shared their story.

After leaving the previous camp, they had gone back to where they seen Lupo break camp and start on the back trail. The meaning of this move, they had discussed. It seemed to them folly to believe Lupo was relinquishing the chase. They believed he would suspect Mr. Hampton and Farnum would spy on him, and was merely trying to throw them off guard by creating the impression that he was abandoning the chase. Therefore, they had gone warily, convinced that at the end of a short withdrawal Lupo would call a halt and prepare to ’bout face.

After leaving the last camp, they went back to where they had seen Lupo break camp and head down the trail. They talked about what this move meant. To them, it seemed foolish to think that Lupo was giving up the chase. They thought he would suspect Mr. Hampton and Farnum were following him and was just trying to throw them off by making it look like he was abandoning the pursuit. So, they proceeded cautiously, convinced that after a brief retreat, Lupo would stop and turn around.

This suspicion proved correct. Some two miles 71 farther on they discerned the four canoes of the half-breed halted alongshore while Lupo harangued their occupants.

This suspicion was right. About two miles 71 ahead, they spotted the four canoes of the half-breed stopped along the shore while Lupo was yelling at their occupants.

“We wanted to listen powerful bad to what he was a-sayin’,” explained Dick. “But we couldn’t get close enough. There wasn’t much cover near ’em and we had to lay hid where the trees was thickest, quite a ways off. Art and I lay there, a-strainin’ our ears but without any luck when suddenly somethin’ happens. Most of ’em was on shore, listenin’ to Lupo but in one canoe was one man a-huntin’ around like he’d lost somethin’.

“We really wanted to hear what he was saying,” Dick explained. “But we couldn’t get close enough. There wasn’t much cover near them, so we had to hide where the trees were thickest, quite a distance away. Art and I were lying there, straining to listen but didn’t have any luck when suddenly something happened. Most of them were on shore, listening to Lupo, but in one canoe, there was a guy searching around like he had lost something.”

“What it was we never did know. But suddenly, this fellow shoves off with a shout to Lupo. Lupo answers like he was agreein’. So then this fellow comes a-paddlin’ down stream like mad. As he goes by where we’re a-layin’ low, Art whispers to me: ‘This is where Lupo turns his gang around. That’s sure. Best thing we can do is to beat it back an’ warn our crowd. An’ my legs is tired. I’d like to let my arms work for me. Let’s go.’

“What it was, we never figured out. But suddenly, this guy shouts to Lupo and takes off. Lupo responds like he’s on board. So then this guy starts paddling downstream like crazy. As he passes by where we’re hiding, Art whispers to me, ‘This is where Lupo turns his gang around. No doubt about it. The best thing we can do is head back and warn our crew. And my legs are tired. I’d like to let my arms do the work for me. Let’s go.’”

“I nods, and without any more words we backed out and started down stream after that canoe. The fellow is goin’ like mad, which means he ain’t intendin’ to go far. He’s lost somethin’ or other and thinks it may be floatin’ on the water or, maybe is layin’ on shore where he touched. Anyway, that’s what we thought. We never did get to know. For 72 after we’d made a bend in the stream and put some distance between Lupo and us, we decided it was no use runnin’ any farther.

“I nodded, and without saying anything more, we backed out and started downstream after that canoe. The guy is going really fast, which means he doesn't plan to go far. He’s lost something and thinks it might be floating on the water or maybe lying on the shore where he touched. Anyway, that’s what we figured. We never did find out. For 72 after we made a bend in the stream and put some distance between Lupo and us, we decided it was pointless to keep running any farther.

“‘Here goes,’ said Art. And he let fly over the Indian’s head. That fellow didn’t wait for more. He just jumped out of the canoe an’ started swimmin’ for the other shore. So then Art give me his rifle an’ he swims out and brings in the canoe. Last we seen of that Indian he was streaking it back on the other bank. I got in and—well, here we are.”

“‘Here we go,’ said Art. And he threw it over the Indian's head. That guy didn't stick around for more. He just jumped out of the canoe and started swimming for the other shore. So then Art handed me his rifle, and he swam out to bring in the canoe. The last we saw of that Indian, he was racing back to the other bank. I got in and—well, here we are.”

MacDonald, who had listened in silence, suddenly interrupted:

MacDonald, who had been listening quietly, suddenly interrupted:

“How many men has Lupo got with him?”

“How many guys does Lupo have with him?”

“A dozen.”

“12.”

MacDonald looked at Mr. Hampton.

MacDonald glanced at Mr. Hampton.

“You know why I want him,” he said. “For murder. And then there’s this raid on you. There are eight of us, includin’ these husky young fellows of yours. Will you help me capture him an’ his gang?”

“You know why I want him,” he said. “For murder. And then there’s this raid on you. There are eight of us, including these strong young guys of yours. Will you help me catch him and his gang?”

Mr. Hampton looked thoughtful.

Mr. Hampton seemed deep in thought.

“But, MacDonald, what would you do with them? We can’t turn aside from our own object long? We couldn’t help you guard them. And you couldn’t get twelve or thirteen men back to your Post single-handed, especially if any of them are wounded.”

“But, MacDonald, what would you do with them? We can't stray from our own goal for long. We couldn't help you watch over them. And you wouldn't be able to get twelve or thirteen men back to your Post by yourself, especially if any of them are hurt.”

MacDonald’s face fell.

MacDonald's expression dropped.

“Guess you’re right,” he said. “But when I think 73 o’ that skunk—murderin’ the best pal a man ever had—well, I see red, that’s all.” His head sank to his clenched hands and he sat on a fallen tree, staring moodily at the ground between his feet.

“Guess you’re right,” he said. “But when I think about that jerk—killing the best friend a guy ever had—well, I get really angry, that’s all.” His head dropped into his clenched hands, and he sat on a fallen tree, staring gloomily at the ground between his feet.

“Certainly is a problem, Mr. Hampton,” said Farnum, slowly. “If we don’t do something, Lupo will continue to hang to our trail as we proceed, a constant danger.”

“Definitely a problem, Mr. Hampton,” Farnum said slowly. “If we don’t take action, Lupo will keep following us, posing a constant threat.”

“I know,” said Mr. Hampton. “Let me think.”

“I know,” Mr. Hampton said. “Give me a moment to think.”

He, too, sat silent, staring meditatively at the ground.

He also sat in silence, thoughtfully staring at the ground.

The boys had been listening with interest. Now Frank nudged Jack, with whom he was standing by the fire, and whispered in his ear. Jack’s face brightened and he nodded.

The boys had been listening closely. Now Frank nudged Jack, who was standing by the fire with him, and whispered in his ear. Jack's face lit up and he nodded.

“I’ll bet they have,” he whispered. “Ask MacDonald.”

“I bet they have,” he whispered. “Ask MacDonald.”

Frank turned to the ranger.

Frank looked at the ranger.

“Mr. MacDonald, how far away is your Post?” he inquired.

“Mr. MacDonald, how far is your Post?” he asked.

MacDonald looked up puzzled, but answered readily enough.

MacDonald looked up, confused, but answered quickly.

“A good four hundred miles to the South.”

“A solid four hundred miles to the south.”

“Why do you ask, Frank?” Mr. Hampton wanted to know.

“Why do you ask, Frank?” Mr. Hampton wanted to know.

“Just a minute, sir, please,” begged Frank, once more turning to MacDonald. “And how many men are at the Post?” 74

“Just a minute, sir, please,” Frank pleaded, turning to MacDonald again. “And how many men are at the Post?” 74

“Captain and five men.”

“Captain and five crew members.”

“Oh, is that all?”

“Oh, is that it?”

Frank’s tone was one of disappointment. MacDonald smiled slightly.

Frank sounded disappointed. MacDonald smiled faintly.

“People think the ‘Mounties’ must be as many as an army,” he said. “Well, we keep this wilderness clean with a handful. O’ course, when necessary, too, we can swear in deputies.”

“People think the ‘Mounties’ must be as numerous as an army,” he said. “Well, we maintain this wilderness with just a few. Of course, when needed, we can also swear in deputies.”

“Have you got wireless at the Post?” asked Frank.

“Do you have Wi-Fi at the Post?” Frank asked.

MacDonald nodded.

MacDonald nodded.

“Captain equipped us some time back,” he said. “All posts or forts, as we call them sometimes, have wireless now.”

“Captain set us up a while ago,” he said. “All posts or forts, as we sometimes call them, have wireless now.”

“Good for you, Frank. I see what you’re driving at now,” said Mr. Hampton. “You—”

“Good for you, Frank. I get what you're getting at now,” said Mr. Hampton. “You—”

Frank nodded.

Frank agreed.

“Yes, sir. I thought if we helped Mr. MacDonald capture Lupo and his gang, we could call his Post by wireless and have them send men to help him take his prisoners in.”

“Yes, sir. I thought if we helped Mr. MacDonald catch Lupo and his gang, we could use the wireless to call his Post and have them send men to help him take in his prisoners.”

75CHAPTER IX.—A CALL TO THE FORT.

“Now,” said Jack, “is the time that I wish I had my 20-kilowatt radio tube that I have been working on so long.”

“Now,” Jack said, “is when I really wish I had my 20-kilowatt radio tube that I’ve been working on for so long.”

Mr. Hampton, Bob and Frank nodded sympathetically. An enthusiast on radio, Jack had developed a number of new appliances. The latest of these was not yet completed. He had worked on it in the laboratories at Yale during the Winter and Spring. The lateness of his return to his classes, however, inasmuch as he did not arrive at college until after Christmas, due to the delay occasioned by his adventures in South America in search of “The Enchanted City of the Incas,” compelled him to devote most his time to catching up in his studies. He did not, therefore, have as much time to devote to laboratory experiments as he desired. As a consequence, the 20-kilowatt tube had not yet been perfected, when time came for him to depart for Alaska with his father. 76

Mr. Hampton, Bob, and Frank nodded sympathetically. Jack, an avid radio enthusiast, had developed several new devices. The latest one wasn't finished yet. He had been working on it in the labs at Yale during the winter and spring. However, he missed the start of his classes since he arrived at college only after Christmas, delayed because of his adventures in South America searching for "The Enchanted City of the Incas." This forced him to spend most of his time catching up on his studies. As a result, he didn’t have as much time to dedicate to experiments in the lab as he wanted. Consequently, the 20-kilowatt tube wasn’t perfected by the time he had to leave for Alaska with his father. 76

Jack’s 20-kilowatt tube, when completed, would be the most powerful in the world, and he expected, moreover, to construct others of greater kilo-wattage. A 75-kilowatt tube had been produced in England, it is true, but it had not been found practicable. Jack’s tube was to be steel-jacketed and equipped with a water-cooling device, due to the heat produced when in operation. His big dream was that this tube, when used as an amplifier in conjunction with an alternator, would make trans-atlantic telephonic communication as common as cabling or wireless telegraphing.

Jack’s 20-kilowatt tube, once finished, would be the most powerful in the world, and he also planned to create others with even higher wattage. There had been a 75-kilowatt tube produced in England, but it hadn't been practical. Jack’s tube was designed to be steel-coated and equipped with a water-cooling system because of the heat generated during operation. His big dream was that this tube, when used as an amplifier alongside an alternator, would make transatlantic telephone communication as common as cabling or wireless telegraphy.

“If I only had one of my 20-kilowatt tubes now,” he mourned, “we would be able to talk not only with Mr. MacDonald’s Post but with Dawson or even Nome.”

“If I only had one of my 20-kilowatt tubes right now,” he lamented, “we could talk not just with Mr. MacDonald’s Post but also with Dawson or even Nome.”

“Well, Jack,” said Frank, “it’s too bad. Just the same, let’s get busy. For, with our 50-watt oscillator tube set we will be able to communicate by telegraph up to 500 miles. And, as the Post is only 400 miles away, we can reach it easily.”

“Well, Jack,” said Frank, “that’s too bad. Still, let’s get to work. With our 50-watt oscillator tube set, we can communicate by telegraph for up to 500 miles. And since the Post is only 400 miles away, we can easily reach it.”

For sending up to 500 miles, the boys knew they could use either three or four 5-watt oscillator tubes in parallel, or one 50-watt oscillator tube. They had decided on the latter method, in making their preparations for departure in faraway Seattle. For one thing, and the biggest, transportation was the most important item. And the 50-watt tube set was the 77 more compact. Quickly, then, with Mr. Hampton helping, they got out the various parts from their baggage and made the connections.

For sending signals up to 500 miles, the guys knew they could use either three or four 5-watt oscillator tubes together, or just one 50-watt oscillator tube. They chose the latter method while getting ready for their trip to distant Seattle. The main concern, and the most important factor, was transportation. Plus, the 50-watt tube setup was more compact. So, with Mr. Hampton’s assistance, they quickly pulled out the various parts from their bags and made the connections.

Farnum, the Northwest policeman, MacDonald, and Dick and Art, watched with puzzled interest and even awe as the four, working in unison, put together the aerial series condenser, the blocking condenser, the grid condenser, the telegraph key, the chopper, the choke coil in the key circuit, the filament volt-meter, the protective condenser in the power circuit, the storage battery and the motor generator.

Farnum, the Northwest cop, MacDonald, and Dick and Art, watched with confused interest and even respect as the four of them, working together, assembled the aerial series condenser, the blocking condenser, the grid condenser, the telegraph key, the chopper, the choke coil in the key circuit, the filament volt-meter, the protective condenser in the power circuit, the storage battery, and the motor generator.

Farnum and MacDonald asked questions, although Dick and Art were content to sit silent and watch, keen-eyed, as the construction work progressed. Several times, too, Dick arose and went to the water’s edge to keep watch against surprise. That any would be attempted for the time being, nobody believed, as they figured the enemy would consider them on guard.

Farnum and MacDonald asked questions, but Dick and Art were happy to sit quietly and watch intently as the construction work continued. Several times, Dick got up and went to the water’s edge to keep watch for any surprises. No one believed an attack would happen at that moment, as they thought the enemy would assume they were on guard.

As they worked, Jack explained for the benefit of the others. His description of how the low voltage current from the storage battery flowed into one of the windings of the generator and drives it as a motor thus generating higher voltage in the other winding both puzzled and interested them. By the time, the set was ready for use, Farnum, who was something of a mechanic by inclination, had a fair 78 understanding of the set, but MacDonald, though interested, was bewildered.

As they worked, Jack explained for everyone’s benefit. His description of how the low voltage current from the storage battery flowed into one of the windings of the generator and drove it like a motor, generating higher voltage in the other winding, both puzzled and intrigued them. By the time the set was ready to use, Farnum, who was somewhat of a mechanic by nature, had a decent understanding of the set, but MacDonald, although interested, was confused. 78

“I’m fair beat,” he confessed. “Anyhow, just so you boys can make it work!”

“I’m pretty exhausted,” he admitted. “Anyway, just so you guys can make it happen!”

“Oh, we’ll make it work, all right,” Frank assured him. “Well, now, to try to call the Post. What’s its call, Mr. MacDonald?”

“Oh, we’ll make it work, for sure,” Frank assured him. “Now, let’s try to contact the Post. What’s its call sign, Mr. MacDonald?”

“I happen to remember,” said MacDonald. “We were all so interested when wireless was put in that Captain Jameson gave us a little lecture on it. He said our call would be JSN, abbreviation for his name. We were to remember it, in case of need, when we were able to get to a wireless station. Well, this is a case of need.”

“I remember,” said MacDonald. “We were all so excited when the wireless was installed that Captain Jameson gave us a short lecture on it. He said our call sign would be JSN, after his name. We were supposed to remember it, in case we needed to reach a wireless station. Well, this is a time of need.”

“I’ll say it is,” said big Bob. “Well, come on, fellows, who’s going to call?”

“I'll say it is,” said big Bob. “Alright, come on, guys, who’s going to make the call?”

It was an honor or distinction that each was eager to have, yet each wanted to force it on the others. A friendly argument developed, to which Mr. Hampton, smiling, put an end.

It was an honor that everyone was keen to have, yet each one wanted to impose it on the others. A light-hearted debate broke out, which Mr. Hampton, smiling, eventually ended.

“Look here, boys, we are wasting time. Suppose you draw straws for the privilege. You all know the Morse and Continental codes, so there is no question of ability involved. Here—” breaking three matchsticks into varying lengths and offering them—“take your choice. Longest wins.”

“Hey guys, we’re wasting time. How about we draw straws for who gets the privilege? You all know the Morse and Continental codes, so we don’t have to worry about who can handle it. Here—” breaking three matchsticks into different lengths and offering them—“pick one. The longest wins.”

Frank drew the winning stick. The others laughed, clapped him on the back, and without 79 more ado he began pressing the key and sending out the signal.

Frank drew the winning stick. The others laughed, patted him on the back, and without 79 any further delay, he started pressing the key and sending out the signal.

“Is somebody on duty at the Post wireless station, do you think, MacDonald?” asked Mr. Hampton.

“Do you think someone is on duty at the Post wireless station, MacDonald?” asked Mr. Hampton.

“Somebody there all the time,” the latter replied. “Captain Jameson has found wireless so useful in policing his vast district that he wonders how he ever got along without it.”

“Someone is there all the time,” the latter replied. “Captain Jameson has found wireless so helpful in managing his large district that he wonders how he ever managed without it.”

“Hurray,” shouted Frank, “listen. They’re answering.”

“Hooray,” shouted Frank, “listen. They’re responding.”

To those who understood the code, the answer was plain:

To those who understood the code, the answer was clear:

“JSN answering. Who are you?”

“JSN responding. Who are you?”

“MacDonald,” tapped off Frank, grinning mischievously.

“MacDonald,” Frank tapped off, grinning playfully.

The receptor sounded almost angry.

The receiver sounded almost angry.

“Quit your kidding.”

"Stop joking."

“No, I mean it,” replied Frank. “This is MacDonald of the Mounted.”

“No, I really mean it,” replied Frank. “This is MacDonald of the Mounted.”

“Prove it.”

"Show me."

“That’ll stump old Frank,” chuckled Bob, in an aside. But he was mistaken.

"That'll confuse old Frank," Bob chuckled quietly to himself. But he was wrong.

“All right,” replied Frank, confidently. “Do you know what my assignment is?”

“All right,” Frank replied confidently. “Do you know what my assignment is?”

“Yes,” answered JSN, impudently. “Do you?” 80

“Yes,” replied JSN, cheekily. “Do you?” 80

“I’m after Lupo the Wolf,” tapped Frank. “Now call Captain Jameson.”

“I’m looking for Lupo the Wolf,” Frank said. “Now get Captain Jameson on the line.”

“You’re not MacDonald,” replied JSN, “because he doesn’t know the code. But you must be speaking for him, for that’s right about his assignment. I’ll call Captain Jameson. You wait.”

“You’re not MacDonald,” replied JSN, “because he doesn’t know the code. But you must be speaking for him, since that’s correct about his assignment. I’ll call Captain Jameson. You wait.”

“All right,” tapped Frank.

“Okay,” tapped Frank.

Then he turned to the eager MacDonald, who was itching to inquire what was occurring, but had restrained himself until he should be appealed to by Frank, in order not to interrupt. Like all men unfamiliar with telegraphy, whether wireless or by wire, he stood in awe of an operator, and believed it would be terrible, indeed, to interrupt that superior being. Frank took pity now on his curiosity, as well as on that of Farnum, Dick and Art, crowding behind him, and explained what had happened.

Then he turned to the eager MacDonald, who was dying to ask what was going on, but had held back until Frank called on him, so as not to interrupt. Like all men unfamiliar with telegraphy, whether wireless or wired, he felt a sense of awe around an operator and thought it would be awful to interrupt that superior person. Frank felt sorry for his curiosity, as well as for Farnum, Dick, and Art, who were crowded behind him, and explained what had happened.

“And you actually got the Post?” asked MacDonald, doubt in his voice.

“And you actually got the Post?” MacDonald asked, doubt in his voice.

Frank nodded.

Frank agreed.

“My God,” said the big policeman. “Think of the weeks I spent toiling up here, and now you come along and talk across that distance without the loss of a minute’s time. Wonderful, well I reckon.”

“My God,” said the big policeman. “Think of the weeks I spent working up here, and now you come along and talk across that distance without losing a minute. Amazing, I guess.”

“When Captain Jameson arrives,” said Frank, smiling, “I want you to stand close and I’ll translate 81 what he says, and you help me with the replies, will you?”

“When Captain Jameson gets here,” said Frank, smiling, “I want you to stand close, and I’ll translate what he says, and you help me respond, okay?”

“Won’t I be interrupting you?”

“Am I interrupting you?”

“Oh, no,” smiled Frank. “You just come close and wait until I speak. It’ll be all right. Well”—as the receptor began to click—“I guess this is Captain Jameson now. Yes,” with a nod, “it’s he, all right. He’s asking where you are, Mr. MacDonald.”

“Oh, no,” Frank smiled. “Just come closer and wait until I speak. Everything will be fine. Well”—as the receptor started to click—“I guess this is Captain Jameson now. Yes,” he nodded, “it’s him, for sure. He’s asking where you are, Mr. MacDonald.”

“Tell him I’m four hundred miles away and close on Lupo. Tell him about yourselves and the fight, and that we’re going to round up Lupo’s gang and ask him how soon he can send men to help me out with any prisoners we take, and if he can send any at all, and—”

“Tell him I’m four hundred miles away and closing in on Lupo. Inform him about you all and the fight, and that we’re planning to gather Lupo’s gang and ask him how soon he can send some men to help me with any prisoners we capture, and if he can send anyone at all, and—”

“One minute,” said Frank. “I understand. Just wait a bit now, while I telegraph.”

“One minute,” said Frank. “Got it. Just hang on for a moment while I send a telegraph.”

To explain at length the details of that telegraphic conversation is unnecessary. Suffice it to say, that the situation was fully explained to Captain Jameson, and that the latter agreed to start a half dozen deputies under a Sergeant to MacDonald’s aid, as soon as he should hear again as to the outcome of the expedition against Lupo.

To go into detail about that telegraphic conversation isn't necessary. It’s enough to say that Captain Jameson was fully briefed on the situation, and he agreed to send a handful of deputies led by a Sergeant to assist MacDonald as soon as he received an update on the outcome of the expedition against Lupo.

“It’ll take a while for the men to reach MacDonald,” said Captain Jameson. “But with game plentiful and the season open, he can camp until 82 they arrive, and thus keep watch over his prisoners, providing he makes any. You people go ahead with your rounding up of Lupo’s gang, and then let me hear from you again.”

“It’ll take some time for the men to get to MacDonald,” said Captain Jameson. “But with plenty of game around and the season open, he can set up camp until they arrive, and keep an eye on his prisoners, assuming he has any. You all go ahead and round up Lupo’s gang, and then get back to me.”

On that agreement, Frank finally closed the conversation, as there was nothing further to be said.

On that agreement, Frank finally ended the conversation, as there was nothing more to discuss.

83CHAPTER X.—THE BOYS LEFT BEHIND.

“MacDonald, I’ll agree to help you round up Lupo and his gang,” said Mr. Hampton.

“MacDonald, I'll agree to help you track down Lupo and his crew,” said Mr. Hampton.

They were all sitting in conference, so to speak, about the camp fire, over which Dick was busy broiling fish which he and Art and the boys had just pulled out of the lake. The appetizing odor made the nostrils of the three hungry boys twitch with anticipatory delight.

They were all gathered around the campfire, discussing things while Dick was busy grilling fish that he, Art, and the other boys had just caught from the lake. The delicious smell made the noses of the three hungry boys twitch with eager excitement.

“Fine,” said the big ranger, “that’s the way I like to hear you talk.”

“Fine,” said the big ranger, “that’s how I like to hear you talk.”

“Yes,” said Mr. Hampton, meditatively, “I’ve got a very good reason why we should cast in our lot and help you, even supposing Lupo flees and draws us off our course.”

“Yes,” Mr. Hampton said thoughtfully, “I have a very good reason for why we should join forces and help you, even if Lupo runs away and distracts us from our path.”

“What’s that?”

"What’s that?"

“Well, it’s an easy enough one to guess. Lupo evidently is after us. That means that he is being paid by somebody to do us in, or at least thwart us in our search. I want to know who that somebody 84 is. And the only way to find out is to make Lupo prisoner and question him. Moreover, it is possible we may be able to learn something about the mysterious fate of Thorwaldsson and his expedition.”

“Well, this one’s pretty easy to figure out. Lupo is clearly after us. That means someone is paying him to take us down, or at least to mess with our search. I want to know who that someone is. The only way to find out is to capture Lupo and interrogate him. Plus, we might be able to uncover some information about the mysterious fate of Thorwaldsson and his expedition.”

Farnum had been listening closely. He nodded with satisfaction.

Farnum had been paying close attention. He nodded with satisfaction.

“Just what I was thinking myself.”

"Exactly what I was thinking too."

“You’re right, Mr. Hampton,” said MacDonald. “But such being the case, we’ll have to be mighty careful that Lupo doesn’t get shot, as then your prospective source of information would vanish.”

“You’re right, Mr. Hampton,” MacDonald said. “But since that’s the case, we need to be really careful that Lupo doesn’t get shot, because then your potential source of information would disappear.”

“True enough, MacDonald,” said Mr. Hampton. “We’ll all have to be on guard against that misfortune, for misfortune it would be.”

“That's true, MacDonald,” said Mr. Hampton. “We all need to be on guard against that bad luck, because it would definitely be bad luck.”

He raised his voice, calling the boys and Dick and Art to him. Then he explained how matters stood.

He raised his voice, calling the boys, Dick, and Art over to him. Then he explained how things were.

“As soon as we finish breakfast,” he said, “we’ll start, and you must all be very careful not to shoot Lupo, if it comes to a battle.”

“As soon as we finish breakfast,” he said, “we’ll start, and you all need to be very careful not to shoot Lupo if it comes down to a battle.”

As they ate breakfast, Bob who seldom spoke but always to the point, raised a question which had been puzzling him.

As they ate breakfast, Bob, who rarely spoke but always got straight to the point, raised a question that had been on his mind.

“Mr. Hampton, what will we do with all our outfit?” he asked. “And with our radio transmitter, especially? Shall we dismount it? Must we take all our outfit along?”

“Mr. Hampton, what are we going to do with all our gear?” he asked. “And what about our radio transmitter, specifically? Should we take it down? Do we have to bring all our gear with us?”

“It would be too bad to dismount the radio, after 85 our trouble in getting it erected,” said Mr. Hampton. “And to take all our outfit with us would be to hamper our movements. On the other hand, we can’t very well leave everything here, for some of Lupo’s men might slip away from the main body, in fact, they may already have done so, and they would put us in a terrible plight if they raided the camp, in our absence.”

“It would be a shame to take down the radio after all the effort we put into setting it up,” Mr. Hampton said. “And taking all our gear with us would just slow us down. On the flip side, we can't really leave everything here because some of Lupo's men might sneak away from the main group; in fact, they might have already done it. They could put us in a huge mess if they attack the camp while we're gone.”

There was silence for a minute or two, then MacDonald spoke.

There was silence for a minute or two, then MacDonald spoke.

“We can certainly travel faster without your outfit to hold us back,” he said, “especially if Lupo tries to run away. For then we could gain on him at the portages, by traveling light. Look here, Mr. Hampton, this island is easily defended. We’ve been going to the shore to keep watch on the mainland against surprise. But just a little ways through the trees is a little rise, a knoll, from which you can see the waters all around the island. One man alone could keep guard here.”

“We can definitely move quicker without your gear slowing us down,” he said, “especially if Lupo tries to escape. That way, we could catch up to him at the portages by traveling light. Look, Mr. Hampton, this island is easy to defend. We’ve been heading to the shore to keep an eye on the mainland for any surprises. But just a short distance through the trees is a small rise, a knoll, where you can see the waters all around the island. One person alone could keep watch here.”

“But one man couldn’t keep off an attack in numbers,” objected Mr. Hampton.

“But one man couldn’t fend off an attack by a group,” Mr. Hampton argued.

“I don’t know,” said MacDonald. “With them high-powered rifles of yours, it might be done. They carry far, farther than any guns Lupo’s Indians and breeds will have. Anyway, two men certainly could manage to hold this place against all comers.” 86

“I don’t know,” MacDonald said. “With those powerful rifles of yours, it could be possible. They shoot much further than any guns Lupo’s Indians and mixed-breed people will have. Still, two men could definitely hold this place against anyone who comes.” 86

“And three,” added Farnum, with a significant look at Mr. Hampton, “could do it even better.”

“And three,” added Farnum, giving Mr. Hampton a meaningful look, “could do it even better.”

The boys again were at the fire some distance away, helping Dick broil more fish. Mr. Hampton looked at them. He understood the significance in Farnum’s tone.

The boys were once again by the fire, a little way off, helping Dick cook more fish. Mr. Hampton watched them. He got what Farnum's tone really meant.

“You don’t think they would be in danger here?”

“You really think they’d be safe here?”

“Less than they would be in with us, Mr. Hampton,” said Farnum, lowering his voice as the other had done.

“Less than they'd be if they were with us, Mr. Hampton,” said Farnum, lowering his voice like the other had.

Mr. Hampton considered. The proposal hinted by Farnum, namely, that the boys should be left at camp, tempted him. It was most assuredly true that they would be in far less danger than if they accompanied him against Lupo. And that appealed to him, appealed powerfully. He was grateful to Farnum in his thoughts for his solicitude for the boys’ welfare.

Mr. Hampton thought about it. The suggestion made by Farnum, that the boys should stay at camp, was tempting. It was definitely true that they would be much safer there than if they went with him to face Lupo. And that really appealed to him, a lot. He felt thankful to Farnum in his mind for caring about the boys' safety.

On the other hand, he knew them for resourceful in an emergency, and good fighters. And since the idea that information might be obtained from Lupo had come to him it had taken firm possession of his thoughts. Lupo must be captured. Would it not be folly to weaken their force by leaving three young huskies, each of whom, moreover, was a fine rifle shot, behind?

On the other hand, he knew they were resourceful in an emergency and good fighters. Since the thought that information could be obtained from Lupo had come to him, it had taken hold of his mind. Lupo must be captured. Would it not be foolish to weaken their group by leaving three young huskies behind, each of whom was also a skilled rifle shot?

Besides, what would the boys say? If necessary, he could command and they would obey. But Mr. 87 Hampton was not one to exercise his authority dictatorially.

Besides, what would the guys say? If needed, he could give orders and they would follow. But Mr. 87 Hampton wasn't the type to wield his power like a dictator.

“I confess I don’t know what to do, Farnum,” he said finally.

“I honestly don’t know what to do, Farnum,” he said at last.

At that moment, a laughing hail from the boys announced the completion of the second batch of food, and their imminent return.

At that moment, the boys' laughter signaled that the second batch of food was ready, and they were about to come back.

“Make it a post of honor and danger,” whispered Farnum, urgently. “Tell them the radio must be guarded, and the outfit, and that if we take these things along our movements will be so hampered that Lupo might escape. Tell them there is a big possibility, too, that some of Lupo’s gang may attempt to raid the camp while we are absent.”

“Make it a priority and dangerous,” Farnum whispered urgently. “Let them know the radio needs to be guarded, and the equipment too. If we take these things with us, it will seriously slow us down and Lupo might get away. Also, let them know there’s a good chance some of Lupo’s gang might try to raid the camp while we’re not there.”

The boys were so close at hand that Farnum desisted. Mr. Hampton nodded. As they ate, he broached the subject of leaving a guard in camp.

The boys were so nearby that Farnum stopped. Mr. Hampton nodded. As they ate, he started the conversation about leaving a guard at the campsite.

“Three of us ought to stay behind,” he added. “That will give sufficient protection for each other, and provide a sure safeguard against surprise. Also, that leaves five of us to go after Lupo. Four of us can go in that bigger of our canoes easily, without any baggage. It carried three of us, with baggage, so far, MacDonald can go in his kayak. So we can hit a fast pace, and make speed at the portages, if any are necessary.”

“Three of us should stay back,” he said. “That will ensure we can protect each other and keep ourselves safe from surprises. Plus, that leaves five of us to go after Lupo. Four of us can fit in that bigger canoe easily, without any gear. It managed to carry three of us with gear before, so MacDonald can use his kayak. That way, we can keep a quick pace and move fast at the portages if we need to.”

“Who do you intend to leave behind, Dad?” asked Jack quietly. 88

“Who do you plan to leave behind, Dad?” asked Jack softly. 88

Mr. Hampton realized from his son’s tone that Jack understood his thoughts.

Mr. Hampton could tell from his son's tone that Jack got what he was thinking.

“Well, you three boys would be the natural ones to be selected,” he said.

“Well, you three guys would be the obvious choice,” he said.

“Oh, I say,” protested Bob.

“Oh, I can’t believe it,” protested Bob.

“That’s not fair, Mr. Hampton,” cried Frank.

“That’s not fair, Mr. Hampton,” shouted Frank.

Jack was silent. He knew his father. Close association of the motherless boy with the older man since boyhood had attuned their minds. He understood how troubled his father was over the possibility of running them into danger. And he decided he would not add to his difficulties, but would keep quiet, although inwardly he felt dismayed at the prospect of “missing the fun.”

Jack was quiet. He knew his dad. Growing up without a mother, he and the older man had developed a close bond. He could tell how worried his father was about putting them in danger. So, he decided not to add to his dad's worries and kept silent, even though he felt disappointed about possibly "missing out on the fun."

“You see how it is, fellows,” said Mr. Hampton, and he proceeded to elaborate on the theme furnished him by Farnum. “It’s a post of honor and danger combined.”

“You see how it is, guys,” said Mr. Hampton, and he went on to expand on the topic provided by Farnum. “It’s a position of honor and risk combined.”

Bob and Frank, however, were not convinced. They started anew to protest But Jack silenced them.

Bob and Frank, however, weren't convinced. They began to protest again, but Jack shut them down.

“All right, fellows, let’s be sports,” he said. “If the older heads decide they don’t need us, we won’t force ourselves on them.”

“All right, guys, let’s be good sports,” he said. “If the older people think they don’t need us, we won’t push ourselves on them.”

“But, Jack,” cried Bob and Frank in chorus.

“But, Jack,” Bob and Frank exclaimed together.

“No, I mean it, fellows,” said Jack. “Come over here with me, and I’ll tell you something.”

“No, I really mean it, guys,” said Jack. “Come over here with me, and I’ll tell you something.”

Drawing them out of earshot, he added: 89

Drawing them out of earshot, he added: 89

“Don’t let us make it hard for Dad. He’s got troubles enough. He’ll feel a lot easier if we aren’t along. I know how you feel. I feel the same way about it. But let’s make it as easy for Dad as we can. Besides, there is something in what he said, after all. There is no guarantee that some of Lupo’s men won’t attempt to raid us. For my part, I believe some of them must be watching this island right now, and the minute they see the others safely out of sight, they’ll attack us. For they know our numbers, and they will realize the three of us are here alone.”

“Let’s not make things difficult for Dad. He has enough on his plate as it is. He'll feel a lot better if we’re not around. I know how you feel; I feel the same way. But let’s try to make it as easy for Dad as possible. Besides, there is some truth in what he said. There’s no guarantee that some of Lupo’s guys won’t try to raid us. Personally, I think some of them might be watching this island right now, and as soon as they see the others out of sight, they’ll come after us. They know how many of us there are, and they’ll realize that it’s just the three of us here alone.”

“All right,” grumbled Bob. “Have it your own way, let’s get some more to eat. I haven’t filled up yet.”

“All right,” grumbled Bob. “Do it your way, let’s get something else to eat. I’m still hungry.”

“This outdoor life makes me ravenous, too,” agreed Frank. “And I used to be such a dainty eater. Why, I just pecked at my food.”

“This outdoor life makes me really hungry, too,” agreed Frank. “And I used to be such a picky eater. I barely touched my food.”

“You mean you ate food by the peck,” said Bob. “For a little guy, you’re the heftiest eater I ever saw.”

“You mean you ate food by the peck,” said Bob. “For a little guy, you’re the biggest eater I’ve ever seen.”

“Little guy, is it?” cried Frank. “I like that.”

“Little guy, huh?” shouted Frank. “I like that.”

And without more ado, he made a flying tackle, his arms locking about Bob’s knees. The big fellow came down in the brush and Frank piled on top of him with a shout of glee.

And without any more hesitation, he dove in, wrapping his arms around Bob’s knees. The big guy went down into the brush, and Frank jumped on top of him with a shout of joy.

“Come on, Jack. We haven’t had a good rough-house for a long time.” 90

“Come on, Jack. We haven't had a good roughhouse in a while.” 90

Grinning, Jack joined in, and the three went rolling and threshing about the bushes like a trio of young bears.

Grinning, Jack jumped in, and the three started tumbling and thrashing around the bushes like a bunch of young bears.

At the fireside, Mr. Hampton’s worried look relaxed, and he grinned with enjoyment.

At the fireside, Mr. Hampton's worried expression eased, and he smiled happily.

“It’s all right, now,” he said contentedly. “They’ll take their disappointment out in a grand wrestling jamboree. Well, let’s pack up a little grub and get ready to go.”

“It’s all good now,” he said happily. “They’ll channel their disappointment into an epic wrestling celebration. Alright, let’s grab some snacks and get ready to head out.”

91CHAPTER XI.—BOB FALLS ASLEEP.

In no time at all, Mr. Hampton and his party were ready to set out. Of one thing they were reminded by Jack, the individual radio sets constructed along his own lines, the instrument of which was so small and compact it was contained in the panel of a ring.

In no time at all, Mr. Hampton and his group were ready to head out. Jack reminded them about the personal radio sets he had designed, which were so small and compact that they fit right into the panel of a ring.

“Only trouble with these,” Jack said, “is that you can receive but can’t transmit. However—”

“Only problem with these,” Jack said, “is that you can receive but can’t send. However—”

“However,” his father interrupted, “that is all that will be necessary.”

“However,” his father interrupted, “that’s all that will be necessary.”

“Why?” asked Farnum.

“Why?” Farnum asked.

“It is hardly likely that the five of us will get into such a predicament that we shall fail to return,” explained Mr. Hampton. “But the boys may be attacked when we are gone, and may be placed in a bad position. Then they can call for us.”

“It’s unlikely that the five of us will end up in a situation where we don’t come back,” Mr. Hampton explained. “But the boys might be attacked while we’re away and could find themselves in a tough spot. They can reach out to us then.”

“At least we could send out a hurry up call over those sets,” said Jack. “As for your calling us, well, that will be a little more complicated, Dad, but it 92 can be done, if necessary. I insist on your taking that army field set. It came in mighty handy in South America. It is no great job to set it up. And it weighs little. You are taking no other equipment, and you can afford to take it along. It won’t be in your way. Here it is, you see, all boxed up complete, handle on the box and everything.”

“At least we can send out a quick call over those sets,” Jack said. “As for you calling us, well, that will be a bit more complicated, Dad, but it can be done if needed. I insist you take that army field set. It was really useful in South America. It isn’t hard to set up, and it’s lightweight. You’re not bringing any other equipment, so you can definitely take it along. It won’t bother you at all. Here it is, all boxed up and ready with a handle on the box and everything.”

“Right, Jack,” said his father. “Now we can communicate with each other easily enough. Well”—looking about him—“are we ready?”

“Alright, Jack,” his father said. “Now we can talk to each other without any issues. Well”—glancing around—“are we all set?”

The others nodded.

The others agreed.

“Then,” Mr. Hampton said, “I propose that we bring our canoes back through the trees, cross the island and make for the mainland on the other side.”

“Then,” Mr. Hampton said, “I suggest that we take our canoes back through the trees, cross the island, and head for the mainland on the other side.”

Farnum and MacDonald nodded agreement.

Farnum and MacDonald nodded in agreement.

“This island is pretty long,” said MacDonald, “and it will screen our departure on the other side, in all likelihood. It is hardly likely, as a matter of fact, that we will be seen, for Lupo’s party has not shown itself since we beat off that canoe, and probably is somewhere back up that stream out of which your party came.”

“This island is pretty long,” said MacDonald, “and it will hide our departure on the other side, most likely. In fact, it’s unlikely that we will be seen, since Lupo’s group hasn’t shown up since we drove off that canoe, and they’re probably somewhere upstream from where your party came.”

“You think they cannot see the mainland on the other side of this island from there, Dad?”

“You think they can’t see the mainland from the other side of this island, Dad?”

“I don’t believe so,” said Mr. Hampton.

“I don't think so,” said Mr. Hampton.

“Even if they do catch a glimpse of us,” suggested Farnum, “isn’t it probable they’ll believe we are pushing on? As a matter of fact, however, we’ll 93 land on the mainland, and carry our canoes inland and then up along the lake till we are out of sight, when we can cross again, I suppose that’s your idea, Mr. Hampton?”

“Even if they see us,” Farnum said, “don't you think they'll assume we're just moving forward? But actually, we’ll 93 land on the mainland, take our canoes inland, and then follow the lake until we're out of sight. After that, we can cross again. I guess that’s what you’re thinking, Mr. Hampton?”

“My idea exactly,” answered the other. “Well, let’s get the canoe and MacDonald’s kayak. They have been pulled well up into the bushes, and we can bring them across the island without detection easily enough.”

“My idea exactly,” replied the other. “Okay, let’s grab the canoe and MacDonald’s kayak. They’ve been pulled far into the bushes, and we can easily bring them across the island without being noticed.”

“Wait a minute, Dad,” said Jack, laying a detaining hand on his arm. “If they do see you crossing the channel to the mainland, on the other side of the island, they’ll know the whole party isn’t along, and will realize you aren’t leaving, but merely carrying out some maneuver.”

“Hold on a second, Dad,” Jack said, placing a hand on his arm to stop him. “If they see you crossing the channel to the mainland on the other side of the island, they'll figure out that the whole group isn’t there and will understand that you’re not actually leaving, but just executing some sort of plan.”

“Maybe, that’s what they will think, Jack. On the other hand, they might figure some of the canoes got across beforehand. Anyway, leaving by the back door, so to speak, is our wisest plan, I am sure. The channel to the mainland on the other side is only a narrow one, and the probabilities of our escaping detection are all in our favor.”

“Maybe that’s what they’ll think, Jack. On the other hand, they might realize that some of the canoes crossed earlier. Anyway, slipping out the back way, so to speak, is definitely our smartest move. The channel to the mainland on the other side is pretty narrow, and the chances of us not getting caught are definitely in our favor.”

The largest of the canoes, together with MacDonald’s kayak were dragged back through the underbrush and carried across the island to be launched on the other side. Nor did Jack neglect to load the compact field transmitting set in the canoe, as the party pushed off. Then, amid farewells from both 94 sides, Mr. Hampton and his party set out for the mainland.

The biggest canoe, along with MacDonald’s kayak, was pulled back through the bushes and taken across the island to be launched on the other side. Jack also made sure to pack the small field transmitting set into the canoe as the group pushed off. Then, amid goodbyes from both sides, Mr. Hampton and his group headed for the mainland.

Jack watched the canoe and the kayak depart, with something of a sinking of the heart. The same feeling, he suspected, possessed his father. Neither, however, presented other than a brave and cheerful front. As for Bob and Frank, they had gotten over their disappointment at not being permitted to accompany the expedition, to a certain extent, and, cast for the first time since the start of the trip, on their own resources were beginning to enjoy the situation.

Jack watched the canoe and the kayak leave, feeling a bit of a sinking sensation in his chest. He guessed his father felt the same way. However, neither of them showed anything but a brave and cheerful attitude. As for Bob and Frank, they had mostly moved past their disappointment about not being allowed to join the expedition and, for the first time since the trip began, relying on their own skills, were starting to enjoy the situation.

“First thing, fellows,” said Frank, as the party reached the mainland, hauled up canoe and kayak and struck into the trees, “first thing is to go to this knoll about which MacDonald spoke, and take a view of the field.”

“First thing, guys,” said Frank, as the group reached the mainland, pulled up the canoe and kayak, and headed into the trees, “first thing is to go to this hill that MacDonald mentioned, and check out the area.”

“Yes,” said big Bob, “then let’s divide up into watches, so that the pair of us not drawn for the first watch can get some rest.”

“Yes,” said big Bob, “then let’s split into shifts, so that the two of us not assigned to the first shift can get some rest.”

“You certainly were born in the Land o’ Nod, Bob,” scoffed Frank.

“You definitely were born in the Land of Nod, Bob,” Frank mocked.

“Yes,” said Jack, grinning, “if you’re as sleepy as all that, we’ll count you out right away. Frank and I will draw for the first watch, and you can hit the hay.”

“Yeah,” said Jack, grinning, “if you’re that sleepy, we’ll count you out right away. Frank and I will take the first watch, and you can go to sleep.”

“Not so fast,” said Bob. “I’ll take my chance with the rest of you.” 95

“Not so fast,” Bob said. “I’ll stick it out with the rest of you.” 95

Meantime, they had been mounting the tree-covered hill to which MacDonald had referred and now, reaching the top, found that, despite its low elevation, it was still so much higher than the rest of the island and than the shores of the lake as well, that they commanded a sweeping view not only of the nearer shore to which Mr. Hampton had gone but also of the farther one whence they had come.

Meantime, they had been climbing the tree-covered hill that MacDonald had mentioned and now, reaching the top, found that, despite its low elevation, it was still much higher than the rest of the island and the shores of the lake as well, giving them a sweeping view not only of the nearby shore where Mr. Hampton had gone but also of the distant one from which they had come.

Not a sign of human occupation, however, was anywhere apparent. Eastward, although they knew Mr. Hampton and his companions could not have progressed far, yet the trees rimming the lake shore were sufficiently dense to hide any sign of movement. Westward, toward the farther shore, was a thick belt of trees about the mouth of the stream, thinning out farther along the shore in both directions. Neither among the trees nor on the glades, could they discern anybody although Jack, who had been thoughtful enough to bring along their field glasses, scanned the prospect through them a long time before passing them on to the others, who did likewise.

Not a trace of human presence was visible anywhere. To the east, even though they knew Mr. Hampton and his friends couldn’t have gone far, the trees lining the lake’s edge were dense enough to conceal any signs of activity. To the west, towards the far shore, there was a thick band of trees around the mouth of the stream, which thinned out further along the shore in both directions. They couldn’t see anyone among the trees or in the clearings, though Jack, who had wisely brought their binoculars, scanned the area through them for a long time before passing them to the others, who did the same.

“Well, so far so good,” said Jack, with a sigh of relief. “Evidently, or so far as we can see, anyway, Dad and the rest got across undiscovered and now stand a fair chance of crossing the lake farther up undetected.” 96

“Well, so far so good,” Jack said, letting out a sigh of relief. “It looks like, at least for now, Dad and the others made it across without being noticed and have a good shot at crossing the lake further up without detection.” 96

“Maybe so,” said Frank. “Maybe, too, Lupo got discouraged and quit.”

“Maybe,” Frank said. “Maybe Lupo got discouraged and gave up.”

“Retreated you mean?” asked Jack.

“Retreated, you mean?” asked Jack.

Frank nodded.

Frank agreed.

“Oh, you fellows are full of prunes,” said Bob. “Why should he quit now, just because we have added one more man to our forces? He’s hung to our trail a long time. That means he’s not going to quit in a hurry. No, we’ve got to keep our eyes open.”

“Oh, you guys are just full of it,” said Bob. “Why should he quit now, just because we added one more person to our team? He’s been on our case for a long time. That means he’s not going to back off anytime soon. No, we need to stay alert.”

“That’s right,” said Jack, thoughtfully, “It won’t do to get overconfident and relax our guard.”

"That's right," Jack said, thinking it over. "We can't get too confident and let our guard down."

“Just the same there’s no sign of trouble now,” said Frank. “And I’ve got a suggestion.”

“Still, there’s no sign of trouble right now,” said Frank. “And I have a suggestion.”

“Don’t lose the idea,” said Bob, anxiously. “Hold on to it. Ideas are rare.”

“Don’t lose the idea,” Bob said nervously. “Keep it safe. Ideas are hard to come by.”

“With some people yes,” said Frank, grinning. “Not with me.”

“With some people, sure,” Frank said with a grin. “Not with me.”

“Huh.”

“Huh.”

Bob clutched at Frank, but the other wriggled out of his grasp.

Bob grabbed onto Frank, but Frank slipped out of his hold.

“My idea,” he said, “is to take a plunge in the channel your father crossed, Jack. I’m hot and sticky and tired, and a swim would go fine just before I turn in and leave Bob on watch. What do you say?”

“My idea,” he said, “is to take a dip in the channel your dad crossed, Jack. I’m feeling hot, sticky, and tired, and a swim would be great right before I head to bed and leave Bob on watch. What do you think?”

“So I’m to have the first watch, hey?” said Bob. “It’s been all decided, has it? Well, well. All right, 97 run along, Frankie, me lad. I’m not so anxious for a swim. I’ll just start my watch here and now.”

“So I get the first watch, huh?” said Bob. “It’s all been figured out, has it? Well, alright then. Go on, Frankie, my boy. I’m not really in the mood for a swim. I’ll just start my watch right here and now.” 97

“Bob, you’re a good sport,” said Frank, throwing an arm over the shoulders of his big chum, between whom and himself was a depth of feeling which seldom was expressed in words.

“Bob, you’re a great guy,” said Frank, putting an arm around the shoulders of his big friend, between whom and himself was a depth of feeling that rarely got expressed in words.

“Oh, run along and take your swim.”

“Oh, go on and take your swim.”

Bob playfully shoved the pair of them down the hill. Laughing, they obeyed. As they disappeared among the trees, Bob selected a spot at the base of a spruce on the top of the knoll, sat down with the glasses in his lap and his eyes on the westward shore of the lake, where Lupo’s half-breeds had last been seen, and prepared to keep watch. His back was against the trunk of the tree, and he made himself as comfortable as possible.

Bob playfully pushed the two of them down the hill. Laughing, they went along with it. As they disappeared among the trees, Bob picked a spot at the base of a spruce at the top of the knoll, sat down with the binoculars in his lap, and focused on the west shore of the lake, where Lupo’s half-breeds had last been spotted, and got ready to keep watch. His back rested against the tree trunk, and he made himself as comfortable as possible.

It was a really comfortable position and, when one is tired and sitting idle, a comfortable position is conducive to drowsiness. It was so with Bob. He had had but little sleep in the last two days. He had worked hard. The air was warm and drowsy, as only the air of the short hot Summer of the north country, when the sun never sets, can be. Presently his head began to nod, and there was a buzzing in his ears as of the drowsy hum of bees. He caught himself, and sat bolt upright, rubbing his eyes vigorously with his fists. Then he leaned back against the tree trunk again, and again began to 98 nod. This time, the jerk with which he awakened was longer in coming.

It was a really comfortable position and, when you’re tired and sitting still, a comfy spot makes you sleepy. That’s how it was with Bob. He hadn’t slept much in the last two days. He had been working hard. The air felt warm and drowsy, like only the short, hot summers of the north can feel, when the sun never sets. Soon, his head started to nod, and he could hear a buzzing in his ears like the lazy hum of bees. He caught himself and sat up straight, rubbing his eyes vigorously with his fists. Then he leaned back against the tree trunk again and started to nod off once more. This time, it took longer for him to wake up. 98

Bob got up and stretched.

Bob woke up and stretched.

“Mustn’t go to sleep,” he reflected. “Nothing in sight, though. Not much use to worry. Ho, hum.”

“Can’t go to sleep,” he thought. “Nothing to see, though. No point in stressing. Ho, hum.”

He resumed his seat. Imperceptibly, his eyes drifted shut. He sat through the transition period between sleeping and waking, unaware that he was yielding to slumber, merely pleasantly conscious of relaxed limbs and thoughts. Before he was aware his head nodded, his eyes closed, his chin touched his chest, and he slept.

He sat back down. Little by little, his eyes closed. He experienced that time between being awake and asleep, not realizing he was giving in to sleep, just feeling pleasantly aware of his relaxed body and thoughts. Before he knew it, his head fell forward, his eyes shut, his chin rested on his chest, and he was asleep.

Meanwhile Jack and Frank were thoroughly enjoying their plunge. The water was warm, there was no wind, and they swam, dived, floated to their heart’s content. Neither realized the passage of time until Frank, suddenly filled with compunction at their long absence, while Bob kept watch, scrambled ashore and looked at his watch, laid out on top of his clothes.

Meanwhile, Jack and Frank were having a great time swimming. The water was warm, there was no wind, and they swam, dove, and floated to their heart's content. Neither of them noticed how much time had passed until Frank, suddenly feeling guilty about their long absence while Bob kept an eye out, climbed out of the water and checked his watch, which was laid out on top of his clothes.

“Great guns, Jack,” he announced, “we’ve been gone an hour. Good old Bob. He was mighty nice about sending us off to swim while he kept watch, but you know he likes to swim, too. He’ll be thinking it’s a low trick on our part to stay so long. Maybe he’ll want to come and take a plunge himself, when one of us gets back to relieve him.” 99

“Wow, Jack,” he said, “we’ve been gone for an hour. Good old Bob. He was really cool about letting us swim while he kept an eye out, but you know he likes to swim, too. He’ll probably think it’s kind of sneaky of us to stay out this long. Maybe he’ll want to jump in himself when one of us gets back to take over for him.” 99

Jack also had a guilty feeling and, as is the way with most of us, attempted to make excuses.

Jack also felt guilty and, like most of us, tried to come up with excuses.

“He might just as well have come along,” he said. “Nothing’s going to happen.”

“He might as well have come along,” he said. “Nothing’s going to happen.”

They were pulling on their clothes.

They were putting on their clothes.

Suddenly they heard Bob’s voice raised in a distant shout, calling their names. Then followed a brisk outbreak of rifle shots.

Suddenly, they heard Bob shouting their names from a distance. Then came a quick series of gunshots.

100CHAPTER XII.—THE SURPRISE ATTACK.

“An attack,” gasped Jack.

"An attack," Jack gasped.

“And we’re not there to help old Bob,” cried Frank, in an agony of apprehension. “Come on. Don’t stop to finish dressing.”

“And we’re not there to help old Bob,” Frank shouted, filled with worry. “Come on. Don’t take the time to finish getting dressed.”

Shirt flapping out over his trousers, shoes unlaced, Frank frantically buckled on his revolver and cartridge belt, seized his rifle and started on a dead run through the trees. Jack did likewise. As they ran, they heard the shots continuing intermittently, and then once more—clearer and closer at hand, as they neared the knoll—came Bob’s voice:

Shirt hanging out over his pants, shoes untied, Frank quickly strapped on his revolver and ammo belt, grabbed his rifle, and took off running through the trees. Jack followed suit. As they sprinted, they heard the shots continuing sporadically, and then again—clearer and closer as they approached the hill—came Bob’s voice:

“Frank, Jack, they’re rushing me. Look out for yourselves.”

“Frank, Jack, they're pushing me. Take care of yourselves.”

There was a crashing in the brush ahead.

There was a loud noise in the bushes up ahead.

“Down, Jack, some of them coming.”

“Get down, Jack, some of them are coming.”

The two flung themselves prone behind a spruce whose low branches swept the ground. The sounds were off to their left. A moment later the forms of four men, hurrying towards the channel whence 101 they had just come, could be seen eight or ten yards away.

The two dropped down behind a spruce tree whose low branches brushed the ground. The sounds were coming from their left. Just a moment later, they spotted four men rushing toward the channel they had just left, about eight or ten yards away.

Jack’s face was pale, his lips set. Frank was trembling with excitement and fear—not for himself, if the truth must be told, for the plucky lad was not thinking of himself, but for his chum, who was holding off the main attack alone.

Jack’s face was pale, his lips tight. Frank was shaking with excitement and fear—not for himself, to be honest, because the brave kid wasn’t thinking about himself, but for his friend, who was holding off the main attack all on his own.

“Steady, Frank,” whispered Jack. “Bob’s life depends on us. This is no time for false compunctions. You’ll have to shoot to kill.”

“Steady, Frank,” Jack whispered. “Bob’s life depends on us. This isn’t the time for any fake guilt. You’ll have to shoot to kill.”

“All right, Jack.”

"Okay, Jack."

Then the two rifles spoke as one, and two of the runners stumbled, flung out their arms to save themselves, and pitched forward. The others spun about towards the direction whence the boys had fired, but a second time Frank and Jack fired, and they, too, fell.

Then the two rifles fired together, and two of the runners stumbled, threw out their arms to catch themselves, and fell forward. The others turned toward the direction the boys had shot from, but Frank and Jack fired again, and they fell too.

“No time to see how badly they were hit,” said Jack. “Come on. Old Bob’s still alive and shooting.”

“No time to see how badly they were hit,” Jack said. “Let’s go. Old Bob’s still alive and firing.”

Forward they dashed once more, not neglecting, however, to keep wary watch as they ran. No more of the enemy were seen, however. There was a sudden uproar ahead, the shots ceased. Cries of astonishment, stupefaction, even a note of fear, went up from several throats. Above all was a bull-like roar that they readily identified as coming from Bob’s throat. 102

Forward they charged again, but they made sure to stay alert as they ran. They didn’t see any more of the enemy, though. Suddenly, there was a loud commotion up ahead, and the gunfire stopped. Shouts of surprise, confusion, and even a hint of fear erupted from several people. Above it all was a deep, bull-like roar that they immediately recognized as coming from Bob. 102

Frank’s heart gave an exultant leap. He knew that yell. It came only when Bob went berserk, and fought with his hands. He had heard it when they fought Mexican bandits, Chinese smugglers, rum runners on Long Island and Incas in the Andes. He knew well what it meant.

Frank's heart jumped with joy. He recognized that yell. It only happened when Bob lost it and started throwing punches. He had heard it during their battles with Mexican bandits, Chinese smugglers, rum runners on Long Island, and Incas in the Andes. He knew exactly what it meant.

Almost at the same moment, they burst into the glade at the base of the knoll, and came to a dead halt, eyes popping, standing as if rooted to the spot.

Almost at the same moment, they burst into the glade at the base of the knoll and came to a complete stop, eyes wide, standing as if frozen in place.

But only for a moment. Then they started tearing up the hillside, among the scattered trees. For at the top was a whirling heap of figures, as if caught up in a cyclone, and well they knew what it portended. Somewhere in the center of the group was big Bob, at close grips with the enemy, and not caring how many they numbered.

But only for a moment. Then they began climbing up the hillside, weaving through the scattered trees. At the top was a chaotic swirl of figures, like they were caught in a tornado, and they knew exactly what it meant. Somewhere in the middle of the group was big Bob, locked in a struggle with the enemy, not worried about their numbers.

Would they be in time? Could they help Bob before some half-breed succeeded in sticking a knife into him?

Would they make it in time? Could they save Bob before some half-breed managed to stab him?

But Bob proved that he could handle his own affairs, for while they were still several yards away, first one and then another half-breed was spewed from the miniature whirlwind, and then Bob could be seen with several men clinging to his legs and another on his back, attempting apparently to throttle him. The big fellow’s hands went up and back. They settled under the other’s armpits. There was a sudden mighty heave and wrench, and 103 then the man on Bob’s back came flying through the air, straight for Bob’s two comrades. He had been tossed from Bob’s shoulders, as a strong man would toss a sack of meal. Frank and Jack leaped aside, and the man struck the ground, rolled over and over and then lay still, crumpled up against the trunk of a spruce.

But Bob showed that he could take care of himself, because while they were still a few yards away, one half-breed after another was thrown out of the little whirlwind, and then Bob could be seen with several guys hanging onto his legs and another one on his back, seemingly trying to choke him. The big guy's hands went up and back. They found their way under the others' armpits. There was a sudden, powerful heave and twist, and then the guy on Bob's back went flying through the air, straight toward Bob's two buddies. He had been tossed off Bob's shoulders like a strong man would toss a sack of flour. Frank and Jack jumped aside, and the guy hit the ground, rolled over and over, and then lay still, crumpled against the trunk of a spruce.

Recovering from their surprise, Jack and Frank leaped forward. But their intervention was unnecessary. Standing like a young Colossus, legs apart, with a man wreathed about each, Bob bent down. One big hand seized each by the neck. Then the two heads were bumped together once, twice. The half-breeds collapsed. Their grip on Bob’s legs relaxed, and he tossed them aside, and they, too, lay still. He had knocked them out.

Recovering from their shock, Jack and Frank jumped in. But their help wasn't needed. Standing like a young giant, legs apart, with a man wrapped around each leg, Bob bent down. One strong hand grabbed each by the neck. Then he smashed their heads together once, twice. The half-breeds fell down. Their hold on Bob's legs loosened, and he threw them aside; they lay still. He had knocked them out.

Then Bob did a surprising thing. He leaped with a murderous look for the two boys.

Then Bob did something unexpected. He jumped at the two boys with a deadly glare.

“More of you, hey?”

"More of you, huh?"

They sprang aside nimbly, eluding his grasp.

They quickly jumped aside, avoiding his grasp.

“Bob, Bob, it’s us.”

"Bob, Bob, it’s us."

“What? What? Oh, you—”

“What? What? Oh, you—”

Bob looked at them, the battle lust dying in his eyes, and recognition dawning. It was followed by a wide grin.

Bob looked at them, the excitement from the fight fading in his eyes, and realization setting in. It was followed by a big grin.

“Oh, it’s you.”

“Oh, it's you!”

“Bob, old thing, that was the greatest fight in 104 history,” cried Frank, hysterically, clapping his chum on the back.

“Bob, my friend, that was the best fight in 104 history,” shouted Frank, excitedly, patting his buddy on the back.

“Never saw the like,” said Jack, doing likewise. “Thank God, Bob, you’re alive.”

“Never seen anything like it,” said Jack, doing the same. “Thank God, Bob, you’re alive.”

“Never was more alive in my life,” said Bob. “Hey, they’re running away.”

“Never felt more alive in my life,” Bob said. “Hey, they’re getting away.”

He darted away from his chums and sprang downhill. True enough. The two whom he had disposed of first, who had dropped out of the fight, had gained their feet and were running madly through the trees.

He ran away from his friends and sprinted downhill. Sure enough, the two he had taken out first, who had fallen out of the fight, had gotten back on their feet and were racing through the trees.

Jack ran after Bob and restrained him.

Jack chased after Bob and held him back.

“Let them go, Bob. They are alone. There are three others here we must tie up before they come to.”

“Let them go, Bob. They're alone. We need to tie up the three others here before they wake up.”

Bob followed him back to where Frank was bending over the man whom the big fellow had tossed over his head. The half-breed was recovering consciousness, and beginning to moan.

Bob followed him back to where Frank was leaning over the guy the big guy had thrown over his head. The mixed-race man was regaining consciousness and starting to groan.

“Broken arm, I think,” said Frank. “He’ll not bother us. How about the two whose heads you bumped together?”

“Broken arm, I think,” Frank said. “He won't bother us. What about the two whose heads you knocked together?”

“They’re recovering consciousness, too,” said Jack. “Nothing much the matter with them. We had better tie them up, so they can’t cause us any trouble.”

“They’re waking up too,” said Jack. “They’re not really hurt. We should tie them up so they can’t cause us any trouble.”

“Here, take the other fellow’s belt and tie his hands behind his back with it,” said Bob. At the 105 same time, he suited action to word in the case of the nearer of the two, whipped off the fellow’s belt and tied him with it.

“Here, use the other guy’s belt and tie his hands behind his back with it,” said Bob. At the 105 same time, he put his words into action with the closer of the two, quickly taking the guy’s belt off and tying him up with it.

“Won’t they try to run away, Bob? Ought we to tie their legs, too?”

“Do you think they’ll try to escape, Bob? Should we tie their legs, too?”

“No, we’ll just keep an eye on them. Let’s take a look at the other. If his arm is broken we’ll have to set it somehow, I guess. Rather pitch him in the lake, though. He’s a villainous looking rascal. Tried to choke me, too, and darn near succeeded.”

“No, we’ll just watch them. Let’s check out the other one. If his arm is broken, we’ll need to fix it somehow, I guess. I’d rather toss him into the lake, though. He looks like a real troublemaker. He even tried to choke me and almost pulled it off.”

While Frank kept an eye on the two other prisoners, who had now recovered consciousness and were beginning to realize their situation but lay still under the threat of Frank’s rifle, Bob and Jack examined the third man.

While Frank watched the two other prisoners, who had now regained consciousness and were starting to understand their situation but lay still under the threat of Frank’s rifle, Bob and Jack checked out the third man.

His senses were returning, and he moaned a good deal. Examinations revealed, however, that his arm had not been broken, merely badly wrenched.

His senses were coming back, and he groaned a lot. However, exams showed that his arm wasn’t broken, just badly twisted.

“I’m mighty glad of that,” said Jack. “We’d have been up against it to set a broken arm.”

“I’m really glad about that,” said Jack. “We would have had a tough time fixing a broken arm.”

“Oh, we could do it, all right, if necessary,” said Bob. “But I’m glad, too, that it isn’t necessary. But, say, Jack”—with sudden recollection, and an air of anxiety—“there were four more of these scoundrels. We’ll have to look out for them.”

“Oh, we could definitely do it if we had to,” Bob said. “But I’m also relieved that it’s not necessary. But, hey, Jack”—with a sudden realization and a worried expression—“there were four more of these jerks. We need to keep an eye out for them.”

Jack’s voice shook a little as he replied.

Jack's voice trembled slightly as he replied.

“I think not, Bob,” he said. “Frank and I saw 106 them first. We ambushed them, practically. They didn’t have a chance.”

“I don’t think so, Bob,” he said. “Frank and I saw 106 them first. We practically ambushed them. They didn’t stand a chance.”

“You don’t mean—”

“You can’t be serious—”

Jack’s gaze was steady but troubled.

Jack's look was steady but uneasy.

“We had to do it, old man,” he said. “It was our life or theirs. And yours, especially. When we heard your shout, and those first shots, Frank went wild with fear that you had been trapped while we were away enjoying ourselves. And I guess I felt as bad as he did.”

“We had to do it, old man,” he said. “It was our lives or theirs. And yours, especially. When we heard your shout and those first shots, Frank completely lost it with fear that you had been trapped while we were off having fun. And I guess I felt just as bad as he did.”

“Hey, fellows,” interrupted Frank, hailing them, “the two that got away must have been all that were left. They’ve jumped in a canoe and are paddling like mad for the mainland.”

“Hey, guys,” interrupted Frank, calling to them, “the two that got away must have been the last ones left. They’ve jumped in a canoe and are paddling like crazy for the mainland.”

“Can you see them?” called Jack, starting to the top of the knoll to join his chum.

“Can you see them?” Jack shouted, making his way to the top of the hill to join his friend.

“How would I know what they were doing if I couldn’t?” rejoined Frank. “Yes, I can see them. Look there.”

“How would I know what they were doing if I couldn’t?” Frank replied. “Yes, I can see them. Look over there.”

He pointed.

He gestured.

“Tie up that other fellow, Bob, and make him walk up here to join his little playmates,” Jack called back.

“Tie up that other guy, Bob, and make him walk over here to join his little friends,” Jack called back.

Bob complied. The man groaned, but by now he had fully recovered his senses, and he obeyed Bob’s order to move with an alacrity that showed he stood in abject fear of the husky young American.

Bob complied. The man groaned, but by now he had fully regained his senses, and he followed Bob’s order with a speed that showed he was genuinely scared of the strong young American.

Frank pointed out the fleeing men, who were 107 nearing the mainland, and paddling with superhuman energy, as if fleeing from the Old Nick, no less.

Frank pointed out the men who were running away, getting closer to the mainland, and paddling with superhuman effort, as if they were escaping from the Devil himself.

“That accounts for all of them, I guess,” he said. “So we can sit down now, Bob, while you tell us how it happened.”

“That's everyone, I guess,” he said. “So we can sit down now, Bob, while you tell us what happened.”

“Not much to tell,” said Bob, sinking to a seated position against the tree trunk. “Except I went to sleep and was almost surprised, but not quite. My first intimation that the enemy was near was when I heard somebody talking in the trees at the foot of this knoll. Or, did I hear anybody? Was it just the old sixth sense giving warning of danger? I don’t rightly know. At any rate, I woke with a start and looking down through the trees saw a bunch of half-breeds making their way towards the other side of the island.

“Not much to say,” Bob said, settling down against the tree trunk. “Except I fell asleep and was almost surprised, but not really. The first hint that the enemy was close was when I heard someone talking in the trees at the bottom of this hill. Or did I hear someone? Was it just my gut feeling warning me of danger? I’m not exactly sure. Anyway, I woke up suddenly and, looking down through the trees, saw a group of mixed-heritage people making their way toward the other side of the island.”

“I tell you I was scared. I felt guilty as sin. Here I had promised to keep watch, and, instead, had fallen asleep. As a result, the half-breeds had landed on the island, and were heading for where you fellows were swimming. I had endangered your lives. What should I do? That was the question.

“I’m telling you, I was terrified. I felt guilty as hell. I had promised to keep watch, but instead, I dozed off. Because of that, the half-breeds landed on the island and were heading towards where you guys were swimming. I had put your lives at risk. What should I do? That was the question.

“But I didn’t waste must time, puzzling over it. I knew I had to give you fellows warning or you would be taken by surprise. So I yelled to you as loud as I could to look out. I guess they hadn’t seen 108 me up till then. But when I yelled, they saw me quick enough, and several of them opened fire, and——”

“But I didn’t waste much time thinking about it. I knew I had to warn you guys or you would be caught off guard. So I yelled as loud as I could for you to watch out. I guess they hadn’t noticed me until then. But when I yelled, they spotted me quickly, and several of them started shooting, and——”

“Wait a minute, Bob,” Frank interrupted, his eyes shining. “They hadn’t seen you, and you could have let them pass without attracting their attention, but you yelled, just to give us a chance for our white alley. That’s, that’s—”

“Hold on, Bob,” Frank cut in, his eyes bright. “They didn’t see you, and you could have let them go by without drawing their attention, but you shouted, just to give us a shot at our escape. That’s, that’s—”

“Oh, forget it,” said Bob, uncomfortably. “You’d have done the same. Anyway,” he hurried on, “they split up into two groups, and one kept on going, while the other rushed me before I could do much shooting, and—well, I guess you know the rest,” he concluded, lamely.

“Oh, never mind,” Bob said awkwardly. “You would’ve done the same thing. Anyway,” he continued quickly, “they split into two groups, and one kept going, while the other came at me before I could do much shooting, and—well, I guess you know the rest,” he finished weakly.

“I’ll say we do,” said Frank, gripping his big comrade’s shoulder. “Boy, I’ll never see the like of that fight again.”

“I'll say we will,” Frank said, grasping his large friend's shoulder. “Man, I’m never going to see a fight like that again.”

“But, Bob, I wonder why they rushed you instead of trying to shoot you down,” said Jack.

“But, Bob, I’m curious why they went after you instead of trying to take you out,” Jack said.

“Search me,” said Bob.

“Search me,” Bob said.

“I’ll bet I know,” said Frank.

“I bet I know,” said Frank.

“What?” asked both.

“What?” they both asked.

“They wanted to take you alive, Bob, for some reason of their own. Probably, would have tried to take us alive, too, if they’d gotten the chance.”

“They wanted to capture you alive, Bob, for some reason of their own. They probably would have tried to take us alive as well if they had the opportunity.”

“Well, maybe so,” said Bob. “Anyhow, that’s that. Now what shall we do?”

“Well, maybe,” Bob said. “Anyway, that’s that. So, what should we do now?”

109CHAPTER XIII.—MR. HAMPTON RECALLED.

Jack and Frank regarded each other with distaste and even horror in their eyes.

Jack and Frank looked at each other with disgust and even fear in their eyes.

“Has to be done, though,” said Jack, as if in answer to a remark of Frank’s.

“It's gotta be done, though,” said Jack, as if responding to something Frank had said.

Frank nodded.

Frank agreed.

“I know.”

"I get it."

“What are you two chumps talking about?” asked Bob.

“What are you two losers talking about?” asked Bob.

“Those four men we shot down, you know,” Frank explained.

“Those four guys we took out, you know,” Frank explained.

“Think you—”

“Think you—”

Bob’s question went uncompleted.

Bob's question went unanswered.

“I don’t know,” Frank replied. “We shot straight. It was your life and ours against theirs.”

“I don’t know,” Frank replied. “We went right at them. It was your life and ours versus theirs.”

“Well, come on. I know how you feel, but I expect that’s the first thing to be attended to. If any of them is no more than wounded, it will be up to us to do what we can for him.”

“Well, come on. I get how you feel, but I expect that's the first thing we need to take care of. If any of them is just wounded, it will be up to us to do what we can for him.”

“Right, Bob,” said Jack. 110

"Okay, Bob," said Jack.

“Come on,” Frank said shortly, starting down the hillside, in the direction of their successful, though impromptu, ambuscade.

“Come on,” Frank said impatiently, heading down the hillside toward their successful, though spontaneous, ambush.

“Go easy,” warned Bob. “If they’re able to shoot, they’ll take a crack at us.”

“Take it easy,” warned Bob. “If they can shoot, they’ll take a shot at us.”

Bob’s advice was followed, and the trio approached the spot warily. But precaution was needless, or, while still some distance away, they could see the four bodies outstretched motionless where they had fallen. Frank’s face went white, and he shuddered. Jack was pale. Big Bob, although he had had no hand in the affray, had to take a grip on himself, in order to force his laggard steps to continue. Though many were the affairs of danger in which they had been, the boys had never before shot to kill nor had death been brought so close to them.

Bob's advice was taken, and the three of them approached the spot cautiously. But there was no need to be cautious, or, even from a distance, they could see the four bodies lying still where they had fallen. Frank's face turned pale, and he shuddered. Jack was also pale. Big Bob, although he hadn't been involved in the fight, had to compose himself to push his slow steps forward. Even though they had faced many dangerous situations before, the boys had never shot to kill, nor had they come this close to death.

Frank stopped. He was trembling violently.

Frank stopped. He was shaking uncontrollably.

“I—I can’t look at them,” he gasped.

“I—I can’t look at them,” he gasped.

Bob threw an arm over his shoulders.

Bob draped an arm over his shoulders.

“You and Jack stay here,” he ordered, gruffly. “I had no hand in this. I’m the fellow to attend to it. Wait for me.”

“You and Jack stay here,” he said gruffly. “I had nothing to do with this. I’ll handle it. Wait for me.”

At that Frank protested, and started to proceed. But Bob shoved him back, kindly but firmly.

At that, Frank protested and started to move forward. But Bob gently but firmly pushed him back.

“The pair of you have been through enough,” he said. “Do as I say. Wait here.”

“The two of you have been through enough,” he said. “Just do what I say. Wait here.”

And with quick, firm step, keeping himself to the 111 task, he plunged on through the trees. For a moment or two both Frank and Jack watched him fascinatedly, then Frank sank down to a sitting position, elbows propped on his knees, his face in his hands. Jack faced about, and stared unseeing through the trees.

And with a quick, determined stride, focused on the task, he moved through the trees. For a moment, both Frank and Jack watched him with fascination, then Frank sat down, propping his elbows on his knees, his face in his hands. Jack turned away and stared blankly through the trees.

Presently, Bob’s solid, crunching footsteps could be heard approaching, and they looked up. His face was grave, but unflinching.

Currently, Bob’s firm, crunching footsteps could be heard getting closer, and they looked up. His face was serious, but resolute.

“Look here, fellows,” he said, firmly, “may as well face the facts. All four were killed instantly. Drilled through the—— But why discuss it? The fact is, they’re dead. They were rascals of the first water, and, as you say, it was their lives or ours. Self-preservation is the first law of Nature. Now, what are we going to do about it? We haven’t any tools to dig with.”

“Listen up, guys,” he said firmly, “we might as well face the facts. All four were killed instantly. Shot through the—— But why talk about it? The reality is, they’re dead. They were lowlifes, and, as you said, it was either their lives or ours. Self-preservation is our first instinct. So, what are we going to do about it? We don’t have any tools to dig with.”

Frank shook himself into alertness.

Frank snapped himself into focus.

“Let’s get the axes—our outfit has some—and cut off some spruce boughs and cover them over. Then we can roll some stones on top.”

“Let’s grab the axes—our team has some—and cut off some spruce branches to cover them up. Then we can pile some stones on top.”

As quickly as possible, without speaking during the task, and working feverishly, the three carried out Frank’s idea. Then, back at camp, they sat down and brewed a pot of coffee. The hot, scalding liquid steadied their shaken nerves.

As fast as they could, without talking while they worked, and putting in a lot of effort, the three put Frank's idea into action. After that, back at camp, they sat down and made a pot of coffee. The hot, boiling liquid calmed their rattled nerves.

“Guess we better try to get in touch with your father, Jack,” suggested Bob, at length. 112

“Looks like we should reach out to your dad, Jack,” Bob suggested after a moment. 112

“How long have they been gone?”

“How long have they been gone?”

Bob looked at his watch.

Bob checked his watch.

“Three hours. Seems like a lifetime.”

“Three hours. Feels like ages.”

“Things have certainly happened fast,” said Frank. “Thank goodness, that party missed our radio. If they had destroyed it, we would have been out of luck.”

“Things have definitely happened quickly,” Frank said. “Thank goodness that party missed our radio. If they had damaged it, we would have been in trouble.”

“More luck than I deserve,” said Bob, savagely. “Think of going to sleep on the job. If I had been awake, they never would have been able to land.”

“More luck than I deserve,” Bob said angrily. “Just think about it—if I had been paying attention, they never would have been able to land.”

“Forget it, Bob. You certainly have nothing to reproach yourself with.”

“Forget it, Bob. You really have nothing to blame yourself for.”

“Oh, that’s nonsense,” said the big fellow. “I’m always getting you into trouble.”

“Oh, that’s ridiculous,” said the big guy. “I’m always getting you into trouble.”

Frank smiled.

Frank grinned.

“Yes, and then getting us out again,” he said.

“Yes, and then getting us out again,” he said.

“Well, let’s try the radio, anyway,” suggested Jack. “They’ve been gone three hours. With the best of luck they can’t have made more than eight or ten miles, considering the detour they planned to take, and everything.”

“Okay, let’s give the radio a shot, anyway,” Jack suggested. “They’ve been gone for three hours. If we’re lucky, they can’t have gone more than eight or ten miles, given the detour they intended to take and all that.”

“Couldn’t have gotten that far away in a straight line,” said Frank.

“Couldn’t have gotten that far in a straight line,” Frank said.

“No, I guess not. But what if they aren’t prepared for a call from us?”

“No, I guess not. But what if they’re not ready for a call from us?”

“Oh, with that improved ring set of yours, your father will be proceeding fully equipped to hear from you,” said Frank. “He need only wear the 113 headphone, and I seem to remember he said on leaving that he would keep it on most of the time.”

“Oh, with that upgraded ring set of yours, your dad will be all set to hear from you,” said Frank. “He just has to wear the 113 headphone, and I think he mentioned when he left that he’d keep it on most of the time.”

Jack nodded. The improvement in the ring set, spoken of by Frank, had done away with the necessity for the umbrella aerial.

Jack nodded. The upgrade in the ring setup, mentioned by Frank, had eliminated the need for the umbrella aerial.

“All right,” he said. “I’ll call Dad on 200 meters. If he gets the message we ought to hear from him shortly, for he’ll at once unlimber the field transmitting set and call us back.”

“Okay,” he said. “I’ll call Dad on 200 meters. If he gets the message, we should hear from him soon, because he’ll immediately set up the field transmitting equipment and call us back.”

While Jack sent out a terse description of the fight and its outcome, Frank and Bob decided to steady their nerves by fishing and went down to the lakeside. They had reasonable success and had pulled out a number of fish when Jack joined them.

While Jack sent out a brief overview of the fight and what happened, Frank and Bob decided to calm their nerves by going fishing and headed to the lakeside. They had decent success and had caught several fish when Jack showed up.

“Send out your message, Jack?” Frank inquired.

“Did you send your message, Jack?” Frank asked.

“Yes, and heard from Father in reply, too.”

“Yes, and I heard back from Dad, too.”

“What? Why, great guns, how long have we been here? Surely, you can’t have had time to hear from your father?”

“What? Wow, how long have we been here? You can’t have heard back from your dad yet, right?”

“But, I have,” affirmed Jack. “You’ve been here more than an hour.”

“But, I have,” Jack confirmed. “You’ve been here for over an hour.”

Bob and Frank looked at each other. In all that time, neither had spoken a word. They had just dozed over their lines, pulling in an occasional fish. Frank laughed.

Bob and Frank looked at each other. Throughout all that time, neither had said a word. They had just dozed off over their lines, occasionally reeling in a fish. Frank laughed.

“I guess we went to sleep with our eyes open,” he confessed. “Well, what did your father say?”

“I guess we went to sleep with our eyes open,” he admitted. “So, what did your dad say?”

“They made a long trek up the lake before crossing 114 over, and are not very far away—somewhere up in that direction—on the other shore, there,” said Jack, pointing. “Dad was worried as the deuce at my story, and they’re coming back.”

“They took a long hike up the lake before crossing 114 over, and they aren’t too far away—somewhere up in that direction—on the other side, there,” said Jack, pointing. “Dad was really worried about my story, and they’re on their way back.”

“Coming back? Why? It’s all over now.”

“Coming back? Why? It's done now.”

“That’s what I told him, Frank. But he’s coming back, anyway. They’re going to get back to the lake, and come straight down to the island. Ought to be here in a couple of hours or less.”

"That’s what I told him, Frank. But he’s coming back anyway. They’re going to head back to the lake and come straight down to the island. They should be here in a couple of hours or less."

“May as well wait dinner for them, in that case,” observed Bob. “Or what meal is it? Breakfast, lunch, or dinner? I’m sure I don’t know. This perpetual sunshine has me all turned around. I don’t know whether it’s day or night.”

“May as well wait for them to have dinner, then,” Bob said. “Or what meal is it? Breakfast, lunch, or dinner? I have no idea. This endless sunshine has me all confused. I can’t tell if it’s day or night.”

“Same here,” confessed Frank. “I do know, though, that I’m beginning to get up an appetite.” Then a thought, a thought which his somnolent daydreaming over the fishing lines had driven away for the time, crossed his mind, and he paled. “I don’t know though”—catching his breath—“whether I’ll ever want to eat again.”

“Same here,” Frank admitted. “But I do realize that I'm starting to get hungry.” Then a thought, one that his sleepy daydreaming about the fishing lines had pushed aside for a while, popped into his mind, and he went pale. “I’m not sure though”—catching his breath—“if I’ll ever want to eat again.”

Jack looked at him sharply. So did Bob. The big fellows noted with apprehension the twisted, stricken look on their slighter chum’s face, and the haunted appearance of his eyes. To Bob’s keen eyes, moreover, two hectic spots glowing brightly in the dark tan of Frank’s cheeks were apparent.

Jack shot him a quick look. Bob did too. The bigger guys sensed the worried, distressed expression on their more delicate friend's face, as well as the haunted look in his eyes. To Bob's sharp gaze, two bright spots stood out against the dark tan of Frank's cheeks.

“Look here, old man,” said Bob, anxiously, “you 115 want to quit thinking about that or you’ll be sick.”

“Listen, old man,” Bob said nervously, “you really need to stop thinking about that or you’re going to make yourself sick.”

“Sick?” Frank tried to force a laugh. “I’m the healthiest invalid ever you saw.”

“Sick?” Frank tried to laugh it off. “I’m the healthiest sick person you'll ever see.”

“No, Frank, I mean it. Put that thought out of your mind, or you will be sick. Why—”laying a hand on his brow—“you’ve got a fever right now.”

"No, Frank, I'm serious. Forget about that thought, or you'll make yourself sick. Why—" laying a hand on his forehead—"you've got a fever right now."

Jack was worried, too.

Jack was worried as well.

“Great guns, Frank, you must take Bob’s advice. What if you came down sick? We’d be in a pretty fix.”

“Wow, Frank, you should really listen to Bob’s advice. What if you got sick? We’d be in a tough spot.”

“Oh, you fellows make me tired,” said Frank, irritatedly. “I’m all right.”

“Oh, you guys are exhausting me,” Frank said, annoyed. “I’m fine.”

But Bob’s worry was not routed. He took his chum by an arm and started marching him toward camp.

But Bob’s worry hadn’t gone away. He grabbed his friend by the arm and started leading him toward camp.

“I’m going to give you a dose of calomel and make you lie down,” he said. “Come on.”

“I’m going to give you some calomel and get you to lie down,” he said. “Let’s go.”

“Calomel? Have a heart.”

“Calomel? Have a heart.”

“Yes, calomel,” said Bob, firmly. “That’s what you need, that and a nap.”

“Yes, calomel,” Bob said confidently. “That’s what you need, along with a nap.”

Picking up the fish, Jack followed. And at the camp, despite Frank’s vehement protests, he was made to swallow a liberal dose of calomel, and then to lie down on a couch of spruce boughs, over him the little tent belonging to Mr. Hampton to provide shade from the northern sun. Jack and Bob sat down, some distance away, and started cleaning the fish. They talked together in low tones. 116 Presently, after several glances toward the motionless figure, Bob arose and tiptoed close to it. On his return, he nodded, smiling slightly, at Jack.

Picking up the fish, Jack followed. At the camp, despite Frank’s strong objections, he was forced to take a large dose of calomel and then lie down on a couch made of spruce branches, with Mr. Hampton's small tent providing shade from the northern sun. Jack and Bob sat down a little way off and started to clean the fish. They spoke quietly to each other. 116 After a while, after glancing at the motionless figure several times, Bob got up and quietly approached it. When he returned, he smiled subtly at Jack and nodded.

“Asleep,” he said. “Didn’t want to do it, but overworked Nature was too much for him. I’m a little bit worried. His nerves got a severe shock. But I guess he’ll be all right when he wakes up.”

“Asleep,” he said. “Didn’t want to do it, but overworked Nature was too much for him. I’m a little bit worried. His nerves took a serious hit. But I think he’ll be okay once he wakes up.”

Then he glanced more keenly at Jack.

Then he looked more closely at Jack.

“Look here, you’ve been through the same experience. I had a nap. Now you’re going to take one. Sleep will be good medicine for you, too. We don’t want two sick ones on our hands.”

“Listen, you’ve gone through the same thing. I took a nap. Now it’s your turn. Sleep will help you feel better, too. We can't have two sick people here.”

Jack didn’t protest, but also turned in beside Frank, and in a few minutes was sound asleep. As Bob had said, overworked Nature claimed her dues.

Jack didn’t say anything, but he also lay down next to Frank, and in a few minutes, he was fast asleep. As Bob had mentioned, overworked nature demanded its rest.

117CHAPTER XIV.—A REVELATION.

This time Bob did not go to sleep on the job, but at the first faint indication that somnolence was stealing upon him, arose and stamped about vigorously. Once, prompted by a humane inclination, he paused by the three prisoners who lay in the shade, hands and feet tied, and proffered them a drink of water. The courtesy and thoughtfulness was totally unexpected, as Bob could see by the surprise in their eyes, although no words were exchanged, and they drank eagerly in great gulps. The half-breed whom Bob had pitched over his head was in considerable pain because of his wrenched arm, as Bob could see from his occasional writhings, and Bob decided to chance trouble by loosening his bonds. In addition, he rummaged their stores and brought out a bottle of liniment for sprains and bruises, with which he bathed the twisted member.

This time, Bob didn't fall asleep on the job, but at the first hint that he was getting drowsy, he stood up and paced around energetically. Once, feeling a bit compassionate, he stopped by the three prisoners lying in the shade, their hands and feet tied, and offered them a drink of water. The gesture took them by surprise, as Bob noticed from the look of shock in their eyes, even though they didn’t say anything, and they drank eagerly in large gulps. The half-breed that Bob had thrown over his shoulder was in a lot of pain because of his injured arm, which Bob could tell from his occasional writhing, so he decided to take a risk and loosen the guy’s bindings. He also searched through their supplies and found a bottle of liniment for sprains and bruises, with which he treated the injured arm.

“You good man,” whispered the other, gazing at 118 him, as Bob bent to the task, and speaking in a voice barely audible to Bob’s ears, and certainly not to the other two men a short distance away. “I tell you something—not now—bimeby—when they not know.”

“You're a good man,” whispered the other, looking at him, as Bob focused on the task, speaking in a voice barely audible to Bob and definitely not to the other two men a short distance away. “I'll tell you something—not now—later—when they won’t know.”

Bob thought quickly.

Bob had a quick thought.

“All right,” he responded, in the same low tone. “I’ll fix it.”

“All right,” he replied, in the same quiet tone. “I’ll take care of it.”

“Yes.” The other nodded. “You fix it.”

“Yes.” The other person nodded. “You take care of it.”

“Now what in the world has he got to tell me?” Bob asked himself, as he moved away. “Probably, something about Lupo the Wolf. At any rate, I can’t see what else it can be. Was grateful because I gentled him a little—after first maltreating him.” He smiled at the irony of this thought. “Well, Mr. Hampton will soon be here, no doubt. Then there will be a chance to question him apart from his fellows.”

“Now what could he possibly want to tell me?” Bob wondered as he walked away. “Most likely something about Lupo the Wolf. I can't think of anything else it could be. I'm just glad I managed to calm him down a bit after initially treating him poorly.” He smiled at the irony of this thought. “Well, Mr. Hampton will be here soon, no doubt. Then I'll have a chance to ask him questions away from the others.”

And with that, he dismissed the matter from his mind. Jack now rolled over, sat up and came out from under the tent, yawning. Frank continued sunk in heavy slumber.

And with that, he put the matter out of his mind. Jack rolled over, sat up, and crawled out from under the tent, yawning. Frank remained deep in sleep.

“By George,” said Bob, looking at his watch, “two hours since you started to take your nap. Run down to the shore, will you, and take a look to see if there is any sign of your father. We left these fellows alone once”—nodding to their prisoners—“but I felt it wasn’t wise to try it too 119 often. Something might happen. So I’ve been sticking close to camp.”

“By George,” Bob said, glancing at his watch, “it’s been two hours since you started your nap. Can you run down to the shore and check if there’s any sign of your dad? We left these guys alone once”—he nodded at their prisoners—“but I didn't think it was smart to do that too often. Something could happen. So I’ve been staying close to camp.”

Jack nodded.

Jack agreed.

“Yes, that time you were fishing. It was foolish for me to run down after you, but I just had to tell you about hearing from Father.”

“Yes, that time you were fishing. It was silly for me to chase after you, but I just had to let you know about hearing from Dad.”

He set out for the shore.

He went to the beach.

A few minutes later, Bob heard his comrade give a joyful shout. It was answered by a fainter hail from the water. Faint though it was, however, it was unmistakable. Mr. Hampton was approaching.

A few minutes later, Bob heard his buddy let out a joyful shout. It was met with a softer call from the water. Even though it was weak, it was clear. Mr. Hampton was coming closer.

Presently there was a babble of voices approaching, and the returning party came into view, Jack in the lead flanked by his father and Farnum, with MacDonald, Dick and Art bringing up the rear. Jack was eagerly explaining what had occurred at camp since his father’s departure.

Currently, there was a mix of voices coming closer, and the returning group came into sight, with Jack in the front, flanked by his father and Farnum, while MacDonald, Dick, and Art followed behind. Jack was excitedly sharing what had happened at the camp since his father left.

“Hello, Bob,” said Mr. Hampton, coming up, and gripping the big fellow’s hand hard. “Had some excitement while we were gone?”

“Hey, Bob,” Mr. Hampton said, walking up and shaking the big guy’s hand firmly. “Did anything exciting happen while we were away?”

“Yes, we did, Mr. Hampton. Thought this was going to be a loafing assignment you left us on—nothing to do but hang around camp and swim and fish—and the minute you turn your backs something happens.”

“Yes, we did, Mr. Hampton. We thought this was going to be an easy assignment you left us on—nothing to do but hang around camp, swim, and fish—and the moment you turn your backs, something happens.”

“How’s Frank?”

"How's Frank doing?"

“Jack told you, did he?” 120

“Jack told you, right?”

Mr. Hampton nodded.

Mr. Hampton agreed.

“He’s still asleep,” said Bob. “The necessity of shooting to kill was a shock to his nerves. Nature took him in hand. See.” He indicated where Frank lay as in a stupor in the tent, unmoved by the arrival of the returning party.

“He's still asleep,” Bob said. “Having to shoot to kill really shook him up. Nature took over. Look.” He pointed to where Frank lay in a daze in the tent, unaffected by the returning group.

“He’ll sleep for hours yet,” said Mr. Hampton, “if we don’t make too much noise. I’ll caution the others. Best medicine in the world for him. He’ll be all right when he wakes, I expect.”

“He’ll sleep for hours still,” said Mr. Hampton, “if we keep the noise down. I’ll warn the others. It’s the best medicine for him. I expect he’ll be fine when he wakes up.”

While Dick put on the fish, for all were hungry, Bob and Jack, in lowered voices, told the others all that had occurred. Bob repeated his condemnation of himself for having fallen asleep and permitted the enemy to land unopposed, but Mr. Hampton rested a hand on his shoulder, and told him not to be foolish.

While Dick cooked the fish, since everyone was hungry, Bob and Jack, speaking in hushed tones, filled the others in on everything that had happened. Bob expressed his frustration with himself for falling asleep and allowing the enemy to land without resistance, but Mr. Hampton placed a hand on his shoulder and told him not to be silly.

“In the first place,” he said, “there seemed to be no reason why you should keep strict watch. It hardly seemed likely these fellows would boldly approach the island.”

“In the first place,” he said, “there didn’t seem to be any reason for you to keep such a close watch. It didn’t really seem likely that these guys would boldly come to the island.”

“Expect they saw us set out, after all,” suggested MacDonald, “and figured the whole party hadn’t gone, and that them left behind would be on ’tother side of the island, so’s they could land and surprise ’em.”

“Maybe they saw us leave, after all,” MacDonald suggested, “and thought the whole group hadn’t gone, assuming that those left behind would be on the other side of the island, so they could land and catch them off guard.”

Nods of agreement followed this statement. It was, indeed, the most likely explanation. Over the 121 puzzle as to why Bob had not been slain by those attacking him, but who, instead, had tried merely to make him prisoner, nobody had any suggestion to offer other than that earlier advanced by the boys themselves, that they enemy wished to take them alive.

Nods of agreement followed this statement. It was, indeed, the most likely explanation. Over the 121 puzzle as to why Bob had not been killed by those attacking him, but who, instead, had only tried to capture him, nobody had any suggestion to offer other than the one earlier put forward by the boys themselves, that the enemy wanted to take them alive.

“Reckon Lupo thought he’d get some information from you,” said MacDonald.

“Looks like Lupo thought he could get some info from you,” MacDonald said.

“But he wasn’t here,” Bob protested.

“But he wasn’t here,” Bob argued.

“No, but you can bet they were actin’ on his orders.”

“No, but you can bet they were acting on his orders.”

Bob bethought him of the prisoner, who had whispered that he had something to tell him. He explained to the others. Mr. Hampton thought for a moment.

Bob remembered the prisoner who had whispered that he had something to tell him. He explained this to the others. Mr. Hampton thought for a moment.

“I have it,” he said. “Art, bring the others here and we’ll question them. At the same time, Bob, do you slip off and talk to your man. We’ll keep the pair occupied, so that they won’t be able to see. Tell your man that presently, then, we’ll call him up to be questioned, too, and that he’s to pretend sullen obstinacy and refuse—in the presence of his comrades—to answer any questions.”

“I’ve got it,” he said. “Art, bring the others here, and we’ll question them. At the same time, Bob, go talk to your guy. We’ll keep the two occupied so they won’t notice. Tell your guy that soon we’ll call him in to be questioned too, and he should act moody and refuse to answer any questions in front of his friends.”

Bob nodded and, as Art went for the pair, he slipped away in an opposite direction. Executing a flank movement through the trees, he presently arrived on the opposite side of the camp and got behind the tree, against which the man with the 122 wrenched shoulder was sitting. In a rapid whisper he communicated Mr. Hampton’s instructions to the other. The fellow comprehended, and then in a low tone, scarcely audible to Bob, who strained to hear, communicated surprising intelligence.

Bob nodded, and while Art went for the pair, he quietly slipped away in the opposite direction. Making a strategic move through the trees, he soon reached the other side of the camp and took cover behind the tree where the man with the 122 injured shoulder was sitting. In a quick whisper, he passed on Mr. Hampton’s instructions to the other man. The guy understood, and then in a barely audible voice, just loud enough for Bob, who was straining to listen, shared some surprising information.

Bob heard him out, then with a final word of caution, again slipped away, once more skirted camp through the trees, and approached the group from the waterside. The two other half-breeds were being grilled, but without success. At Bob’s approach, Mr. Hampton turned again to Art.

Bob listened to him, then with one last warning, quietly slipped away, once more navigating around the camp through the trees, and headed toward the group from the water's edge. The other two half-breeds were being questioned, but it wasn’t going well. As Bob got closer, Mr. Hampton turned back to Art.

“Bring that other fellow here,” he commanded. “See if he knows any more than these men.”

“Bring that other guy here,” he commanded. “Let’s see if he knows anything more than these men.”

The man was brought into the council, but, acting on instructions, maintained an obstinate silence.

The man was brought into the council, but, following instructions, kept a stubborn silence.

“Oh, take them away, and feed them,” said Mr. Hampton finally, as if despairing of obtaining any information. “We’ll talk to them later, after I’ve eaten. Dick’s fish will get cold if we don’t fall to, and I’m too hungry to delay with these rascals.”

“Oh, take them away and feed them,” Mr. Hampton said finally, sounding like he had given up on getting any information. “We’ll talk to them later, after I’ve eaten. Dick’s fish will get cold if we don’t get started, and I’m too hungry to wait around with these troublemakers.”

The men, whose ankle bonds had been removed, were returned to the other side of the camp and, with their hands untied, were permitted to eat under the watchful eyes of Dick and Art. Then once more they were tied up.

The men, whose ankle shackles had been taken off, were brought back to the other side of the camp and, with their hands free, were allowed to eat while being closely monitored by Dick and Art. Then, once again, they were restrained.

Meantime, Mr. Hampton turned eagerly to Bob, as soon as the trio of prisoners was out of hearing. 123

Meantime, Mr. Hampton eagerly turned to Bob as soon as the three prisoners were out of earshot. 123

“Out with it, Bob,” he said. “I can see you’re dying to tell us. Must be important.”

“Spit it out, Bob,” he said. “I can tell you really want to share. It's got to be important.”

“It is,” said Bob, emphatically.

“It is,” Bob said emphatically.

“What did he say?”

“What did he say?”

“Mr. Hampton, you think we’re alone in this wilderness except for Lupo’s gang?”

“Mr. Hampton, do you really think we’re the only ones out here in this wild area besides Lupo’s gang?”

“I don’t know who else would be here. This is country that white men never get into.”

“I don’t know who else would be here. This is a place that white men never enter.”

“Well, Thorwaldsson, Farrell and three followers of their party of ten are not more than two hundred miles away; perhaps less than that.”

“Well, Thorwaldsson, Farrell, and three members of their group of ten are no more than two hundred miles away; maybe even less than that.”

“What! Say that again.”

"What! Say that one more time."

Mr. Hampton was so excited he almost dropped his portion of fish into the fire.

Mr. Hampton was so excited he almost dropped his piece of fish into the fire.

“It’s true,” said Bob. “At least that’s what this fellow, Long Tom, declares. Long Tom—that’s his name.”

“It’s true,” said Bob. “At least that’s what this guy, Long Tom, says. Long Tom—that’s his name.”

“How does he know?”

"How does he know that?"

It was MacDonald who asked the question, and Bob turned to him.

It was MacDonald who asked the question, and Bob turned to him.

“That’s what I asked him. He said Thorwaldsson had been attacked before he reached the oil country, and Thorwaldsson, Farrell and four of his men cut off from their camp. Those in the camp were killed, and Thorwaldsson’s supplies looted. He says a big band of Indians committed the outrage.”

“That’s what I asked him. He said Thorwaldsson had been attacked before he got to the oil country, and Thorwaldsson, Farrell, and four of his men were cut off from their camp. The people in the camp were killed, and Thorwaldsson’s supplies were looted. He says a large group of Indians carried out the attack.”

“At whose orders?” asked Mr. Hampton. 124

“At whose orders?” asked Mr. Hampton. 124

“Merely operating on their own, says Long Tom. He was with them. They wanted the loot. What they didn’t understand, they destroyed.”

“Just acting on their own, says Long Tom. He was with them. They wanted the treasure. What they didn’t understand, they destroyed.”

“That’s why nothing has been heard of Thorwaldsson,” said Mr. Hampton, “for his radio equipment must have been among ‘the things they didn’t understand.’ Go on, Bob.”

“That’s why no one has heard from Thorwaldsson,” said Mr. Hampton, “because his radio equipment must have been among ‘the things they didn’t understand.’ Go ahead, Bob.”

“Long Tom thinks Thorwaldsson spent the Winter with the Eskimos up on the rim of the Arctic Ocean.”

“Long Tom thinks Thorwaldsson spent the winter with the Eskimos up by the Arctic Ocean.”

“Where has he been? What became of the Indians?”

“Where has he been? What happened to the Indians?”

“They were a hunting party, as far as I could gather, who, after chasing Thorwaldsson up to the Eskimos, left the country. But Long Tom wintered with some Eskimos near Union Straits himself, and this Spring started out. Then he fell in with Lupo, who he knew, and joined him.”

“They were a hunting party, as far as I could tell, who, after chasing Thorwaldsson up to the Eskimos, left the area. But Long Tom spent the winter with some Eskimos near Union Straits himself, and this spring he set out. Then he ran into Lupo, whom he knew, and teamed up with him.”

“And how does he know where Thorwaldsson is now? Why does he say Thorwaldsson is so close?”

“And how does he know where Thorwaldsson is now? Why does he say Thorwaldsson is so close?”

“Says he ran across an Eskimo hunter on his way out, who told of Thorwaldsson having wintered with his tribe, and learned Thorwaldsson was on his way out down the Coppermine—or up it, whichever you choose to call it. Though that was weeks ago, he believes Thorwaldsson would be following watercourses that would put him about one hundred and 125 fifty or two hundred miles to the northeast of us.”

“Says he ran into an Eskimo hunter on his way out, who mentioned that Thorwaldsson had spent the winter with his tribe, and found out Thorwaldsson was heading down the Coppermine—or up it, depending on how you look at it. Even though that was weeks ago, he thinks Thorwaldsson would be following waterways that would put him about one hundred and 125 fifty or two hundred miles to the northeast of us.”

“Well, Bob, you certainly learned a lot,” said Mr. Hampton. “Was that everything? Or did Long Tom know or have anything to say about Lupo?”

“Well, Bob, you definitely learned a lot,” said Mr. Hampton. “Was that it? Or did Long Tom know anything about Lupo or have something to add?”

“He doesn’t know why Lupo is after us, except that it has something to do with Thorwaldsson. That’s all I could get out of him. Pretty indefinite, but it was the best I could do.”

“He doesn’t know why Lupo is chasing us, other than it has something to do with Thorwaldsson. That’s all I could get out of him. Pretty vague, but it was the best I could do.”

“Indefinite! Nonsense, Bob. That is something to go on, indeed.”

“Indefinite! That's ridiculous, Bob. That's really something to work with.”

“And to think that old Bob got it all just because he was kind to a fellow with a sore arm and put some liniment on it,” said Jack.

“And to think that old Bob got everything just because he was nice to a guy with a sore arm and put some ointment on it,” said Jack.

126CHAPTER XV.—MACDONALD TURNS BACK.

Taking everything into consideration, Mr. Hampton decided that before any further steps were taken, the wisest plan would be for all to get a good rest. Frank still lay as if in a stupor; Jack looked and confessed to being shaky; even Bob was tired from the strain of the terrific fight through which he had gone, coming upon the top of many hours of exhausting travel. As for the rest, they had done practically three days’ work with little or no rest in the short interval between.

Taking everything into account, Mr. Hampton decided that before moving forward, the smartest plan would be for everyone to get some good rest. Frank still lay there like he was in a daze; Jack admitted he was feeling shaky; even Bob was worn out from the intense fight he had just been through, on top of many hours of exhausting travel. As for the others, they had basically done three days' worth of work with little to no rest in the brief time in between.

“Altogether,” said Mr. Hampton, summing up, “we are in no fit condition to set out in immediate pursuit of Lupo and the remainder of his men, nor even to decide wisely as to what to do. It may be that the best plan would be not to pursue Lupo but to set off at once to try and find Thorwaldsson. I, for one, am too tired even to think straight. So I vote that we make camp, set watches and turn in for a good rest. I believe I could sleep the clock around.” 127

“Overall,” Mr. Hampton said, wrapping things up, “we’re not in any shape to immediately go after Lupo and the rest of his crew, nor are we able to make wise decisions about what to do next. It might be better if we don’t chase Lupo and instead head out right away to find Thorwaldsson. Personally, I’m too exhausted to think clearly. So I suggest we set up camp, take turns on watch, and get a good night’s sleep. I think I could sleep all day.” 127

“If you think you can trust me with the first watch, Mr. Hampton,” muttered Bob, shamefacedly, “I’d like to have it. I’ll promise you not to go to sleep on the job again.”

“If you think you can trust me with the first watch, Mr. Hampton,” Bob mumbled, feeling embarrassed, “I’d really like to have it. I promise I won’t fall asleep on the job again.”

Mr. Hampton slapped the big fellow on the back in kindly fashion, as Bob leaned forward, seated on the ground beside him.

Mr. Hampton gave the big guy a friendly pat on the back while Bob leaned in, sitting on the ground next to him.

“Forget it, Bob,” he said. “You have nothing with which to reproach yourself. Certainly you can have the first watch, if you want it. I expect the rest of us will be only too glad of the opportunity to turn in at once. As to there being any further danger, however, I very much doubt it. You boys have given Lupo a terrible blow. With four men killed and three prisoners, he must be short-handed. If he had only twelve or fourteen, as we believe, his number now is less than ours. The consequence is, that I cannot conceive of his attempting again to attack us here on the island. However, a watch must be kept, so go to it.”

“Forget it, Bob,” he said. “You have nothing to blame yourself for. Of course, you can take the first watch if you want. I’m sure the rest of us will be more than happy to get some rest right away. As for any further danger, I really doubt it. You guys dealt Lupo a serious blow. With four men dead and three captured, he must be short on people. If he only had twelve or fourteen, like we think, his numbers are now less than ours. So, I can’t imagine him trying to attack us again here on the island. Still, we need to keep watch, so go ahead.”

Everybody agreeing with this program, Bob took the first watch and the rest scattered around the camp, under the spruces, and soon were sleeping soundly. When the time to change watches came, with nothing alarming having broken the calm, Bob waked MacDonald, and himself turned in. After that, he did not have even a disturbing dream and was disturbed by nothing until awakened by being 128 shaken. He looked up and found Frank bending above him, his face alight with merriment.

Everybody on board with this plan, Bob took the first watch and the others spread out around the camp, beneath the spruces, and soon fell into a deep sleep. When it was time to switch watches, with nothing unsettling breaking the peace, Bob woke MacDonald and went to bed himself. After that, he didn’t even have a troubling dream and wasn’t bothered by anything until he was awoken by someone shaking him. He looked up and saw Frank leaning over him, his face lit up with joy.

“Hey, which of the Seven Sleepers are you?” demanded Frank.

“Hey, which one of the Seven Sleepers are you?” Frank asked.

Bob ignored the query, his mind leaping at once to the picture of Frank as he had last seen him. In his voice was a note of thankfulness at finding Frank thus carefree, as he said:

Bob brushed off the question, his mind immediately jumping to the image of Frank as he had last seen him. There was a tone of gratitude in his voice at seeing Frank so carefree, as he said:

“How do you feel, old man?”

“How are you feeling, old man?”

“Never better,” confessed Frank. “Sleep is certainly the right medicine, isn’t it?”

“Never better,” admitted Frank. “Sleep is definitely the best remedy, right?”

“Don’t I know it!”

"Tell me about it!"

Bob yawned luxuriously, and rubbed his eyes.

Bob yawned deeply and rubbed his eyes.

“Come on, Bob, let’s take a plunge in the channel. Just got up myself. It’ll wake us up, make us feel good. Everybody’s up now, and Dick fixing to get breakfast. He and Art and MacDonald are fishing. Mr. Hampton and Farnum are talking things over. And here comes Jack, just piled out of the feathers, too. The three of us can have a fine swim.”

“Come on, Bob, let’s dive into the channel. I just got up, too. It’ll wake us up and make us feel great. Everyone’s up now, and Dick is getting breakfast ready. He, Art, and MacDonald are fishing. Mr. Hampton and Farnum are discussing things. And here comes Jack, just getting out of bed as well. The three of us can have a nice swim.”

Bob was agreeable to this proposition, and they set out for the place where Frank and Jack had gone in for a plunge before. Without referring to the tragic little mound beneath which lay the bodies of the four half-breeds shot down by Frank and Jack, the boys, as if by common consent, lay their course through the trees so as to avoid passing near it. 129

Bob was okay with this suggestion, and they headed to the spot where Frank and Jack had gone for a swim before. Without mentioning the sad little mound where the bodies of the four half-breeds shot by Frank and Jack were buried, the boys, almost as if they had decided together, made their way through the trees to steer clear of it. 129

The water, as Frank had predicted, was delightfully invigorating, and refreshed and with the young blood tingling in their veins, after a long sleep and a good swim, they returned to camp. They brought voracious appetites with them, but fortunately the fishermen had pulled in a big haul of beauties, and these, together with flapjacks made by that skillful chef, Art, and washed down with coffee tasting like none ever made in city restaurants, the whole having the tang of the outdoors and woodland smoke for sauce, made a delectable repast.

The water, just as Frank had predicted, was wonderfully refreshing, and with the youthful energy buzzing in their veins after a long sleep and a good swim, they headed back to camp. They returned with huge appetites, but luckily the fishermen had caught a lot of amazing fish, and these, along with fluffy pancakes made by the talented chef Art, and coffee that tasted unlike anything served in city restaurants—all infused with the flavor of the outdoors and a hint of campfire smoke—created a delicious meal.

“Now,” said Mr. Hampton, at its conclusion, “now for a discussion of what’s to be done.”

“Okay,” said Mr. Hampton, when he finished, “now let’s talk about what we need to do.”

Thereupon he set forth the facts of the situation. Lupo with five or six men at most was still at large. He might have turned back. He might be in hiding nearby. He might have gone on ahead in search of Thorwaldsson. In any case, Mr. Hampton declared, he felt it would be a waste of time to search for him in view of the fact that they had learned Thorwaldsson was somewhere to the north and east and their primary object was to join forces with that explorer. He wanted to know what the others had to say.

Thereafter, he laid out the details of the situation. Lupo, with five or six men at most, was still on the loose. He might have turned back. He might be hiding nearby. He could have moved ahead in search of Thorwaldsson. In any case, Mr. Hampton stated that he believed it would be pointless to search for him, considering they had learned that Thorwaldsson was somewhere to the north and east, and their main goal was to team up with that explorer. He wanted to hear what the others thought.

Farnum, who had been talking matters over with Mr. Hampton, sat silent, nodding approval. The other was stating his own views. But MacDonald voiced a protest. 130

Farnum, who had been discussing things with Mr. Hampton, sat quietly, nodding in agreement. Mr. Hampton was sharing his thoughts. But MacDonald disagreed. 130

“From your point of view, sir,” he said, “I reckon you’re right. But am I to let Lupo escape now that I come so close to gettin’ him? And what am I to do with three prisoners on my hands?”

“From your perspective, sir,” he said, “I guess you’re right. But should I really let Lupo get away now that I’m so close to catching him? And what am I supposed to do with three prisoners on my hands?”

“I’ve been turning that phase of the situation over and over,” said Mr. Hampton. “I cannot see that we can afford to diverge in pursuit of Lupo, now that we have pretty definite information through that fellow, Long Tom, of Thorwaldsson’s presence alive and with some of his men in this wilderness. I know what a blow it will be to you to give up the chase, but it can’t be helped. You have three prisoners, and can’t very well watch them and pursue Lupo, too. They are criminals, and as a member of the Mounted you must take them in. We can’t leave you to handle them alone, however, and——”

“I’ve been thinking about this situation a lot,” said Mr. Hampton. “I don’t think we can afford to go after Lupo now that we have pretty clear information from that guy, Long Tom, about Thorwaldsson being alive and with some of his men out in this wilderness. I know it’ll be tough for you to give up the chase, but there’s no other choice. You have three prisoners, and it’s hard to keep an eye on them while also chasing Lupo. They’re criminals, and as a member of the Mounted, you have to take them in. We can’t leave you to deal with them on your own, though, and——”

He paused.

He took a break.

“And what, sir,” prompted MacDonald.

“And what, sir,” asked MacDonald.

“Well, the least we can do, MacDonald, is to leave one of our number with you. That will enable you to keep guard against surprise, watch over your prisoners, and wait for the arrival of aid from your Post. We’ll wireless your Captain Jameson full details of all that has occurred, give him your position here, and then you can wait for relief.”

“Well, the least we can do, MacDonald, is leave one of us with you. That way, you can keep watch for any surprises, oversee your prisoners, and wait for help from your Post. We’ll send your Captain Jameson all the details of what’s happened, inform him of your current location, and then you can wait for assistance.”

MacDonald looked thoughtful. He was silent several minutes, while none spoke, but all watched him expectantly. 131

MacDonald seemed deep in thought. He was quiet for several minutes, while no one spoke, but everyone watched him eagerly. 131

“If you won’t help me try and round up Lupo, you won’t, and that’s all there is to it,” he said, finally. “Not as I blame you, neither. You got your job, to git hold of Thorwaldsson and help him. With only a handful o’ men he may be in trouble, too. Seems natural-like, if whoever is agin you fellows sent this cutthroat Lupo to cut you off, he’d likely be after Thorwaldsson, too.”

“If you won’t help me try to track down Lupo, you won’t, and that’s just how it is,” he said at last. “Not that I blame you. You’ve got your job to capture Thorwaldsson and assist him. With only a few men, he could be in trouble, too. It makes sense that if whoever is against you guys sent this killer Lupo to take you out, he’d probably be going after Thorwaldsson as well.”

Mr. Hampton nodded.

Mr. Hampton agreed.

“That’s what I’m afraid of,” he said, “that Thorwaldsson may need our aid.”

"That's what I worry about," he said, "that Thorwaldsson might need our help."

“Just so,” continued MacDonald. “Such bein’ the case, your best plan is to try and find him soon as you can.”

“Exactly,” MacDonald continued. “Given that, your best bet is to try to find him as soon as you can.”

“Then you agree to my plan?”

“Then you agree with my plan?”

“Not so fast,” said MacDonald. “You’ll give me a man, hey?”

“Not so fast,” said MacDonald. “You’ll give me a guy, right?”

“Yes.”

"Yeah."

“Who?”

"Who’s that?"

“Why—I——”

“Why—I—”

“Give me this feller,” said MacDonald, laying a hand on Bob who sat beside him. “He’s a fighter.”

“Give me this guy,” said MacDonald, putting a hand on Bob who was sitting next to him. “He’s a fighter.”

“I couldn’t do that, MacDonald. The boys must come with me.”

“I can't do that, MacDonald. The boys need to come with me.”

“All right. Only that fight he put up—that was a good one. Kind o’ wished I could have him by me. Well, then, let me have this feller. Kin see 132 he’s used to big woods and river country. He’d make a good Mounty.”

“All right. That fight he put up—that was impressive. I kind of wish I could have him with me. Well then, let me have this guy. I can see he’s used to the big woods and river country. He’d make a great Mounty.”

This time MacDonald pointed the stem of his pipe at Dick.

This time, MacDonald directed the stem of his pipe at Dick.

“What do you say, Dick?” asked Mr. Hampton. “It’s up to you?”

“What do you think, Dick?” asked Mr. Hampton. “It’s your call?”

“I’d have to go out with the Mounties to their Post, wouldn’t I? Probably have to winter there.”

“I guess I’d have to go out with the Mounties to their Post, right? I’d probably have to spend the winter there.”

MacDonald nodded.

MacDonald nodded.

“Get you a job on the Force,” he said.

“Get yourself a job on the Force,” he said.

Dick’s eyes shone. Middle-aged though he was, he was alone in life, loved the wilderness, and still thrilled to adventure.

Dick’s eyes sparkled. Even though he was middle-aged, he was alone in life, loved the outdoors, and still got excited by adventure.

“That so?” he asked. “Need men?”

“That so?” he asked. “Need guys?”

“Always room for a good one.”

“There's always space for a good one.”

“All right. It’s a go,” said Dick.

“All right. Let’s do this,” said Dick.

MacDonald nodded approval, spat in the fire, then turned again to Mr. Hampton.

MacDonald nodded in agreement, spat into the fire, and then turned back to Mr. Hampton.

“Such being the case,” he said, “when you talk to Captain Jameson over that there contraption, just tell him I’m on my way in.”

“Since that’s the case,” he said, “when you talk to Captain Jameson about that gadget, just let him know I’m on my way in.”

“What?”

"What did you say?"

“Sure. Think Dick and me would sit here with three no-account breeds on our hands and wait for help from four hundred miles away to arrive? No. We’ll take ’em in.”

“Sure. Do you think Dick and I would just sit here with three useless people on our hands and wait for help from four hundred miles away to show up? No. We’ll take them in.”

“But two of you, alone, and with three prisoners on your hands!” 133

“But two of you, by yourselves, and with three prisoners to deal with!” 133

“Nothing to that. Once I brought in four single-handed. Never thought of calling for help except I had luck enough to capture Lupo and more of his gang.”

“Nothing to it. Once, I took in four all by myself. Never thought about asking for help until I was lucky enough to catch Lupo and some of his crew.”

Mr. Hampton looked astounded. He turned to Dick.

Mr. Hampton looked shocked. He turned to Dick.

“But how about you, Dick?”

“But what about you, Dick?”

“If MacDonald says so, I’m game.”

“If MacDonald says so, I’m in.”

“Knew you would be,” said MacDonald. “That’s settled. Now call Captain Jameson, and let’s get goin’. You want to be on your way, and we may as well be on ours.”

“Knew you would be,” said MacDonald. “That’s settled. Now call Captain Jameson, and let’s get going. You want to be on your way, and we might as well be on ours.”

“But, MacDonald,” said Mr. Hampton, trying one last protest, “suppose Lupo and the remainder of his gang see you start, and follow and attack you. What then?”

“But, MacDonald,” Mr. Hampton said, making one last attempt to protest, “what if Lupo and the rest of his gang see you leave, follow you, and attack? Then what?”

“Huh.” MacDonald’s eyes snapped. “Couldn’t ask for no better luck. I’d get a shot at him then.”

“Huh.” MacDonald’s eyes widened. “I couldn’t ask for better luck. I’d get a chance to go after him then.”

Farnum interrupted at this stage.

Farnum interrupted at this point.

“It’s no use trying to stop him and Dick,” he said. “I know Dick and I know these men of the Mounted. They’re holy terrors. And the pair of them will get away with it, too.”

“It’s pointless to try to stop him and Dick,” he said. “I know Dick, and I know these guys in the Mounted. They’re absolute nightmares. And the two of them will get away with it, too.”

Mr. Hampton knew when he was beaten, and abandoned his protests. Captain Jameson once more was called by wireless, and given a full account of what had occurred. He approved MacDonald’s 134 scheme and promised there would be a position on the Force for Dick when he arrived.

Mr. Hampton realized when he was outmatched and stopped his protests. Captain Jameson was contacted again by wireless, and he received a complete update on what had happened. He approved MacDonald’s 134 plan and assured that there would be a spot on the Force for Dick when he got there.

“Well, Dick,” said Mr. Hampton, after all arrangements were made for departure, and he led him aside, “I’ve been pleased, indeed, with your ready help and cheerfulness on the trip. I hate to part company with you. Here is a check for the full sum I promised you for this Summer’s work. And here in addition is something to remember me by.”

“Well, Dick,” said Mr. Hampton, after everything was set for departure, pulling him aside, “I’ve really appreciated your help and positive attitude on this trip. I hate to say goodbye. Here’s a check for the full amount I promised you for your work this summer. And here’s something extra to remember me by.”

Into Dick’s unwilling hand he pressed a handsome gold watch which he himself had worn for some years.

Into Dick’s hesitant hand, he pressed a nice gold watch that he had worn for a few years.

“Oh, Mr. Hampton, this is too good for a rough fellow like me to carry,” protested Dick.

“Oh, Mr. Hampton, this is too nice for a rough guy like me to carry,” protested Dick.

“Now, now, nonsense,” said Mr. Hampton. “Nothing is too good for you, old man. I want you to keep that to remember me by.”

“Come on, that's ridiculous,” said Mr. Hampton. “Nothing is too good for you, my friend. I want you to keep that to remember me by.”

“I don’t need the watch for that, sir,” said Dick gruffly, sticking it in his pocket nevertheless.

“I don’t need the watch for that, sir,” Dick said gruffly, but he still stuck it in his pocket.

135CHAPTER XVI.—REINDEER SIGHTED.

The big canoe which Dick and Art had captured from the Indians was turned over to MacDonald. It was easily capable of transporting five—the three prisoners, MacDonald and Dick. With the two latter in the bow and stern respectively, and the prisoners unarmed between, there was little danger so long as MacDonald and Dick maintained reasonable watchfulness. Two of the half-breeds were cowed and broken in spirit, moreover, while Long Tom was hors de combat on account of the injury to his arm, and would be for some time to come. MacDonald’s skin kayak was to be towed behind, containing his slender outfit, and one of the prisoners could carry the whole business alone at portages.

The big canoe that Dick and Art had taken from the Indians was handed over to MacDonald. It could easily carry five people—the three prisoners, MacDonald, and Dick. With the latter two in the bow and stern, and the unarmed prisoners in between, there was little risk as long as MacDonald and Dick stayed alert. Two of the half-breeds were intimidated and defeated in spirit, and Long Tom was out of commission due to his arm injury and would be for quite a while. MacDonald’s skin kayak was to be towed behind, carrying his lightweight gear, and one of the prisoners could handle everything by himself during portages.

MacDonald had entered the lake by a considerable stream flowing into it from the southwest, and not the stream down which the Hampton party had come. He set out for this other stream before the others quit the island, with the intention of retracing 136 his steps into the wilderness in large measure. This would facilitate his travel. Farther to the south, he said, was a large river which could be reached by a ten-mile portage, and down which they could travel for many miles.

MacDonald had entered the lake via a large stream that flowed into it from the southwest, not the stream that the Hampton party had taken. He headed for this different stream before the others left the island, planning to mostly retrace his steps into the wilderness. This would make his journey easier. Farther south, he mentioned, there was a big river that could be reached with a ten-mile portage, and they could travel many miles down it.

“If you ever want to join the Mounted,” he said to Bob, to whom he had taken a great fancy, “let me know. I’ll fix it for you.”

“If you ever want to join the Mounted,” he said to Bob, who he really liked, “just let me know. I’ll take care of it for you.”

Bob laughed, but he was young enough to be flattered by the sincere compliment.

Bob laughed, but he was young enough to feel flattered by the genuine compliment.

“I may take you up on that some day,” he said. “Who knows?”

“I might take you up on that someday,” he said. “Who knows?”

Then MacDonald stepped into the canoe, goodbyes were said, and the craft shot away.

Then MacDonald got into the canoe, goodbyes were exchanged, and the boat took off.

“There go a couple of good men,” commented Farnum, as under the powerful strokes of the paddles the canoe drew swiftly down the lake.

“There go a couple of good guys,” remarked Farnum, as the canoe quickly glided down the lake with the strong strokes of the paddles.

“One good man, anyhow,” said Art, who overheard the observation. “Ol’ Dick an’ me had a li’l talk. I’m going to join up with the Mounted, too, when we git back. We been pals fifteen year.”

“One good man, anyway,” said Art, who overheard the comment. “Old Dick and I had a little chat. I’m going to join the Mounted too when we get back. We’ve been buddies for fifteen years.”

“Fifteen years,” exclaimed Frank. “In the wilderness all that time?”

“Fifteen years,” Frank said, surprised. “In the wild the whole time?”

Art nodded absently, his eyes on the retreating canoe.

Art nodded absentmindedly, his gaze fixed on the fading canoe.

“Sure,” said Art. “It’s home to us. Ain’t no wilderness. Cities is the real wilderness. Dick an’ me’s been separated now and then, like now, but we 137 always come together agin. I expect when we git to be old men like some prospectors I seen we’ll be together all the time, fightin’ and jawin’ each other, but ready to tear the heart out o’ anybody that jumps one of us.”

“Sure,” said Art. “This is home for us. This isn’t a wilderness. Cities are the real wilderness. Dick and I have been separated now and then, like right now, but we always come back together. I expect when we get to be old men like some prospectors I’ve seen, we’ll be together all the time, arguing and bickering with each other, but ready to defend each other fiercely against anyone who messes with one of us.”

“It’s a wonder Dick went off with MacDonald like he did, in that case,” said Jack.

“It’s surprising that Dick went off with MacDonald like that,” said Jack.

“Huh. Somebody had to go. He knew we’d meet agin.”

“Huh. Someone had to leave. He knew we’d meet again.”

Art said no more, but turned away to busy himself with the outfit.

Art said nothing else but turned away to focus on the outfit.

Presently everything was in readiness for departure and then the two remaining canoes, with the outfit distributed between them, the three boys in one and the three men in the other, started up the lake in the opposite direction from that taken by MacDonald and Dick. Previously, when in pursuit of Lupo, Mr. Hampton had discovered the lake was of so considerable extent that, despite their hours of travel up the side, they had been unable to discern the farther end. In fact, the lake broadened out considerably some distance beyond the island. It was his intention, inasmuch as it followed the general northeastward direction they would pursue, to stick to it as long as possible. He believed there would be some stream at the farther end sufficiently large to float their canoes.

Right now, everything was set for departure, and the two remaining canoes, with their supplies divided between them—three boys in one and three men in the other—headed across the lake in the opposite direction from where MacDonald and Dick had gone. Earlier, while tracking Lupo, Mr. Hampton had discovered that the lake was so vast that, despite hours of traveling along its side, they hadn’t been able to see the far end. In fact, the lake widened significantly some distance beyond the island. His plan was, since it followed the general northeast direction they intended to take, to stay on it as long as possible. He believed there would be a stream at the far end large enough to carry their canoes.

In this he was not mistaken, for after four hours 138 of steady paddling, they discerned the outlet of a stream of considerable width, quartered across the lake and entered it. Almost immediately Jack called to his father, in surprise:

In this, he was right, because after four hours 138 of constant paddling, they spotted the mouth of a wide stream that cut across the lake and went into it. Almost right away, Jack shouted to his dad in surprise:

“Dad! Oh, Dad! This stream flows out of the lake; not into it. Do you notice?”

“Dad! Oh, Dad! This stream flows out of the lake, not into it. Do you see?”

The leading canoe slowed up while the boys approached.

The front canoe slowed down as the boys came closer.

“It certainly does, Jack,” said his father. “What do you make of it, Farnum?”

“It definitely does, Jack,” said his dad. “What do you think of it, Farnum?”

The latter shook his head, puzzled.

The latter shook his head, confused.

“I don’t know,” he said. “You must remember this is unexplored country. We’re liable to find anything here. But, maybe——”

“I don’t know,” he said. “You have to remember this is uncharted territory. We could come across anything here. But, maybe——”

“What?”

“What’s up?”

“I don’t know. We’re near the Coppermine, aren’t we, Art?”

“I don’t know. We’re close to the Coppermine, right, Art?”

“Figure we must be.”

"Guess we have to be."

“Maybe this stream flows into the Coppermine.”

“Maybe this stream leads into the Coppermine.”

“I’ll bet that’s it,” Art approved. “The waters of that lake empty into the Coppermine. Yes, sir; I’ll bet that’s what it is. Well, that makes travel easy for awhile, anyhow.”

“I’ll bet that’s it,” Art said approvingly. “The waters of that lake flow into the Coppermine. Yes, indeed; I bet that’s what it is. Well, that makes travel easy for a bit, anyway.”

Two days of travel, unbroken by any but routine incidents such as the occasional shooting of wild duck Or geese, brought the party at camping time at the end of the second day to a pleasant, open, grassy 139 prairie between two low-wooded hills. Here it was decided to make camp.

Two days of travel, interrupted only by routine events like the occasional shooting of wild ducks or geese, led the group to a nice, open, grassy prairie between two low wooded hills by the end of the second day. It was here that they decided to set up camp.

After the evening meal was over, and while Mr. Hampton, who was feeling out of sorts, retired to his little tent to try and sleep without taking part in the usual desultory conversation about the fire—which was kept going for the companionship and cheer it imparted and not from any need of warmth you may be sure—Jack arose and stretched.

After dinner was done, Mr. Hampton, feeling a bit off, went to his small tent to try and sleep instead of joining the usual scattered conversation around the fire, which was kept going for the company and good vibes, not out of any real need for warmth, you can be sure. Jack got up and stretched.

“My legs are stiff from that position in the canoe all day,” he said. “I want to stretch them a bit. Who’ll come with me to the top of that nearest hill? The sun is pretty low, but we ought to get a considerable view.”

“My legs are stiff from sitting in the canoe all day,” he said. “I want to stretch them a bit. Who wants to join me at the top of that nearby hill? The sun is pretty low, but we should still be able to get a good view.”

Bob and Frank both volunteered to accompany him. Farnum sat, smoking his pipe and staring into the fire absently. He didn’t care to go. But Art arose and joined the party. It was not far to the top of the hill, although a stiff climb through the trees and brush. The crest, however, was bare of timber.

Bob and Frank both volunteered to go with him. Farnum sat, smoking his pipe and staring absentmindedly into the fire. He didn’t feel like going. But Art got up and joined the group. It wasn't far to the top of the hill, though it was a tough climb through the trees and brush. The top, however, was free of trees.

Frank, who lighter than the others, was first to reach the top, stood struck with amazement. He turned to beckon the others forward with one hand, while laying the other over his mouth in a gesture enjoining silence.

Frank, who was lighter than the others, was the first to reach the top and stood there in awe. He turned to wave the others forward with one hand while pressing the other over his mouth in a gesture that urged silence.

“For the love o’ Pete,” whispered Art, eyes bulging, as he stood beside Frank and peered down into 140 the grassy vale beyond, half overgrown with young willows.

“For the love of Pete,” whispered Art, eyes wide open, as he stood next to Frank and looked down into 140 the grassy valley below, which was partly overgrown with young willows.

“Are they caribou?” asked Jack, low-voiced. “They don’t look like the caribou we’ve run across along the streams.”

“Are those caribou?” Jack asked quietly. “They don’t look like the caribou we’ve seen along the streams.”

“They ain’t, neither,” said Art. “They’re reindeer.”

“They're not, either,” said Art. “They're reindeer.”

“Must be Santy Claus’s,” chuckled Bob. “Always did believe there was something to that story about the old boy living up here near the North Pole, even though people insisted on calling it a fairy tale. Now I know.”

“Must be Santa Claus’s,” laughed Bob. “I always thought there was some truth to that story about the old guy living up here near the North Pole, even though people kept calling it a fairy tale. Now I know.”

His joke was ignored, however, as Art continued:

His joke was overlooked, though, as Art went on:

“Yes, sir, reindeer. Caribou are always brown. Some o’ these are white, some brown, and some spotted. Then they ain’t the size o’ caribou. Besides, I know they’re reindeer. I see ’em often enough in Alaska to know.”

“Yes, sir, reindeer. Caribou are always brown. Some of these are white, some brown, and some spotted. They aren’t the size of caribou. Besides, I know they’re reindeer. I see them often enough in Alaska to know.”

“Alaska? Do these reindeer come from there?”

“Alaska? Do these reindeer come from there?”

Art nodded.

Art agreed.

“Look at ’em. They’re tame. Must’a winded us, but that don’t scare ’em none. They’re used to humans. No more scared o’ bein’ hunted than cattle are back in the States.”

“Look at them. They’re calm. They must’ve caught our scent, but that doesn’t bother them at all. They’re used to people. They’re not any more afraid of being hunted than cattle are back in the States.”

“Tame?” queried Frank. “What do you mean?”

“Tame?” Frank asked. “What do you mean?”

“Why, the Eskimos in Alaska, not the wild one, of this Far North, but the regular ones that come in touch with the white man, they keep herds o’ reindeer 141 just like a farmer in the States keeps cows. Look at ’em. Must be two-three hundred there right now. They’re eight-ten hundred miles from home, too. Must ’a wandered away. Bet you there’s a desprit Eskimo lookin’ for ’em right now.”

“Look, the Eskimos in Alaska, not the wild ones from the Far North, but the regular ones who interact with white people, they have herds of reindeer 141 just like farmers in the States keep cows. Check them out. There must be two or three hundred of them right now. They’re eight or ten hundred miles from home, too. They must have wandered away. I bet there’s a desperate Eskimo looking for them right now.”

Jack looked thoughtful.

Jack seemed pensive.

“What a shame for a man to lose a big herd like that,” he said.

“What a shame for a guy to lose such a big herd,” he said.

“Yes, sir,” affirmed Art emphatically. “Must be six-seven thousand dollars worth o’ tame reindeer there. Pretty tough.”

“Yes, sir,” Art confirmed strongly. “There must be six or seven thousand dollars’ worth of tame reindeer there. That’s pretty rough.”

“We can’t do anything about it, though,” said Bob.

“We can’t do anything about it, though,” Bob said.

“Seems a pity-like we can’t ride herd on ’em till some Eskimo shows up to claim ’em,” said Art. “But it can’t be done. Yore father, Jack, is all for pushin’ on fast as we kin.”

“Seems like a shame we can’t keep an eye on them until some Eskimo shows up to claim them,” Art said. “But that’s not possible. Your father, Jack, is all for moving on as quickly as we can.”

After some further discussion, the party retraced its steps, with Art explaining to the boys the big difference existing between the semi-civilized Eskimos of Alaska and the little that was known of the wild Eskimos of the Arctic.

After some more discussion, the group backtracked, with Art explaining to the boys the significant difference between the semi-civilized Eskimos of Alaska and what little was known about the wild Eskimos of the Arctic.

“Folks think Alaska’s right up next to the North Pole,” he said. “Leastways folks in the States do. People comin’ to Nome from the States every so often give me that knowledge. But they’re shore mistaken. Alaska’s great country that’ll be settled up some day. Shore, we got hard Winters. But 142 boys, in the Summer, with the sun a-shinin’ all the time, everything grows just three times as fast as in the States. My Pap was a farmer back in York State, an’ I was raised on a farm. We had hard scratchin’ an’ our Winters was long an’ hard, too. An’ we didn’t have Summers like in Alaska to make up for ’em. I’ll bet if my Pap were livin’ today an’ farmin’ in Alaska he’d find life a lot easier than what we had it on the old farm.”

“People think Alaska is right next to the North Pole,” he said. “At least, that’s what folks in the States think. People coming to Nome from the States sometimes share that thought with me. But they’re really mistaken. Alaska is a vast land that will eventually be settled. Sure, we have tough winters. But 142 guys, in the summer, with the sun shining all the time, everything grows three times faster than in the States. My dad was a farmer back in New York, and I was raised on a farm. We had it pretty rough, and our winters were long and hard too. And we didn’t have summers like they do in Alaska to balance things out. I bet if my dad were alive today and farming in Alaska, he’d find life a lot easier than it was on the old farm.”

“But why don’t more people live in Alaska, then?” asked Frank.

“But why don’t more people live in Alaska, then?” Frank asked.

“Oh, I don’t know. Hard to get to, for one thing. Ain’t developed up with railroads, neither. Some day, though, you’ll see ’em forced to come here, the way they’re a-crowdin’ up down in the States. Why, we got only 60,000 people in all Alaska, yet she’s quarter as big as the States an’ could darn near feed the whole push herself, if she was put to it and farmed right.”

“Oh, I don’t know. It’s hard to get to, for one thing. There aren’t any railroads built here either. Someday, though, you’ll see them have to come here, the way they’re crowding down in the States. I mean, we have only 60,000 people in all of Alaska, yet it’s about a quarter the size of the States and could almost feed the whole crowd itself if it were developed and farmed properly.”

“Art, why don’t you go to farming? I’d think that would be the thing for you to do.”

“Art, why don’t you try farming? I think that would be perfect for you.”

“Mebbe I will some day,” said Art. “But I’m an old batch. Got no wife, an’ kind o’ like to feel free to knock around instead o’ bein’ tied to one place.”

“Might be I will someday,” said Art. “But I’m an old bachelor. I have no wife, and I kind of like feeling free to wander around instead of being tied down to one place.”

It was a feeling with which the boys could sympathize. They were young, with life ahead of them, and they wanted to see the world. In fact they 143 had seen a good deal of it already, as those who have followed them through their various adventures, know. Of this they spoke as they made their way back to camp, where they discovered Farnum ready to turn in, and merely awaiting their return before doing so. Since their first encounter with Lupo, and their discovery that they were not alone in the wilderness, a watch was always kept, and Farnum had combatted sleepiness in order to keep guard until their return.

It was a feeling the boys could relate to. They were young, with their whole lives ahead of them, and they wanted to explore the world. In fact, they had already seen quite a bit of it, as those who have followed them through their various adventures know. They talked about this as they made their way back to camp, where they found Farnum ready to go to sleep, just waiting for their return before he turned in. Ever since their first encounter with Lupo and realizing they weren't alone in the wilderness, they always kept a watch. Farnum had fought off sleepiness to stay on guard until they came back.

“Art, you’ve got the first watch,” he said, when they appeared. “The rest of you better turn in, and not sit up talking. With luck we ought to make the Coppermine tomorrow, I figure, and then we’ll do some traveling. We’ve got to hit a fast pace from now on, for already we are having real twilight, and pretty soon we’ll be having short nights while the sun dips entirely below the horizon. That means the season is growing short, and we have not got much time left before we’ll have to start for the outside.”

“Art, you’re on the first watch,” he said when they showed up. “The rest of you should turn in and not stay up talking. If all goes well, we should reach the Coppermine tomorrow, and then we can start moving. We need to pick up the pace from here on out, because it’s getting really twilight already, and soon we’ll experience shorter nights as the sun completely sets below the horizon. That means the season is getting short, and we don’t have much time left before we have to head back to the outside.”

Jack and Bob heeded the injunction and followed Farnum’s example shortly, but Frank, who did not feel sleepy and, moreover, loved to talk, sat up a considerable time gossiping with Art and telling him of some of their previous adventures.

Jack and Bob listened to the advice and soon followed Farnum's example, but Frank, who wasn't feeling sleepy and loved to chat, stayed up for quite a while catching up with Art and sharing stories about some of their past adventures.

Suddenly, as he talked along, low-voiced so as 144 not disturb the nearby sleepers, Frank noticed Art was not paying attention, and stopped.

Suddenly, while he was speaking quietly so he wouldn't wake the people nearby, Frank noticed that Art wasn't paying attention and stopped.

“Oh, well,” he said, half petulantly, “if I’m boring you——”

“Oh, well,” he said, sounding a bit annoyed, “if I’m boring you——”

Art leaned close, and laid a hand on his arm.

Art leaned in close and placed a hand on his arm.

“Sorry, Frank,” he said, in a whisper, “but I was a-listenin.’ I got a strange feelin’ like as if somebody had his eyes on the back a’ my head. I wasn’t payin’ no attention to you but a-listenin’ to see if I could hear anything.”

“Sorry, Frank,” he said softly, “but I was listening. I got this strange feeling like someone had their eyes on the back of my head. I wasn’t paying attention to you, just trying to see if I could hear anything.”

He was so intense that he communicated some of his trepidation to Frank. Instinctively, the latter reached for his rifle as Art half stood up to peer at their twilit surroundings. They were camped in a tiny grove of a half dozen spruces, like an islet in a midst of long, matted grass.

He was so intense that he conveyed some of his anxiety to Frank. Instinctively, Frank grabbed his rifle as Art half stood up to look at their dim surroundings. They were camping in a small grove of half a dozen spruces, like an island in a sea of long, tangled grass.

As Art stood up, a single shot rang out, shattering the stillness. He threw himself prone, dragging Frank down with him. Then a fusillade was poured in on them, seemingly from all sides.

As Art got up, a single shot broke the silence. He dropped to the ground, pulling Frank down with him. Then a barrage of shots came at them, apparently from every direction.

145CHAPTER XVII.—SURPRISED.

“Watch my back, Frank. Keep low behind that nearest tree and let ’em have it. They’re in that long grass.”

“Watch my back, Frank. Stay low behind that nearest tree and let them have it. They’re in that tall grass.”

As he spoke Art, worming his way rapidly forward to a position behind the trunk of one of the spruces, began firing rapidly.

As he spoke, Art quickly maneuvered to a spot behind the trunk of one of the spruces and started shooting rapidly.

Frank, in the opposite direction, fired several shots into the long grass. He had an uncanny feeling, for he could see no forms at which to fire, and the preliminary volley poured into the camp was not repeated, so he had no index as to the enemy positions.

Frank, in the opposite direction, fired several shots into the tall grass. He felt a strange sense of unease, as he couldn't see any targets to aim at, and since the initial gunfire into the camp wasn't repeated, he had no way of knowing where the enemy was positioned.

Jack, Bob and Farnum, rolled over, awakened by the shots, but Frank called fiercely: “Keep down.”

Jack, Bob, and Farnum rolled over, waking up from the shots, but Frank shouted sharply, “Stay down.”

Realizing something of the situation, the three grabbed their rifles, laying by their sides, and, keeping down, prepared to fire as soon as they could see something at which to aim. 146

Understanding the situation, the three picked up their rifles, which were resting by their sides, and crouched down, ready to shoot as soon as they spotted a target. 146

Mr. Hampton stirred in his tent a moment later. He had been sleeping hard, and had not awakened instantly as had the others. Moreover, a dull ache gripped his head, preventing him from thinking clearly and from comprehending instantly what was occurring. He lay a moment, wondering what had awakened him. All was still outside, for Frank and Art had ceased firing to await some sign from the unseen enemy. Mr. Hampton decided to peer out and investigate what had disturbed him. He crawled from his dog tent and stood up.

Mr. Hampton stirred in his tent a moment later. He had been sleeping deeply and didn't wake up as quickly as the others. Plus, a dull pain gripped his head, making it hard for him to think clearly and understand what was happening right away. He lay there for a moment, trying to figure out what had woken him. Everything outside was quiet since Frank and Art had stopped shooting to wait for a sign from the hidden enemy. Mr. Hampton decided to peek outside and see what had disturbed him. He crawled out of his small tent and stood up.

At his appearance, a ragged volley burst once more from the long grass surrounding the tiny grove, for his figure stood forth clearly and made an excellent target. Spinning about, Mr. Hampton fell heavily to the ground.

At his arrival, a rough burst of shots erupted again from the tall grass around the small grove, as his figure was clearly visible and made a perfect target. Turning quickly, Mr. Hampton collapsed heavily to the ground.

A wild yell of triumph went up at this indication that the leader had been hit. Jack leaped up regardless of consequences and ran to his father, dragging him into the tent, while bullets whipped around him. Bob ran to his assistance. To the hidden enemy it must have seemed as if their opponents were demoralized. At any rate, they grew more courageous, and started a rush.

A loud cheer erupted at the news that the leader had been hit. Jack jumped up without thinking about the risks and ran to his father, pulling him into the tent while bullets whizzed by. Bob rushed to help him. To the hidden enemy, it must have looked like their opponents were falling apart. In any case, they became bolder and launched an attack.

From three sides, it came, the figures of the oncoming men only partially seen as they crouched low and darted through the grass. But the long stems waving above them marked their paths, and 147 there were three still on watch who would have to be dealt with.

From three sides, it approached, the figures of the incoming men only partially visible as they crouched low and darted through the grass. But the long stems swaying above them marked their paths, and 147 there were still three on watch who would need to be handled.

Frank, Art and Farnum marked where the waving grass indicated the enemy. Each guarded a side of the little grove. On the fourth side lay the stream.

Frank, Art, and Farnum noted where the waving grass showed the enemy's position. Each one kept watch on a side of the small grove. The stream bordered the fourth side.

“Wait’ll they’re close, fellows, then give it to ’em,” cautioned Farnum. “Ready. Let’s go.”

“Wait until they’re close, guys, then take your shot,” Farnum warned. “Get ready. Let’s move.”

The three repeating rifles spoke as one, and from the long grass came howls and shrieks of pain and terror. What followed was brief but lively. Each of the three pumped his rifle as fast as possible, and the bullets poured into the grass almost as fast as if sprayed from the throat of a machine gun. The return fire was heavy but high, whipping through the branches of the spruce trees overhead.

The three repeating rifles fired in unison, and from the tall grass came cries and screams of pain and fear. What happened next was quick but intense. Each of the three guys reloaded their rifles as quickly as they could, and the bullets rained into the grass almost as fast as if they were coming from a machine gun. The return fire was intense but high, whipping through the branches of the spruce trees above.

Reinforcements added to the strength of the defenders, for Bob darted out of the tent, crouched over, and flung himself beside Frank, beginning to shoot even as he talked.

Reinforcements boosted the defenders' strength, as Bob rushed out of the tent, hunched over, and threw himself next to Frank, starting to shoot while he talked.

“Mr. Hampton escaped by a miracle,” he said. “Bullet creased his head and stunted him. He’ll be all right.”

“Mr. Hampton got away by a miracle,” he said. “A bullet skimmed his head and knocked him down. He’ll be fine.”

The rush was broken. Whoever was in the grass, feared to advance farther in the face of that fire. The long grass ceased to wave, indicating the attackers had come to a halt. But they did not retreat. The menace was still there. 148

The rush was stopped. Whoever was in the grass was too scared to move forward with that fire around. The tall grass stopped swaying, showing that the attackers had paused. But they didn’t back down. The threat was still present. 148

“Anybody hit?” Farnum called out.

"Anyone hurt?" Farnum called out.

“Not me,” said Art.

“Not me,” Art said.

“Nor me,” answered Frank.

“Me neither,” answered Frank.

“Thank our lucky stars for that,” answered Farnum.

“Thank our lucky stars for that,” Farnum replied.

They all lay in a semi-circle, facing different directions, but close enough to each other to make communication in ordinary tones possible. Relieved to discover that all were untouched, despite the bullets that had rained on the camp, Farnum next inquired anxiously after Mr. Hampton, and Bob answered he had been only stunned.

They all lay in a semi-circle, facing different directions, but close enough to each other to talk in regular voices. They were relieved to find that everyone was unharmed, despite the bullets that had fallen on the camp. Farnum then asked anxiously about Mr. Hampton, and Bob replied that he had just been stunned.

“I reckon these fellows are Lupo and his gang,” Farnum remarked. “But he must have had more men than we expected, or he wouldn’t be attacking us like this.”

“I think these guys are Lupo and his crew,” Farnum said. “But he must have had more men than we thought, or he wouldn’t be coming at us like this.”

“What’ll we do?” growled Art. “Looks like they got us penned in.”

“What are we going to do?” Art growled. “Looks like they’ve got us cornered.”

“Oh, but we stopped their rush,” protested Frank.

“Oh, but we stopped them from rushing,” protested Frank.

“Yes,” said Art, “but they ain’t beatin’ it as I can see. An’ when we want to up an’ leave camp, what’s goin’ to happen?”

“Yes,” said Art, “but they’re not handling it as far as I can tell. And when we want to pack up and leave camp, what’s going to happen?”

Frank was about to reply, when Bob who was beside him, pointed with his rifle toward the gap between the two hills, from the top of one of which they earlier had seen the reindeer herd in the next valley. 149

Frank was about to respond when Bob, who was next to him, pointed his rifle at the space between the two hills. From the top of one of those hills, they had previously spotted the reindeer herd in the next valley. 149

“Look there, Frank,” he exclaimed excitedly. “What do you make of that?”

“Look over there, Frank,” he said with excitement. “What do you think about that?”

“Where? I don’t——Oh, yes; now I see. Something moving.”

“Where? I don’t——Oh, yeah; now I see. Something is moving.”

“Sure is something moving,” Bob said.

“Sure is something moving,” Bob said.

Already the short twilight was beginning to lighten, as the sun after its dip to the edge of the northern horizon now swung higher.

Already, the short twilight was starting to brighten, as the sun, after dipping to the edge of the northern horizon, was now rising higher.

“Bob.”

"Bob."

“What?”

"Wait, what?"

“I believe that’s the reindeer herd.”

“I think that’s the herd of reindeer.”

“From that valley over the hill? The reindeer we saw when we were up there on the hill top?”

“From that valley over the hill? The reindeer we saw when we were up there on the hilltop?”

“Yes, sir.”

“Sure thing.”

“But how in the world?”

“But how on earth?”

“Why, I noticed that the other valley swung around between those two little hills. The reindeer are just grazing along, hunting new pasture. And, say, Bob!”

“Hey, I saw that the other valley curves between those two small hills. The reindeer are just grazing, searching for new grass. And, hey, Bob!”

“Well, what now?”

"Okay, what now?"

“I’ve got a bully idea.”

“I’ve got a great idea.”

Abruptly, Frank wormed his way around to face Art on his right, who was keeping watch against surprise on his side of the little clump of trees sheltering them.

Abruptly, Frank turned to face Art on his right, who was keeping an eye out for surprises on his side of the small cluster of trees protecting them.

“Art,” said he, “look over there, between those two little hills. Are those reindeer? The reindeer we saw from the hilltop?” 150

“Hey,” he said, “check it out over there, between those two small hills. Are those reindeer? The same reindeer we spotted from the hilltop?” 150

“Reckon so,” said Art, after a critical inspection.

“Yeah, I think so,” said Art, after a careful look.

“Well, Art, can reindeer be stampeded? Like cattle, I mean.”

“Well, Art, can you stampede reindeer? Like cattle, I mean.”

“Reckon so. Why?”

"Guess so. Why?"

“Well, I’m going to try it,” Frank declared in a determined tone. Still prone, he began to wriggle out of his clothes, and pulling up his legs, to unlace his boots and kick them off.

“Well, I’m going to give it a shot,” Frank said firmly. Still lying down, he started to squirm out of his clothes, pulling up his legs to loosen his boots and kick them off.

“Are you crazy, Frank?” Bob demanded, puzzled, while Art and Farnum took their eyes from the coverts ahead to look at Frank in astonishment.

“Are you out of your mind, Frank?” Bob asked, confused, while Art and Farnum turned their attention from the bushes ahead to look at Frank in shock.

“Crazy? No more than usual,” Frank replied, as he completed disrobing, and now lay naked under the spreading branches of the spruce. “But I’m going to slip into the water and float down to that hill, then get in behind the reindeer and stampede them. You see what’ll happen then, don’t you?”

“Crazy? Not any crazier than usual,” Frank replied, as he finished getting undressed and lay naked beneath the wide branches of the spruce. “But I’m going to jump into the water and float down to that hill, then sneak up behind the reindeer and scare them. You see what’s going to happen then, right?”

Bob stared at his companion, wide-eyed. Dawning comprehension crept into his eyes, and he began to smile. Then he chuckled.

Bob stared at his friend, wide-eyed. Gradually, understanding spread across his face, and he started to smile. Then he chuckled.

“You little hound,” he said, employing a pet expression among the boys, denoting admiration.

“You little rascal,” he said, using a term of endearment among the guys that showed admiration.

“But, say, what’s the idea?” demanded Art sharply, from his position several yards away.

“But, hey, what’s the point?” Art asked sharply from several yards away.

Frank had started wriggling forward, and waited until he was close to Art and Farnum before replying. Then he repeated his assertion that he intended floating downstream until behind the slow-moving 151 herd of reindeer, when he would land and attempt to stampede them.

Frank had started inching forward and waited until he was near Art and Farnum before replying. He then reiterated that he planned to float downstream until he was behind the slow-moving 151 herd of reindeer, at which point he would land and try to stampede them.

“You see how it is,” he said. “You yourselves admit that we’re in a tight place. Lupo’s forces have cover in that long grass, and can wait us out. Here among the trees there is no grass to hide us. The minute we get up and start to move around, we expose ourselves. Therefore, the best thing to do, is to drive them out of their cover, isn’t it?”

“You see how it is,” he said. “You all admit that we’re in a tough spot. Lupo’s forces are hidden in that tall grass and can wait for as long as they need. Here among the trees, there’s no grass to conceal us. The moment we start to get up and move around, we put ourselves at risk. So, the best thing to do is to flush them out of their hiding spot, right?”

“Sure,” said Art. “But how you going to do it with——”

“Sure,” said Art. “But how are you going to do it with——”

He was about to ask how Frank intended to drive their enemies from cover by stampeding the reindeer, but Frank grinned at him, and he paused. Dawning comprehension came into his eyes, too.

He was about to ask how Frank planned to drive their enemies out of hiding by stampeding the reindeer, but Frank grinned at him, and he hesitated. A look of understanding started to show in his eyes as well.

“That’s it,” Frank said. “I see you get my idea.”

“That’s it,” Frank said. “I see you understand my point.”

He turned his gaze toward Farnum, farthest from the center, but who had overheard the conversation.

He looked over at Farnum, who was the farthest from the center but had overheard the conversation.

“You see, Mr. Farnum,” he said, “when the reindeer come dashing down, Lupo’s men will have to run for it to get out of the way. A stampeding herd isn’t anything to monkey with, I expect. Then you’ll have your chance. But the reindeer won’t dash in among these few close-set trees, so you’ll be safe. No, sir; as I figure it, they’ll just head right on past here and try to get through the hills beyond.” 152

“You see, Mr. Farnum,” he said, “when the reindeer come charging down, Lupo’s men will have to run to get out of the way. A stampeding herd isn’t something to mess with, I’d say. Then you’ll have your chance. But the reindeer won’t run in among these few closely spaced trees, so you’ll be safe. No, sir; as I see it, they’ll just go right on past here and try to get through the hills beyond.” 152

Farnum’s glance approved.

Farnum gave an approving look.

“A fine idea,” he said, but then he added in a tone of doubt: “I don’t know as I ought to let you go, though. Mr. Hampton wouldn’t like it, maybe, putting yourself into danger like that.”

“A great idea,” he said, but then he added with a hint of uncertainty: “I’m not sure I should let you go, though. Mr. Hampton might not approve of you putting yourself in danger like that.”

“Oh, nonsense,” said Frank. “I can slip unseen into the water. And I can swim like a seal. Ask Bob.”

“Oh, come on,” said Frank. “I can get into the water without anyone seeing me. And I can swim like a seal. Just ask Bob.”

And at once, to prevent any interruption of his plans, he resumed worming his way to the bank of the river.

And right away, to avoid any disruption to his plans, he continued making his way to the riverbank.

The river ran at this point between six-foot banks, and the clump of trees in which camp was situated stood so close to the water that the roots of several projected through the soil of the land. Frank had little difficulty in getting down to the water, and felt sure that he accomplished the feat unseen by the enemy. He let himself into the stream, which was of sufficient depth right up to the bank to enable him to float downstream under the protection of the high bank, without the necessity of wading out to get to deeper water.

The river flowed here between six-foot banks, and the group of trees where the camp was located stood so close to the water that some of their roots were exposed. Frank had no trouble getting down to the water and was confident he did it without being seen by the enemy. He eased himself into the stream, which was deep enough right up to the bank, allowing him to float downstream under the cover of the tall bank without having to wade out to find deeper water.

“For God’s sake, be careful, boy,” whispered Farnum, as Frank disappeared.

“For God’s sake, be careful, kid,” whispered Farnum, as Frank disappeared.

Frank was naked, and unarmed except for a long knife. He had not figured out how he would set about stampeding the reindeer. He was leaving that to chance. What concerned him now was to get to 153 a position behind the herd without discovery. He stuck close inshore, floating, his eyes roving along the edge of the bluff above him for signs of the enemy.

Frank was naked and unarmed except for a long knife. He hadn't figured out how he would stampede the reindeer; he was leaving that to chance. What worried him now was getting to a position behind the herd without being seen. He stayed close to the shore, floating, his eyes scanning the edge of the bluff above him for any signs of danger.

None was to be seen. After all, he thought, it was hardly likely that any of the enemy lay in hiding here, as none of the shots fired at them had come from so close to the river. On the contrary, the enemy lay inland, showing they had come upon the camp from the landward side. Becoming bolder, therefore, he turned over and struck out, swimming strongly, the long knife in a sheath at his belt. He felt for it several times, to reassure himself it was there and had not fallen out.

None were in sight. After all, he thought, it was pretty unlikely that any of the enemy were hiding here since none of the shots fired at them had come from anywhere near the river. On the contrary, the enemy was positioned inland, indicating they had approached the camp from the landward side. Growing more confident, he flipped over and started swimming strongly, the long knife in its sheath at his belt. He felt for it several times to reassure himself it was still there and hadn’t fallen out.

Frank was a strong swimmer. Indeed, this was the one athletic sport at which he excelled both Bob and Jack, although they, too, were excellent swimmers. It did not take him long, therefore, aided by the current, to come abreast of the trees clothing the first of the two hills between which the reindeer had entered their valley. The hill sloped abruptly down to the water, and Frank had marked from camp how trees clothed it entirely, even dipping into the stream. When he had passed, as he believed, beyond a point at which there was any possibility of his being seen, he seized a branch of a willow tree and pulled himself ashore. Then, after climbing a short distance up the hill, he began working his way around it 154 through the trees. Presently he was on the hillside facing the valley where were his friends in the distant clump of trees, and the enemy hidden in the long grass. The reindeer had not moved far. They were only a short distance from him, and Frank hurried forward at the best pace he could command.

Frank was a strong swimmer. In fact, this was the one sport where he outperformed both Bob and Jack, even though they were great swimmers too. It didn't take him long, with the help of the current, to reach the trees that covered the first of the two hills between which the reindeer had entered their valley. The hill sloped steeply down to the water, and Frank had noticed from the campsite that it was completely covered in trees, some even reaching into the stream. Once he felt he was far enough away to not be seen, he grabbed a branch of a willow tree and pulled himself onto the shore. After climbing a short distance up the hill, he began making his way around it through the trees. Soon, he was on the hillside looking down at the valley where his friends were in the distant cluster of trees, and the enemy was hidden in the tall grass. The reindeer hadn’t moved far. They were only a short distance from him, and Frank hurried forward as quickly as he could manage. 154

155CHAPTER XVIII.—THE STAMPEDE.

For the first time since starting on his wild project, a doubt as to its success entered Frank’s mind. But he put it resolutely aside as he sped forward, crouching, sliding under the low branches, determined to make the best speed possible. His companions were in a ticklish situation. He wanted to do what he could to relieve them as soon as possible. As to his own danger, he gave it not a thought.

For the first time since starting his crazy project, Frank felt a doubt about its success creeping in. But he quickly pushed it away as he moved forward, crouching and sliding under the low branches, determined to go as fast as he could. His friends were in a tough spot. He wanted to do whatever he could to help them out as soon as possible. He didn’t think at all about his own danger.

What worried Frank was the possibility that he would be unable to stampede the reindeer herd. This was the thought which he put aside. But it kept recurring. And when he had come into position behind the herd, and saw them feeding quietly below him, not a stone’s throw away, at the foot of the hill, where the trees ended abruptly and the grassy plain began, he was still without an idea as to what to do.

What worried Frank was the chance that he couldn't drive the reindeer herd. He tried to push that thought away, but it kept coming back. When he finally got into position behind the herd and saw them grazing calmly just below him at the bottom of the hill, where the trees suddenly stopped and the grassy plain started, he still had no clue what to do.

Originally, he had thought that stoning the herd 156 might set them into motion and stampede them forward. But doubt as to the workability of that method had seized him as he first climbed from the water and, from among the trees, obtained his first view of the herd. The animals, grazing quietly, were so well spread out that he feared stoning them would not alarm them sufficiently to start a stampede.

Originally, he thought that throwing stones at the herd 156 might scare them into moving and stampeding forward. But doubt about whether that method would actually work overcame him as he climbed out of the water and, from among the trees, got his first look at the herd. The animals, calmly grazing, were so spread out that he worried throwing stones wouldn’t be enough to startle them into a stampede.

“Well, here goes for a try, anyway,” he muttered to himself.

“Well, here goes for a try, anyway,” he muttered to himself.

Fortunately, there were numerous pieces of rock lying about. Collecting a heap of these, he began pelting away at the nearest reindeer, a brown and white spotted cow. His aim was good, and the startled animal, struck on the flank, snorted, tossed her head and gave a little jump. She went forward only a step or two, however, and then settled down to grazing again.

Fortunately, there were plenty of rocks scattered around. Picking up a bunch of them, he started throwing at the closest reindeer, a brown and white spotted female. His aim was accurate, and the startled animal, hit on the side, snorted, lifted her head, and jumped a bit. She only moved a step or two, though, before going back to grazing.

Once more Frank let fly, and this time the stone caught her on the side of the neck. She tossed her head angrily, and sidled forward again. The movement brought her sharply into contact with another cow, and for a moment Frank was filled with hope that the pair would start fighting and alarm the rest of the herd. He was disappointed. The first cow sheered away from the other, and both resumed grazing.

Once again, Frank threw a rock, and this time it hit her on the side of the neck. She tossed her head in anger and moved forward again. The movement brought her close to another cow, and for a moment, Frank felt hopeful that the two would begin fighting and scare the rest of the herd. He was disappointed. The first cow backed away from the other, and both went back to grazing.

What should he do now? Frank was perplexed. He had already considered the possibility of startling 157 the reindeer by shouting at them, but had given up that idea because it would apprise the hidden enemy in the grass ahead of his presence. He wanted them to know nothing of the menace in their rear until the stampeded herd should sweep down upon them.

What should he do now? Frank was confused. He had already thought about scaring the reindeer by shouting at them, but he abandoned that idea because it would alert the hidden enemy in the grass in front of him. He wanted them to be completely unaware of the threat behind them until the stampeding herd came rushing down on them.

“I wonder——” he said, muttering the words for the comfort of hearing his own voice.

“I wonder—” he said, mumbling the words for the reassurance of hearing his own voice.

Then he fell silent, thinking. Art had said they were tame reindeer, accustomed to the presence of man. Yes, but of man clothed and in his natural state. And of Eskimos at that—men dressed a good deal differently from the way in which he ordinarily clothed himself. What would those reindeer think if they saw a naked, white body dash down upon them suddenly?

Then he went quiet, lost in thought. Art had said they were tame reindeer, used to humans being around. Sure, but humans who are dressed in their usual way. And Eskimos at that—men who dressed quite differently than how he usually did. What would those reindeer think if they suddenly saw a naked, white body rushing down upon them?

“I’ll do it,” he said. “That’s the only way. And it will work, too, I’ll bet.”

“I’ll do it,” he said. “That’s the only way. And it will work, too, I’m sure.”

Drawing his long knife from the sheath, he looked around and selected a tough branch the thickness of his thumb. This he cut off, stripped from it the projecting twigs, and made of it a long, pliant whip.

Drawing his long knife from the sheath, he looked around and picked a sturdy branch the thickness of his thumb. He cut it off, removed the protruding twigs, and fashioned it into a long, flexible whip.

Whip in one hand, knife in the other, eyes gleaming and determined, Frank made his way to the edge of the trees, and then stole out into the long grass, crouching low. He did not want the reindeer to see him until he was upon them, and as they were grazing away from him, this was not so difficult. 158 In fact, he was within several yards of a clump of cows before one swung about and looked at him.

Whip in one hand, knife in the other, eyes shining and focused, Frank headed to the edge of the trees and then quietly moved into the tall grass, staying low. He didn’t want the reindeer to spot him until he was right on top of them, and since they were grazing away from him, it wasn’t too hard. 158 In fact, he got within a few yards of a group of cows before one turned around and noticed him.

The minute that occurred, Frank realized there was no longer any possibility of concealment, and that the time had come to strike. And strike he did. Jumping to his feet, he bounded forward, swinging his whip so that it sank through the air.

The moment it happened, Frank understood there was no way to hide anymore, and that the time had come to take action. And take action he did. Springing to his feet, he leaped forward, swinging his whip so that it sliced through the air.

Bringing the whip down with a cruel lash on the flank of the nearest reindeer, Frank swung it around on all sides. Every swing landed. The swish as the pliant green wood struck the animals reminded him oddly of the sound of a stick beating rugs at home. Many a time he had heard that same thud-thud from behind his house.

Bringing the whip down hard on the side of the nearest reindeer, Frank swung it around in every direction. Each swing hit its mark. The sound of the flexible green wood hitting the animals strangely reminded him of the noise made when a stick beats rugs at home. He had heard that same thud-thud many times from behind his house.

Not a sound did he make as he lashed about him, for he felt that if no sound indicating that he was human came from him, the consternation of the reindeer would be increased.

Not a sound did he make as he thrashed around, because he realized that if he didn't make any noise suggesting he was human, it would only heighten the reindeer's fear.

And that he had not miscalculated became at once apparent, for the reindeer near him lifted up their sharp little hooves and sprang to get out of the vicinity of this strange animal with the lash. Naturally, to escape him, there was only one way for them to go, and that was forward, so forward they went. Right into the main body of the herd they dashed, with Frank prancing and bounding behind them, with each leap bringing his whip down upon the flank of a laggard. 159

And it quickly became clear that he hadn’t misjudged, as the reindeer around him lifted their sharp little hooves and jumped away from this strange animal with the whip. Naturally, to get away from him, there was only one direction for them to go, and that was forward, so they moved ahead. They charged right into the main part of the herd, with Frank prancing and bounding behind them, each leap bringing his whip down on the side of a straggler. 159

Suddenly, one reindeer, nearer than the rest, dashed by so close on his right as to brush Frank. He was not being charged. The animal was panicky, and merely seeking to escape. But he had to leap nimbly aside to avoid being bowled over. And as he leaped, the long knife clutched in his hand pricked the animal’s flank.

Suddenly, one reindeer, closer than the others, dashed by so quickly on his right that it brushed against Frank. It wasn't charging at him. The animal was in a panic and just trying to get away. But he had to jump nimbly to the side to avoid being knocked over. As he jumped, the long knife he was gripping pricked the animal’s flank.

The reindeer screamed, a shrill, terror-stricken cry, and launched itself forward like a thunderbolt into the midst of the disturbed herd. That, apparently, was all that was needed to complete the impending panic. Frank’s inexperienced eye could not have told the composition of the herd, but Art, when they had first caught sight of the reindeer from the hilltop, had pointed out the majority were cows, and the bucks numbered only a handful. If any buck had a masculine curiosity to discover what this strange white-skinned animal that looked so like and yet so unlike a man was, he did not get the chance to gratify it. For the now thoroughly frightened cows started forward in a rush that would have overborne any animal foolish enough to try to stem it.

The reindeer let out a piercing, terrified scream and charged forward like lightning into the panicked herd. That, it seemed, was all it took to trigger complete chaos. Frank's inexperienced eye couldn't discern the herd's makeup, but Art had pointed out, when they first spotted the reindeer from the hilltop, that most of them were cows, with only a few bucks. If any buck was curious to find out what this strange white-skinned creature that looked so much like a man yet so different was, he didn’t get the chance to satisfy that curiosity. The now completely frightened cows surged forward in a stampede that would have overwhelmed any animal foolish enough to try to stop it.

And then Frank did what might have been considered a foolish thing. Carried away by the enthusiasm engendered by seeing his plan to stampede the herd work out successfully, he continued to bound along behind, at first able to whip the 160 bunched-up stragglers, but soon falling hopelessly behind as the herd picked up speed and swept forward like the wind.

And then Frank did something that might have seemed silly. Caught up in the excitement of seeing his plan to stampede the herd succeed, he kept running after them, at first able to catch the clustered laggards. But he quickly fell hopelessly behind as the herd picked up speed and surged forward like the wind.

Straight toward the clump of trees sheltering Frank’s friends dashed the reindeer. And an exultant throb filled his breast. For the hidden enemy lay in the long grass between the herd and the trees, and inevitably, therefore, the stampeding animals would drive them out.

Straight toward the group of trees where Frank's friends were hiding, the reindeer charged. An exciting rush filled his chest. The hidden enemy was lying in the tall grass between the herd and the trees, so the panicking animals would inevitably force them out.

Regardless of the risk to himself, Frank continued on his way, running as fast as the nature of the ground permitted. The herd beat the long grass flat in its advance, as flat as if a great board had been pressed down on all, and the going was easier than he had looked for.

Regardless of the risk to himself, Frank kept going, running as fast as the ground would allow. The herd trampled the tall grass flat in their path, as if a giant board had pressed down on everything, and the terrain was easier to navigate than he expected.

Suddenly a shot rang out, then another, and a little wisp of smoke showed the young fellow the discharge came from the trees. His own friends were shooting. At what? Again an exultant thrill swept over him. He felt certain his friends were firing at the enemy, and that the stampeding herd was driving the latter ahead of it, although because of the presence of the animals between himself and the enemy he could not see whether such was the case.

Suddenly, a shot fired, then another, and a small puff of smoke showed the young guy that the shots came from the trees. His own friends were shooting. But at what? Again, an exhilarating rush went through him. He felt confident that his friends were aiming at the enemy, and that the stampeding herd was pushing the enemy ahead, even though he couldn't see if that was true because of the animals between him and the enemy.

That Frank’s surmise was correct, however, was soon borne out. For the first shots fired from the 161 trees were succeeded by a rapid rattle that told him everybody was in action.

That Frank's guess was right, however, was soon confirmed. The first shots fired from the 161 trees were followed by a quick burst of gunfire that made it clear everyone was involved.

Then followed a confused medley of shots interspersed with shouts and cries, and Frank, pausing a moment to peer ahead and listen came to the conclusion that the enemy was desperately shooting at the reindeer in an effort to turn the herd aside. If that was the case, however, their efforts were unsuccessful, for the animals filled with the unreasoning spirit of panic did not swerve from their course.

Then there was a chaotic mix of gunfire alongside shouts and screams, and Frank, taking a moment to look ahead and listen, figured out that the enemy was frantically shooting at the reindeer in an attempt to divert the herd. However, if that was the case, their efforts were in vain, as the animals, filled with a blind sense of panic, didn’t deviate from their path.

“By golly,” Frank exclaimed aloud, “I believe I can reach camp all right.”

“Wow,” Frank shouted, “I think I can make it to camp just fine.”

And once more he began to run forward. For it seemed to him that the herd, sweeping the enemy before it, would leave the ground free for him to reach the clump of trees and rejoin his friends.

And once again he started to run forward. It seemed to him that the herd, pushing the enemy away, would clear the way for him to reach the group of trees and reunite with his friends.

On swept the herd, and on ran Frank in the beaten down grass behind it. His eyes were strained towards the trees. He began to wave and shout, as he came closer and made out the outline of Mr. Hampton’s tent. He paid no attention to his surroundings.

On came the herd, and Frank ran in the flattened grass behind it. His eyes were fixed on the trees. He started to wave and shout as he got closer and recognized the shape of Mr. Hampton’s tent. He didn’t notice anything around him.

Then a form rose up from the long grass beside the swathe beaten down by the reindeer, there was a shot, and Frank fell forward on his face, a buzzing in his ears, and lost consciousness.

Then a figure emerged from the tall grass next to the patch flattened by the reindeer, there was a shot, and Frank dropped forward onto his face, a ringing in his ears, and lost consciousness.

162CHAPTER XIX.—LUPO’S END.

When next Frank opened his eyes, he lay on a blanket in camp and the sight of Bob and Jack bending anxiously above him while Mr. Hampton and Farnum worked at his shoulder greeted him.

When Frank next opened his eyes, he was lying on a blanket in camp, and the sight of Bob and Jack leaning over him with concern while Mr. Hampton and Farnum tended to his shoulder greeted him.

“Hello,” he said, trying to grin, but wincing as a sharp stab of pain passed through his shoulder.

“Hey,” he said, attempting to smile but flinching as a sharp pain shot through his shoulder.

“Don’t move, Frank, We’ll have you fixed up right in a minute,” said Mr. Hampton soothingly.

“Don’t move, Frank. We’ll have you taken care of in a minute,” Mr. Hampton said reassuringly.

“Is it bad, Dad,” Jack anxiously inquired.

“Is it bad, Dad?” Jack asked nervously.

“Just grazed the bone,” said Mr. Hampton, putting the finishing touches to the bandage, and straightening up. “There, Frank, now you’ll be all right.”

“Just grazed the bone,” said Mr. Hampton, wrapping up the bandage and standing back up. “There, Frank, now you’ll be fine.”

“What happened to me?” asked Frank, struggling to a sitting position, and finding his right arm bound across his chest.

“What happened to me?” Frank asked as he struggled to sit up and realized his right arm was tied across his chest.

“Bullet through your shoulder brought you down,” said Mr. Hampton. “And your head struck a rock hidden in the grass, so you were knocked out.” 163

“Bullet through your shoulder brought you down,” Mr. Hampton said. “And your head hit a rock hidden in the grass, so you were knocked out.” 163

“Good enough,” said Frank, “but who shot me? I was dashing along, yelling to attract your attention, and never knew what hit me.”

“Good enough,” said Frank, “but who shot me? I was rushing along, shouting to get your attention, and I never saw it coming.”

“I guess you didn’t,” said Jack. “If it hadn’t been for Art, you might have been finished. But he shot down the fellow that winged you.”

“I guess you didn’t,” Jack said. “If it hadn’t been for Art, you could have been done for. But he took out the guy who hit you.”

“Yes, and your two pals ran out as if there wasn’t an enemy in sight and carried you in,” said Art, as he saw Frank about to thank him. “Give your gratitude to them.”

“Yes, and your two friends rushed out like there wasn’t an enemy around and carried you in,” said Art, as he noticed Frank getting ready to thank him. “Direct your gratitude to them.”

Frank smiled.

Frank grinned.

“I guess I owe it to you all,” he said.

“I guess I owe it to all of you,” he said.

“You were foolish to follow the reindeer herd so closely, Frank,” said Mr. Hampton, reprovingly. “Unarmed, too.”

“You were silly to follow the reindeer herd so closely, Frank,” Mr. Hampton said, disapprovingly. “And without any weapons, too.”

“Well, I was stampeding ’em, Mr. Hampton,” said Frank. “I couldn’t do that, you know, without being there.”

“Well, I was charging at them, Mr. Hampton,” said Frank. “I couldn’t do that, you know, without being there.”

The older man shook his head.

The older man shook his head.

“If I had been myself, Frank, I wouldn’t have let you take that chance,” he said. “No, Farnum,” he hastened to add, “I’m not criticizing you. When these boys take it in their heads to do something it’s hard to head them off. However, it all turned out for the best.”

“If I had been myself, Frank, I wouldn’t have let you take that chance,” he said. “No, Farnum,” he quickly added, “I’m not criticizing you. When these guys set their minds to something, it's tough to stop them. But in the end, it all turned out for the best.”

“Tell me about it,” Frank said. “How did my scheme work out?”

“Tell me about it,” Frank said. “How did my plan turn out?”

“Couldn’t have been better, old thing,” said Bob. 164 “Lupo’s men ran like rabbits when those reindeer swept down on them. They tried a few shots in an attempt to head them off, but seeing the uselessness of their efforts, turned and ran. We gave them a few shots to help them on their way. We counted nine.”

“Couldn’t have been better, my friend,” said Bob. 164 “Lupo’s guys ran like crazy when those reindeer came charging at them. They took a few shots trying to stop them, but realizing it was pointless, they turned and fled. We took a few shots to encourage them along. We counted nine.”

“And they got away?”

"And they got away?"

“All but the man Art shot,” said Jack. “The fellow who shot at you. And you haven’t heard who he was.”

“All but the guy Art shot,” Jack said. “The guy who shot at you. And you still don’t know who he was.”

Jack’s eyes were bright. Frank looked at him questioningly.

Jack's eyes were shining. Frank looked at him with curiosity.

“Not——”

"Not—"

“Yes,” said Jack. “It was Lupo himself. Art wounded him in the chest. He died before we could do anything for him. But Dad got some information from him first.”

“Yeah,” Jack said. “It was Lupo himself. Art shot him in the chest. He died before we could help him. But Dad got some info from him first.”

He looked at his father. Mr. Hampton’s face was both grim and sad.

He looked at his dad. Mr. Hampton’s face was both serious and sad.

“Yes, Frank,” he said. “We learned who set these men on us, and who plotted against Thorwaldsson. But let us not discuss it now. It’s bad business all the way through.”

“Yes, Frank,” he said. “We found out who sent these guys after us, and who was scheming against Thorwaldsson. But let’s not talk about it now. It's all bad news.”

Mr. Hampton turned aside, taking Farnum with him, and the two fell into a low-toned discussion. Bob and Jack, meanwhile, helped Frank to resume his clothing which still lay where he had discarded 165 it before taking to the river. Art busied himself at packing up the camp equipment.

Mr. Hampton turned away, taking Farnum with him, and they started a quiet conversation. Bob and Jack, in the meantime, helped Frank put his clothes back on, which were still lying where he had dropped them before heading to the river. Art occupied himself with packing up the camp gear.

Presently, the two older men called Art to them and, after a few words of discussion, rejoined the boys.

Currently, the two older men called Art over to them and, after a brief discussion, rejoined the boys.

“Boys,” said Mr. Hampton, “we want your opinions on this, too.”

“Hey guys,” Mr. Hampton said, “we want to hear your thoughts on this, too.”

“On what, Dad?”

"About what, Dad?"

“Well, we saw nine men go bounding off away from the reindeer, and we accounted for Lupo. That makes ten, and it doesn’t seem likely there were more. Yet there is the bare possibility that out there in the grass may be one or more badly wounded men, fellows whom we shot at one time or another, who were too hard hit to escape. If there are any such, we can’t go off and leave them there to die. I wouldn’t treat a dog like that.”

“Well, we saw nine guys run off from the reindeer, and we counted Lupo. That makes ten, and it doesn’t seem likely there were more. Yet there's a slight chance that out in the grass, there could be one or more badly injured men, guys we shot at some point who were too hurt to get away. If there are any like that, we can’t just leave them there to die. I wouldn’t treat a dog like that.”

“They’re not dogs,” muttered Farnum, bitterly. “They’re wolves.”

“They’re not dogs,” Farnum muttered, bitterly. “They’re wolves.”

“Mr. Farnum considers we would be taking too great a risk,” Mr. Hampton continued. “He says that if we go out to search for wounded, we are likely to be shot for our pains.”

“Mr. Farnum thinks we would be taking too big a risk,” Mr. Hampton continued. “He says that if we go out to look for the injured, we’re likely to get shot for our efforts.”

“Oh, surely not by a wounded man whom you were going to help,” protested Jack.

“Oh, definitely not by a wounded guy you were about to help,” protested Jack.

“You don’t know them,” said Farnum.

“You don’t know them,” Farnum said.

“Well, just the same,” said Jack, “I think Dad is 166 right. It would be shameful for us to go away without investigating.”

“Well, still,” said Jack, “I think Dad is 166 right. It would be shameful for us to leave without checking it out.”

“I’d feel like a murderer,” said Bob. “Shooting ’em down in a fight is one thing. It was their lives or ours. But leaving a wounded man to die in the wilderness is something entirely different.”

“I’d feel like a killer,” said Bob. “Taking them out in a fight is one thing. It was either their lives or ours. But abandoning a wounded man to die in the wild is something completely different.”

Farnum made a gesture of surrender.

Farnum raised his hands in surrender.

“I guess I seem hard-hearted,” he said. “But you don’t know what I’ve been through in the past. All right, we’ll make a search. But I warn you to be on guard.”

“I guess I seem tough,” he said. “But you don’t know what I’ve been through before. All right, we’ll search. But I warn you to be careful.”

“Hardly likely after all that there are any wounded out there,” remarked Frank, taking part in the discussion for the first time. “They must have been in hiding right in the path of the reindeer, and you can’t see any forms there now. If there were any too badly wounded to escape, they’d also have been too badly wounded to drag themselves to the side.”

“It's unlikely that there are any injured out there,” Frank chimed in for the first time. “They must have been hiding right in the reindeer's path, and you can't see any shapes there now. If there were any badly hurt ones that couldn’t escape, they also wouldn’t have been able to drag themselves to the side.”

Mr. Hampton nodded.

Mr. Hampton nodded.

“The grass is so beaten down, too,” he said, “that if there were anybody out there, we could see him. However, I cannot rest easy without making a search. Now, you three boys remain in camp and keep watch. The rest of us will take care of the search.”

“The grass is really trampled down, too,” he said, “so if there was anyone out there, we’d be able to see them. But I can't relax without doing a search. Now, you three boys stay here at the camp and keep watch. The rest of us will handle the search.”

To this the boys made no objection. As a matter of fact, it was one time that exclusion from activity 167 did not irritate them. They had no stomach for what they might discover. Frank and Jack, especially, thinking of the terrible affair on the island in the lake, kept silence. Bob protested, but more as a matter of form and because he considered manliness demanded it, than otherwise.

To this, the boys had no objections. In fact, this was one situation where being left out of the action didn’t bother them. They weren’t eager to find out what they might uncover. Frank and Jack, in particular, remembered the awful incident on the island in the lake and stayed quiet. Bob spoke up, but only out of habit and because he felt that being tough required it, rather than any genuine desire to engage. 167

Mr. Hampton shook his head.

Mr. Hampton shook his head.

“None of us want to do this, Bob,” he said. “It has to be done, however. But I certainly don’t want you boys along.”

“None of us want to do this, Bob,” he said. “It has to be done, though. But I definitely don’t want you guys coming with me.”

The three men, revolvers clasped in their hands for use in case of emergency, set out, while the boys watched from the trees. Keeping close together, they quartered the plain, going far beyond the beaten down stretch of grass left by the passing of the reindeer herd. Presently, the boys saw them return, and with a sigh of relief, Jack said:

The three men, holding their revolvers in case of an emergency, set out while the boys watched from the trees. Sticking closely together, they searched the plain, going well beyond the trampled grass left by the passing reindeer herd. Soon, the boys saw them come back, and with a sigh of relief, Jack said:

“Well, thank goodness, that’s over.”

“Thank goodness that’s over.”

Mr. Hampton’s spirits were considerably higher on his return, as the boys could see by his features.

Mr. Hampton's mood was much better when he got back, as the boys could tell by his expression.

“Nobody anywhere,” he reported, “and we made a thorough search, too.”

“Nobody anywhere,” he reported, “and we searched thoroughly, too.”

“More thorough than there was need for,” said Farnum, grumpily.

“More thorough than necessary,” Farnum said grumpily.

Mr. Hampton smiled slightly. On long trips into the wilderness, where men are thrown into intimate contact every hour of the day and night, they get to know each other better than would be the case 168 through a lifetime of association under ordinary circumstances. It was so here. Mr. Hampton had come to love the silent, capable Farnum. Behind the latter’s bitter hatred of Lupo and his like, the easterner knew there was some good reason. He sensed a tragedy in Farnum’s past, about which, perhaps, the other would some day speak in a moment of confidence. And he forgave the man’s seeming brutality accordingly.

Mr. Hampton smiled slightly. On long trips into the wilderness, where people are thrown into close contact every hour of the day and night, they get to know each other better than they would over a lifetime of regular interactions. It was the same here. Mr. Hampton had come to appreciate the quiet, capable Farnum. Beneath Farnum’s bitter hatred for Lupo and others like him, Mr. Hampton sensed there was a good reason. He could feel a tragedy in Farnum’s past that, perhaps, the other man would eventually share in a moment of trust. And he forgave Farnum’s seeming brutality for that reason.

“All right, everybody,” said Mr. Farnum, cheerily. “Let’s pack up and be on our way.”

“All right, everyone,” said Mr. Farnum, cheerfully. “Let’s pack up and head out.”

Thanks to Art’s previous preparations, the business of breaking camp was speedily concluded, and the party embarked in the canoes and once more got under way. Farnum and Art both considered that, because of Frank’s wounded shoulder and his inability to paddle, Art should take his place in the canoe with Bob and Jack while Frank went with Mr. Hampton and Farnum. But to this arrangement the boys protested vigorously, and Mr. Hampton settled the matter by supporting them.

Thanks to Art's earlier preparations, breaking camp went quickly, and the group loaded up the canoes and got going again. Both Farnum and Art thought that since Frank had a wounded shoulder and couldn't paddle, Art should take Frank's spot in the canoe with Bob and Jack while Frank went with Mr. Hampton and Farnum. However, the boys strongly opposed this idea, and Mr. Hampton backed them up, settling the issue.

“Bob and Jack are splendid canoeists,” he said. “They have given plenty of evidence of that on this trip, and at home they are always in the water when they aren’t flying. No, let Frank stay with them. They don’t like to be separated.”

“Bob and Jack are amazing canoeists,” he said. “They've shown that all through this trip, and back home they're always in the water when they’re not flying. No, let Frank stay with them. They don’t like being apart.”

169CHAPTER XX.—IN THE FOG.

Another period of uneventful canoe travel followed, corresponding in time to the passage of a day, although there was nothing to mark the lapse except the slightly-deepened twilight preceding the reascension of the sun. Camp was pitched on an island in the stream which was small and compact and could be easily defended in case attack on them was renewed.

Another stretch of uneventful canoe travel came next, lasting about a day, although there was nothing to indicate the time had passed except for the dimming twilight that came before the sun began to rise again. They set up camp on a small, solid island in the river that could be easily defended if they were attacked again.

Of the latter contingency, however, Mr. Hampton felt there was little danger. With Lupo gone, the rascals composing his party would no longer be held to their purpose, and start to make their way out of the wilderness and back to their accustomed haunts.

Of the latter possibility, though, Mr. Hampton felt there was little risk. With Lupo gone, the troublemakers in his group would no longer stick to their plan and would begin to find their way out of the wilderness and back to their usual hangouts.

When travel was resumed after an undisturbed camp, everybody felt rested and in a more cheerful frame of mind.

When travel started again after a relaxing camp, everyone felt rejuvenated and in a happier mood.

“We ought to be reaching the Coppermine soon,” Farnum exclaimed, as they set out.

“We should be getting to the Coppermine soon,” Farnum said as they headed out.

His words were prophetic, because at the end of 170 two hours, on rounding a bend, they discerned not far ahead a broad and rapid river, into which emptied the stream they had been following.

His words were prophetic, because after two hours, as they turned a corner, they spotted ahead a wide and fast-moving river, into which flowed the stream they had been following.

“The Coppermine beyond a doubt,” said Farnum.

“The Coppermine, without a doubt,” said Farnum.

In this diagnosis, Mr. Hampton and Art agreed. And, before long, all question of doubt was conclusively settled by the discovery of great rocks of a dull reddish color lining the banks. These were the copper deposits from which the river took its name.

In this diagnosis, Mr. Hampton and Art agreed. And soon, all doubts were completely resolved when they found large rocks of a dull reddish color lining the banks. These were the copper deposits that gave the river its name.

“Sometime, when the transportation problem has been solved, this region will be supplying copper to the world,” Mr. Hampton observed.

“Sometime, when the transportation issue is resolved, this area will be supplying copper to the world,” Mr. Hampton noted.

The canoe containing the boys was close alongside, as the older men had let their paddles swing idly to enable Bob and Jack to catch up with them.

The canoe with the boys was right next to them, as the older men had paused their paddling to let Bob and Jack catch up.

“Why can’t it be taken out now, Dad?” asked Jack.

“Why can't it be taken out now, Dad?” Jack asked.

“Because,” explained Mr. Hampton, “the only method would be by ship through the Arctic, and even in the short Summer that is a passage often blocked by ice. No, development of the copper resources of this wilderness, as well as of the oil we hope to find, will have to wait on the building of a railroad.”

“Because,” Mr. Hampton explained, “the only way would be by ship through the Arctic, and even during the brief summer, that route is often blocked by ice. No, the development of the copper resources in this wilderness, along with the oil we hope to find, will have to wait for the construction of a railroad.”

“But ice and snow will block the railroad.”

“But ice and snow will block the train tracks.”

“Not nearly to the same extent,” Mr. Hampton said. “Throughout the Summer, such a road could 171 be in continuous operation. Even in Winter, with properly designed equipment, the road could be kept open—perhaps. That, however, is doubtful, for of the continuous severity of Winter here you boys can have no conception.”

“Not quite to the same extent,” Mr. Hampton said. “During the summer, that road could be in constant use. Even in winter, with well-designed equipment, the road could potentially stay open—maybe. However, that’s uncertain because you boys can’t possibly understand how harsh the winter is here.”

“Well, if we don’t turn back soon, they’ll get some idea of it, all right,” said Farnum, grimly.

“Well, if we don’t turn back soon, they’ll definitely figure it out,” said Farnum, grimly.

“You mean we’ll be caught by Winter before we can get out?” asked Mr. Hampton.

“You mean Winter is going to catch us before we can get out?” asked Mr. Hampton.

“When the old North Pole starts sliding south, she slides fast,” said Farnum, sententiously.

“When the old North Pole starts moving south, it moves quickly,” said Farnum, seriously.

As if spurred by the specter of approaching Winter, all dug their paddles into the stream with renewed vigor, and the two canoes swept on between the dismal, rocky banks hour after hour.

As if encouraged by the threat of Winter closing in, everyone dug their paddles into the stream with fresh energy, and the two canoes continued to glide between the gloomy, rocky banks hour after hour.

That night there was real twilight, and a sharpness in the air to which the party was not accustomed. Art pointed skyward, as he and the boys worked at building the campfire. Their gaze followed whither he indicated.

That night there was a real twilight, and a sharpness in the air that the group wasn't used to. Art pointed up at the sky while he and the guys worked on building the campfire. Their eyes followed where he was indicating.

“The moon,” he said. “Sure sign the season’s getting late. That’s the first time you could see it real good.”

“The moon,” he said. “Definitely a sign that the season’s coming to an end. That’s the first time you can really see it well.”

“How late in the Summer is it, anyway?” asked Frank. “I, for one, have kept no track of time. And I don’t see how anybody else could with the continuous daylight we have had.” 172

“How late is it in the summer, anyway?” Frank asked. “I haven’t kept track of time at all. I don’t see how anyone else could with all this nonstop daylight we’ve been having.” 172

“Dad religiously checks off the days every twenty-four hours,” said Jack. “I’ve seen him do it.”

“Dad consistently checks off the days every twenty-four hours,” said Jack. “I’ve seen him do it.”

Over the evening meal, Mr. Hampton explained that from Long Tom, the Indian they had taken captive on the island in the lake, he had gotten directions as to where the latter believed Thorwaldsson and his men to be. The explorer, according to Long Tom, was making his way along the Coppermine, in an endeavor to get out to the south before caught by the Winter. He had started late, and in all likelihood, Mr. Hampton’s party was still to the south of Thorwaldsson.

Over dinner, Mr. Hampton explained that he had gotten directions from Long Tom, the Indian they had captured on the island in the lake, about where Thorwaldsson and his men were. According to Long Tom, the explorer was traveling along the Coppermine River, trying to head south before winter set in. He had started late, and it was likely that Mr. Hampton’s group was still south of Thorwaldsson.

“From now on, however,” said Mr. Hampton, “we must keep our eyes open as we proceed for any signs along the way which would indicate Thorwaldsson already had passed, going south. Not that I consider that to be likely, however,” he added. “On the contrary, if Long Tom wasn’t lying, and I believe he was telling the truth, Thorwaldsson should be close at hand, and we ought soon to encounter him.”

“From now on, though,” Mr. Hampton said, “we need to stay alert as we move forward for any signs that might suggest Thorwaldsson has already gone south. I don’t think that’s likely, though,” he added. “On the contrary, if Long Tom wasn’t lying—and I believe he was being truthful—Thorwaldsson should be nearby, and we should run into him soon.”

Camp again was uneventful, but when the boys awoke in the morning they found a thick wet fog over all. Their blankets were wet with it, the rocks were wet, and the river which had lain spread out before them under the moonlight when they turned in for the night, now could not be seen. Only a gray wall of fog greeted them, blurring the outlines 173 even of Mr. Hampton, Farnum and Art, who stood in anxious conversation.

Camp was quiet again, but when the boys woke up in the morning, they discovered a thick, wet fog all around. Their blankets were soaked with it, the rocks were damp, and the river that had been visible before them under the moonlight when they went to bed was now nowhere to be seen. Only a gray wall of fog surrounded them, obscuring even the figures of Mr. Hampton, Farnum, and Art, who were standing together in worried conversation. 173

When the boys joined their elders, they found the question up for discussion was the question of whether to proceed or remain where they were until the fog lifted.

When the boys joined the adults, they found that the topic of discussion was whether to move forward or stay put until the fog cleared.

“We’ve had unexampled good weather so far, Mr. Hampton,” said Farnum. “But this fog may mark the breaking-up. We may be in for it from now on.”

“We’ve had incredible weather so far, Mr. Hampton,” said Farnum. “But this fog might signal the end of it. We could be in for a rough time from here on out.”

“I realize all that,” Mr. Hampton said, his slight impatience mute evidence to Jack, at least, that his Father was worried. “What I’d like to know now, is whether to move on or wait till the fog lifts.”

“I get all that,” Mr. Hampton said, his slight impatience subtly showing Jack that his father was worried. “What I’d like to know now is whether we should move on or wait until the fog clears.”

“Why not move on, Dad?” asked Jack.

“Why not move on, Dad?” Jack asked.

“Oh, you boys up, hey? Well, for one thing, if we travel in this fog we run the danger of being caught in rapids and sucked forward before being able to reach the bank. For another, we might—just might—pass Thorwaldsson, in the fog, without knowing it. He might be traveling, too.”

“Oh, you guys are up, huh? Well, for one thing, if we move through this fog, we risk getting caught in rapids and being pulled forward before we can reach the shore. Plus, we might—just might—pass Thorwaldsson in the fog without realizing it. He could be traveling, too.”

After some further discussion, it was decided the party should remain until the fog lifted, and that all should be on guard to catch any sound of movement out of the fog which would indicate somebody, presumably Thorwaldsson, was passing. Following breakfast, in fact, all but Mr. Hampton, who remained in camp, as a guide in case the others blundered and 174 lost their way in the fog, took up positions along the bank of the river, some twenty yards apart to maintain “listening posts.”

After some more discussion, everyone agreed to stay until the fog cleared, and that everyone should be alert for any sounds coming from the fog that might indicate someone—presumably Thorwaldsson—was passing by. After breakfast, everyone except Mr. Hampton, who stayed at camp to help in case the others got lost in the fog, took positions along the riverbank, about twenty yards apart, to set up “listening posts.” 174

An hour passed, and then another, with no indication that the fog was thinning out, and with no sound coming to straining ears except the lap of the water along the rocks at their feet. It was nerve-trying work in a way, to sit there for so long a period, isolated, as if entirely alone in an unpeopled world. The boys, at their various stations, felt the strain considerably, more so, indeed, than did Farnum or Art who were old hands at the wilderness game.

An hour went by, and then another, with no sign that the fog was clearing, and the only sound reaching their anxious ears was the water lapping against the rocks at their feet. It was tough to sit there for such a long time, feeling isolated, as if they were completely alone in an empty world. The boys, stationed at their posts, felt the tension more than Farnum or Art, who were experienced veterans of the wilderness.

In assigning all their stations, Mr. Hampton had decided, because of the greater experience of the two older men, that they should take up their positions at the south end of the line. If any party south-bound along the Coppermine escaped the attention of the boys, Farnum and Art would be pretty likely to remedy the oversight.

In assigning all their roles, Mr. Hampton decided that the two older men, due to their greater experience, should take their positions at the south end of the line. If any group heading south along the Coppermine slipped past the boys’ notice, Farnum and Art would likely fix that oversight.

To Bob fell the most northerly position. And, as he sat there, hunched up on a rock, staring out into that thick greasy wall of mist, he felt, if anything, more lonely than his companions. Jack and Frank, at least, had the consolation of knowing there was someone to either side. But, with none of his friends beyond him on the north, Bob felt very much alone, indeed. 175

To Bob went the most northern spot. And as he sat there, hunched up on a rock, gazing out into that thick, greasy wall of mist, he felt, if anything, even lonelier than his friends. Jack and Frank at least had the comfort of knowing someone was on either side of them. But with none of his friends beyond him to the north, Bob felt incredibly alone. 175

All sorts of reflections entered his mind, reflections that had no bearing whatsoever on the situation in which he found himself. He thought of sunny days on Long Island, of flights in his airplanes or zipping trips along the coast in his speed boat. He thought of one thing and another, classroom, Mexican mountains, that strange city of another world found immured in the Andes, and—of Marjorie. Ever since his first meeting with his sister’s friend, Miss Faulkner, she had occupied a position of growing importance in Bob’s scheme of things. Someday——

All kinds of thoughts popped into his head, thoughts that had nothing to do with the situation he was in. He remembered sunny days on Long Island, flying his planes, or speeding along the coast in his boat. He thought about different things, classrooms, Mexican mountains, that unusual city tucked away in the Andes, and—Marjorie. Ever since he first met his sister’s friend, Miss Faulkner, she had become increasingly important in Bob’s life. Someday——

“Some girl,” Bob said to himself. “I’ll have to see more of her.”

“Some girl,” Bob thought to himself. “I need to see more of her.”

He leaned forward, elbows planted on his knees, eyes staring into the fog. In reality, his thoughts, as can be seen, were far, far away. But presently, a sound, muffled and faint, pierced his consciousness and he sprang into instant alertness. He listened, holding his breath, straining to hear.

He leaned forward, elbows resting on his knees, eyes fixed on the fog. In reality, his mind was clearly elsewhere. But suddenly, a sound, soft and distant, broke through his thoughts, and he instantly became alert. He listened, holding his breath, trying to catch every sound.

It came again.

It happened again.

Bob started on a stumbling run for Jack, the first man to the south.

Bob took off running clumsily towards Jack, the first guy heading south.

176CHAPTER XXI.—A WAILING CRY.

“Jack, Jack,” he shouted, as he ran through the fog, blindly, but remembering to veer away from the river bank a little to avoid the danger of tumbling in. “Jack, Jack, where are you?”

“Jack, Jack,” he yelled, as he ran through the fog, unable to see but remembering to steer clear of the riverbank a bit to avoid the risk of falling in. “Jack, Jack, where are you?”

A shadow, fog-distorted, loomed before him, big, enormous. A hand gripped his shoulder and brought him to a halt.

A shadow, distorted by the fog, loomed in front of him, large, massive. A hand grabbed his shoulder and stopped him in his tracks.

“Here I am, Bob. What’s the matter?”

“Here I am, Bob. What’s going on?”

Bob rubbed the back of a big hand across his eyes.

Bob rubbed the back of his big hand across his eyes.

“I heard something out there,” he said, pointing into the fog upon the river. “I guess I’d been asleep, or daydreaming, anyway. I couldn’t be sure I had heard anything. It came twice—that sound. Then there was silence. So I came down here to ask whether you had heard, too.”

“I heard something out there,” he said, pointing into the fog over the river. “I think I was asleep or just daydreaming. I couldn’t be sure if I actually heard anything. It happened twice—that sound. Then it went quiet. So I came down here to see if you heard it too.”

“But, Bob, what was it? What did you hear? I heard nothing.”

“But, Bob, what was it? What did you hear? I heard nothing.”

“Jack, it was the sound of a baby’s cry.”

“Jack, it was the sound of a baby crying.”

Bob’s voice was solemn. A shiver ran through 177 Jack, as if a breath of cold air had fanned him. In that fog-enwrapped isolation, in that far northern wilderness, what could a baby be doing? It was preposterous. More, it was uncanny.

Bob's voice was serious. A chill ran through 177 Jack, as if a cold breeze had brushed past him. In that fog-covered isolation, in that remote northern wilderness, what could a baby possibly be doing? It was ridiculous. Even more, it was eerie.

“Bob, you were asleep. Yes, sir, you certainly were dreaming. A baby. Huh.”

“Bob, you were asleep. Yes, sir, you were definitely dreaming. A baby. Huh.”

“Maybe so,” Bob said, reluctantly. “But, true as I live, Jack——”

“Maybe so,” Bob said, hesitantly. “But, as sure as I'm standing here, Jack——”

The other’s grip on his shoulder tightened.

The other person's grip on his shoulder tightened.

Out of the fog came a wailing sound, distant, thin, but unmistakable. It was the cry of a baby, if ever there was such a thing.

Out of the fog came a wailing sound, distant and faint, but unmistakable. It was the cry of a baby, if there ever was one.

But this time it came not from the river, but from inland. The two listened, straining to hear, but the cry died away without being repeated. They looked at each other, an unnamable fear gripping them.

But this time it came not from the river, but from inland. The two listened, trying to hear, but the cry faded away without being repeated. They looked at each other, a nameless fear gripping them.

“Jack, I’m afraid,” confessed Bob in a whisper. “I don’t know—there’s something strikes a chill into me—I—I——”

“Jack, I’m scared,” Bob confessed in a whisper. “I don’t know—something feels really off to me—I—I——”

He paused. Jack nodded.

He paused. Jack agreed.

“I feel the same way, Bob,” he said, low-voiced. “What a pair of fools we are, though,” he added, brightening. “That must be some bird, or animal, perhaps.”

“I feel the same way, Bob,” he said in a quiet voice. “What a couple of fools we are, though,” he added, brightening. “That has to be some bird or animal, maybe.”

Almost unconsciously, they had been making their way southward and now another figure rose up in the fog before them—that of Frank. He was about to speak, when once more the wailing cry rose, and 178 this time it came from two quarters, from the river and from farther inland. The three stood, silent, speechless, and in that moment, while the echoes of the cries still rang in their heads, Farnum and Art materialized out of the fog.

Almost without realizing it, they had been heading south, and now another figure appeared in the fog ahead of them—it was Frank. He was about to say something when the wailing cry erupted again, and this time it came from two directions, from the river and from deeper inland. The three of them stood there, silent and speechless, and in that moment, while the echoes of the cries still echoed in their minds, Farnum and Art emerged from the fog.

“Good, there you all are,” said Farnum, in a low, tense voice. “Follow me to camp.”

“Good, there you all are,” Farnum said in a low, tense voice. “Follow me to camp.”

And without a word of explanation he started at right angles away from the river, for they had taken their stations in such fashion that Frank, holding the middle position, would be directly opposite the camp. This was in order to enable them to reach it without losing their way in the fog.

And without saying anything, he turned away from the river, since they had positioned themselves in a way that Frank, who was in the middle, would be directly across from the camp. This was so they could get there without losing their way in the fog.

“What is it, Art?” asked Jack, his voice matching Farnum’s.

“What’s wrong, Art?” asked Jack, his voice mirroring Farnum’s.

“Indians,” answered Art, tersely. “Stick close together and don’t make no noise.”

“Indians,” Art replied curtly. “Stay close together and don’t make any noise.”

It was a situation to tax the nerve of the bravest, and the three boys hurrying along in the wake of Farnum and Art could not be accused of cowardice for experiencing a chill premonition of trouble ahead. Often had Farnum spoken of the cruelty of these far northern Indians. Bitter had been their experiences with Lupo’s half-breeds, in whose veins flowed the blood of the Indians of the north.

It was a situation that would test the courage of the bravest, and the three boys rushing along behind Farnum and Art couldn’t be blamed for feeling a chill of trouble ahead. Farnum had often talked about the harshness of these far northern Indians. They had faced tough experiences with Lupo’s half-breeds, who had the blood of northern Indians running through their veins.

As they hurried along, there flashed through their minds some of the stories Farnum had told. Had they gotten so far, so near the end of their quest for 179 the “Lost Expedition” only to be wiped out by Indians, on the very eve of success? Such thoughts raced through the mind of each. But they were determined fellows, accustomed to confront danger, used to tight places. The first onrush of panic was swept aside, and, by the time they tumbled into the little hollow in which camp had been pitched, and where Mr. Hampton awaited them, each had himself well in hand.

As they rushed forward, memories of the stories Farnum had shared flashed through their minds. Had they really come this far, so close to finishing their quest for the 179 "Lost Expedition," only to be taken out by Indians right before their success? Such thoughts raced through each of their minds. However, they were a determined bunch, used to facing danger and handling tough situations. The initial wave of panic quickly faded, and by the time they stumbled into the small hollow where their camp was set up and where Mr. Hampton was waiting for them, each of them had composed themselves.

Mr. Hampton looked at their determined faces, and a smile of grim approval was his greeting.

Mr. Hampton looked at their determined faces, and smiled in grim approval as a greeting.

“Indians, boys,” he said. “Farnum told me. I suspected as much. Now, we have no trees here for bulwark, but this little hollow is good enough. Let us lie down and line the edge of the pit. We’ll be pretty close together, and if any Indians stumble on us they’ll get a warm reception. Listen.” He spoke in a low voice. “There goes that cry again. Does it sound closer? Yes,” as the other nodded, “I thought so. Quick. Take your positions. Jack, my boy, you stay beside me.”

“Indians, guys,” he said. “Farnum told me. I figured as much. Now, we don’t have any trees here for cover, but this little hollow will do. Let’s lie down and line the edge of the pit. We’ll be pretty close together, and if any Indians stumble upon us, they’ll get quite the surprise. Listen.” He spoke in a low voice. “There’s that cry again. Does it sound closer? Yes,” he said as the other nodded, “I thought so. Hurry up. Take your positions. Jack, my boy, you stay beside me.”

There was a little tremor in his voice. That was all. But Jack understood. He clasped his father’s hand strongly, then threw himself prone beside him, while the others ranged themselves in a circle as commanded.

There was a slight shake in his voice. That was it. But Jack got it. He gripped his father’s hand firmly, then lay down next to him, while the others formed a circle as instructed.

Once more came the wailing cry from the inland. Once more it was answered in kind from the water. 180 But to all it was apparent that the sounds were farther removed, and Mr. Hampton broke the painful silence with a whispered:

Once again, a wailing cry rose from inland. Once again, it was met with a similar response from the water. 180 But everyone could tell that the sounds were coming from farther away, and Mr. Hampton broke the heavy silence with a quiet:

“They’re moving on, moving away.”

“They’re moving on, moving forward.”

“Look, Dad,” Jack exclaimed excitedly. “I can see those rocks ahead where a minute ago was only the white fog. Why, the fog’s lifting. It’s lifting, Dad, sure enough.”

“Look, Dad,” Jack said excitedly. “I can see those rocks up ahead that were just covered by the white fog a minute ago. The fog is lifting. It’s really lifting, Dad.”

“You’re right, Jack,” his father replied, low-voiced, but there was anxiety rather than jubilation in his tone. “That will make it bad for us. We’ll be exposed to sight.”

“You’re right, Jack,” his father replied quietly, but there was more anxiety than excitement in his voice. “That will make things difficult for us. We’ll be out in the open.”

Once again came the wail, faint and far away. As faint came the reply from the water. Both cries were to the north. Originally they had come from that direction. Now they were withdrawing whence they had come. What could it mean?

Once again, there was a distant wail, soft and far away. A similar faint reply came from the water. Both cries came from the north. They had originally come from that direction. Now they were fading back to where they came from. What could this mean?

The next minute a rattle of rifle fire broke the silence. At the same time a cold breeze blew across the crouching figures in the shallow pit and the fog began to shred out fast before it.

The next minute, the crack of rifle fire shattered the silence. At the same time, a cold breeze swept across the crouching figures in the shallow pit, and the fog started to quickly thin out before it.

Farnum sprang upright, gazing to the north. The others also gained their feet. The shooting now was fast and furious.

Farnum jumped to his feet, looking north. The others stood up as well. The gunfire was intense and relentless now.

“I can’t understand,” said Farnum, in a puzzled tone.

“I can’t understand,” said Farnum, sounding confused.

With an exclamation, Jack seized his father’s arm. 181

With a shout, Jack grabbed his father’s arm. 181

“Dad,” he cried, “you said Thorwaldsson might be near.”

“Dad,” he shouted, “you said Thorwaldsson could be close.”

“Yes, why—”

"Yeah, why—"

“That’s it,” said Art, in a tone of conviction. Mr. Farnum turned towards him.

"That's it," Art said with conviction. Mr. Farnum turned to him.

“You mean?”

"What do you mean?"

“Jack guessed it. Thorwaldsson’s being attacked.”

“Jack figured it out. Thorwaldsson is being attacked.”

Jack nodded.

Jack agreed.

“That’s what I meant, Dad.”

"That's what I meant, Dad."

“You’re right, Jack,” said his father. “Come on. It can’t be anything else. Nobody but Thorwaldsson is in this wilderness. We must help him. Stick close together.”

“You're right, Jack,” his father said. “Let’s go. It has to be him. Nobody else but Thorwaldsson is out here in this wilderness. We need to help him. Stay close together.”

And scrambling out of their shallow pit, Mr. Hampton started on the dead run towards the direction of the shooting, with the others at his heels.

And scrambling out of their shallow pit, Mr. Hampton took off running toward the sound of the gunfire, with the others right behind him.

The ground was bare of verdure, and great rocks of the copper ore were scattered around. On this account their view was restricted, but the sound of the rifle fire grew momentarily louder, apprising them that they were nearing the scene of conflict. Suddenly Bob, who was in the lead, having out-distanced the others several yards, rounded a big rock and found himself on a bank above a narrow strip of beach.

The ground was bare of greenery, and large chunks of copper ore were scattered everywhere. Because of this, their visibility was limited, but the sound of gunfire got louder, letting them know they were getting closer to the battle. Suddenly, Bob, who was leading and had pulled ahead of the others by several yards, turned around a large rock and found himself on a bank overlooking a narrow stretch of beach.

Below lay a number of forms, as of men dead or wounded. Two canoes were drawn up on the beach, and behind one of these, using it as a bulwark, 182 crouched a man, rifle to shoulder. Farther down the beach were three other canoes grounded, and beside them several forms of wounded men, and five or six men, crouching, firing at the lone defender of the attacked position, creeping up on him.

Below were several bodies, either dead or injured. Two canoes were pulled up on the beach, and behind one of them, using it as cover, 182 crouched a man, rifle raised. Further down the beach were three other grounded canoes, and beside them, several injured men along with five or six men crouching and shooting at the lone defender of the attacked position, moving closer to him.

Just as Bob reached the edge of the bank, the attackers mustered up courage for a rush, and with wild shouts swept forward. It looked dark, indeed, for the lone defender of the upturned canoes. Bob looked back to see how close were his companions, but they were not yet in sight. His dash had carried him farther than he had believed to be the case.

Just as Bob reached the edge of the bank, the attackers gathered their courage for a charge and, with loud shouts, surged forward. It looked very grim for the lone defender of the overturned canoes. Bob looked back to see how close his companions were, but they weren’t anywhere in sight yet. His sprint had taken him farther than he had thought.

It had taken only a glance to show Bob which way the land lay. The lone defender was the survivor of Thorwaldsson’s party, if the explorer’s party it was, of which Bob had little doubt. He was a white man. The others were half-breeds, and if Bob was not mistaken they were of the same gang which he had encountered before.

It took just one look for Bob to figure out the lay of the land. The sole defender was the last one left from Thorwaldsson’s group, if it really was the explorer’s group, which Bob had little doubt about. He was a white man. The others were mixed race, and if Bob was right, they were from the same gang he had come across before.

It was distinctly up to him to lend a hand. Throwing his rifle to his shoulder, he prepared to open fire on the crushing enemy. But as his finger pressed the trigger, he groaned. The mechanism of the rifle had became jammed in some fashion. Desperately he worked to release the trigger, but to no avail.

It was clearly his responsibility to help out. He raised his rifle to his shoulder, getting ready to shoot at the overwhelming enemy. But just as he was about to pull the trigger, he groaned. The rifle's mechanism had somehow jammed. He desperately tried to free the trigger, but it was useless.

Then the light of battle came into big Bob’s eyes. The half-breeds were just below him now. Several 183 of their number had fallen in the rush, shot down by the defender of the canoes. Four were left, and they evidently were bent on polishing off their lone opponent. So absorbed were all in their own drama, they had not seen Bob.

Then the intensity of battle sparked in big Bob’s eyes. The half-breeds were just below him now. Several 183 of them had fallen during the rush, shot down by the defender of the canoes. Four remained, and they clearly aimed to take out their sole opponent. So focused were they on their own struggle that they hadn’t noticed Bob.

Clubbing his rifle, Bob leaped. He came down on the back of one of the attackers, and bore him to the ground. With catlike swiftness, Bob, who himself had fallen on his hands and knees, gathered himself together, regained his feet, and swinging his clubbed rifle, let out a yell fit to “frighten a wolf pack,” as Frank later described it.

Clubbing his rifle, Bob jumped. He landed on the back of one of the attackers and tackled him to the ground. With the speed of a cat, Bob, who had fallen to his hands and knees, collected himself, got back on his feet, and swinging his clubbed rifle, let out a yell that could “frighten a wolf pack,” as Frank later put it.

The stock of the rifle came down with a thud on the shoulders of another of the half-breeds, felling him as if he had been struck by lightning. So tremendous was the blow, that it tore the rifle from Bob’s grasp. But he leaped for another of the enemy, a fellow whose startled face was close to his, seized him about the waist and whirled him aloft to be tossed aside as if he were a sack of meal. The fourth man was dropped by a shot from the defender of the canoe.

The butt of the rifle slammed down on the shoulders of another half-breed, knocking him down as if he’d been hit by lightning. The blow was so powerful that it knocked the rifle out of Bob’s hands. But he charged at another enemy, a guy whose shocked face was right in front of him, grabbed him around the waist, and spun him up and away like he was a sack of flour. The fourth man went down after being shot by the defender of the canoe.

“Attaboy, Bob,” came Frank’s voice, from the bluff above.

“Good job, Bob,” Frank's voice called out from the bluff above.

One after the other, Bob’s friends leaped to the beach.

One by one, Bob’s friends jumped onto the beach.

As Frank and Jack clapped him on the back, and 184 tried to grasp his hand, uttering enthusiastic praise the while, Bob looked around.

As Frank and Jack patted him on the back, and 184 attempted to shake his hand, showering him with enthusiastic compliments, Bob glanced around.

“Say, where’s that chap? Why, he’s fainted.”

“Hey, where’s that guy? Oh, he’s passed out.”

Freeing himself from his companions’ clutches, Bob leaped over the up-ended canoe and bent above the recumbent body of the doughty defender.

Freeing himself from his friends’ grip, Bob jumped over the turned-over canoe and leaned down over the lying figure of the brave defender.

“Why, he’s badly wounded,” he cried.

“Why, he’s seriously hurt,” he exclaimed.

Mr. Hampton pushed him aside.

Mr. Hampton moved him aside.

“Here, let me look, Bob,” he said. “You fellows help Farnum and Art in looking after the others. The place is a shambles, with wounded men everywhere.”

“Here, let me take a look, Bob,” he said. “You guys help Farnum and Art with the others. This place is a mess, with injured guys all over.”

185CHAPTER XXII.—OUTWARD BOUND.

It was a week before the wounded could be moved. At close range though the fight had been, none had been killed. When the boys exclaimed in amazement at this, Art shrugged his shoulders.

It took a week before they could move the injured. Despite how intense the fight had been up close, none had died. When the guys expressed their surprise at this, Art just shrugged.

“More bullets fly in a fight than ever reach their mark,” he said. “I’ve seen men, tough fellows, regular two-gun men, shoot at each other in Alaskan saloons in the old days without anybody being killed. When a man sees red, he don’t take no good aim.”

“More bullets fly in a fight than ever hit their target,” he said. “I’ve seen tough guys, real two-gun men, shoot at each other in Alaskan bars back in the day without anyone getting killed. When a guy gets angry, he doesn’t aim well.”

The majority of the wounded were not hit in vital spots, but Thorwaldsson had been shot in so many places that his recovery at first was a matter of doubt. It was he who had been the last of his party to keep firing, he whom Bob had rescued in the nick of time.

The majority of the injured weren't hit in critical areas, but Thorwaldsson had been shot in so many places that his recovery was initially uncertain. He was the last one from his group to keep shooting, the one Bob had saved just in time.

From Farrell and others of Thorwaldsson’s five companions, however, the story of what had occurred had been obtained. They had been on their way 186 down the Coppermine when they, too, had been overtaken in the fog. They had landed in the little beach to wait for the fog to lift. There the half-breeds, survivor’s of Lupo’s gang, who had been dogging the trail of Mr. Hampton and his party, had come upon them.

From Farrell and the other four companions of Thorwaldsson, the details of what happened were gathered. They were heading down the Coppermine when they got caught in the fog as well. They had landed on a small beach to wait for the fog to clear. It was there that the half-breeds, survivors of Lupo's gang, who had been tracking Mr. Hampton and his group, found them.

The surprise had been mutual, for the half-breeds had been looking for the Hampton party and not for Thorwaldsson. However, they had attacked, the majority from the canoes, and three who had been scouting along shore, from the land. Surprised thus, Thorwaldsson’s party had put up a game fight, but one after the other had been shot down until only the leader was left. He, barricaded behind the canoes, had held off the rest of the attackers until the final rush and Bob’s timely arrival.

The surprise was mutual, as the half-breeds had been searching for the Hampton group, not for Thorwaldsson. Still, they attacked, mostly from the canoes, while three others scouted along the shore from land. Caught off guard, Thorwaldsson’s team fought hard, but one by one they were shot down until only the leader remained. He had barricaded himself behind the canoes and managed to fend off the rest of the attackers until the final rush and Bob’s timely arrival.

As the days passed by, with the twilight deepening into short nights, Art and Farnum both grew increasingly anxious to be on their way for the outside. They knew their North, and they realized that the time remaining to them before Winter set in was narrowing down to a perilously small edge.

As the days went by, with the twilight turning into brief nights, Art and Farnum became more and more eager to head outside. They knew their direction north, and they understood that the time left before winter arrived was quickly running out.

“We’ll have a mighty hard job of it, Mr. Hampton,” Farnum pleaded. “What with wounded on our hands, and prisoners to guard, it looks almost hopeless as it is for us to get out. But, anyway, we can’t afford to waste time. Can’t Thorwaldsson be moved? He’ll be all right in a canoe.” 187

“We’re going to have a really tough time with this, Mr. Hampton,” Farnum said urgently. “With wounded people to look after and prisoners to keep an eye on, it seems almost impossible for us to get out. But we can’t afford to waste any time. Can’t we move Thorwaldsson? He’ll be fine in a canoe.” 187

“As long as the traveling is easy, yes,” said Mr. Hampton. “He will be all right. But how about at the portages? He’s lost lot of blood already. He can’t afford to lose any more. However, I expect that with care we can prevent his wounds from reopening. We’ll start tomorrow.”

“As long as traveling is easy, sure,” said Mr. Hampton. “He’ll be fine. But what about at the portages? He’s already lost a lot of blood. He can’t afford to lose any more. However, I think we can prevent his wounds from reopening if we’re careful. We’ll start tomorrow.”

Accordingly, on the day appointed, camp was broken, and the party got under way. Frank’s shoulder was healed sufficiently to permit him once more to wield a paddle, although still a trifle stiff, and he took his place in the canoe with Bob and Jack. They had another passenger this time in Farrell, whose right arm had been broken by a shot in the sanguinary fight on the river beach. Thorwaldsson was taken in the canoe occupied by Mr. Hampton and Farnum, Art going in one of the other craft with members of Thorwaldsson’s party. Several of the latter had been creased by rifle bullets and one shot through a leg, but all could wield paddles.

On the scheduled day, the camp was packed up, and the group set off. Frank's shoulder had healed enough for him to paddle again, even though it was still a bit stiff, and he joined Bob and Jack in the canoe. This time, they had another passenger, Farrell, whose right arm had been broken by a bullet during the bloody fight on the river beach. Thorwaldsson was in the canoe with Mr. Hampton and Farnum, while Art took one of the other boats with members of Thorwaldsson's group. Several of them had been grazed by bullets, and one had a bullet wound in his leg, but they could all handle paddles.

And so the long trip out of the wilderness began, with the half-breeds in three canoes, deprived of arms and closely watched by their captors in the four canoes bringing up the rear. With reasonable care, it was felt, the prisoners could be controlled until they should near civilization. Without weapons they would be in a hopeless plight in the wilderness, unable to defend themselves against wild animals, unable to provide food for themselves. Therefore, no 188 attempt on the part of their captives to escape was looked for by the others, until they should near the outlying settlements of the inhabited country.

And so the long journey out of the wilderness began, with the half-breeds in three canoes, stripped of weapons and closely watched by their captors in the four canoes following behind. It was believed that with proper caution, the prisoners could be managed until they got closer to civilization. Without any weapons, they would be defenseless in the wild, unable to protect themselves from wild animals or find food. As a result, the others did not expect any escape attempts from their captives until they were near the outskirts of settled areas. 188

“When that time comes,” Mr. Hampton had warned the boys, “we must be on the lookout, for the half-breeds, unless closely watched, will try to get back their weapons and make a break for it. And I am determined to take them into civilization as witnesses to prove my statement of the murderous conspiracy against us on the part of an eminent gentleman in faraway New York.”

“When that time comes,” Mr. Hampton had warned the boys, “we need to be vigilant, because the half-breeds, if not monitored closely, will attempt to retrieve their weapons and make a run for it. And I’m committed to bringing them into civilization as witnesses to support my claim about the deadly conspiracy against us orchestrated by a prominent man in distant New York.”

Mr. Hampton spoke bitterly, for from all that had occurred and from the accounts, first of Long Tom and of the dying Lupo, and again of Farrell and the surviving members of Thorwaldsson’s party, he had pieced together the story of the conspiracy against them.

Mr. Hampton spoke harshly, because from everything that had happened and from the stories, first of Long Tom and the dying Lupo, and then of Farrell and the surviving members of Thorwaldsson’s group, he had put together the narrative of the conspiracy against them.

To the boys he confided this tale, the main theme of which was that when Farrell had told his story to Mr. Otto Anderson concerning the discovery of the oil-bearing region in the Arctic, Mr. Anderson’s confidential secretary had gone to a New York financier and sold him the information. He had not been able to tell definitely, however, the location of the oil region, for the very good reason, as before related, that Farrell was not certain of it himself, his vicissitudes in getting out of the country having unsettled his mind. Therefore, this financier had sent 189 his agents westward with word that Thorwaldsson be tracked.

To the boys, he shared this story, the main point being that when Farrell told Mr. Otto Anderson about discovering the oil-rich area in the Arctic, Mr. Anderson's private secretary went to a New York investor and sold him the information. However, he couldn't specify the exact location of the oil site, because, as mentioned earlier, Farrell wasn't sure himself; his troubles getting out of the country had muddled his thoughts. As a result, this investor sent his agents west to track down Thorwaldsson. 189

“Perhaps this financier, Old Grimm, ordered the mere tracking of Thorwaldsson,” said Mr. Hampton. “But I doubt it. The attacks on Thorwaldsson’s expedition, the disappearance of his ship and crew, all look like parts of a deep-laid plan to attain Grimm’s ends at whatever cost in human life. And, on top of it all, the attack on us by Lupo, who was paid a handsome sum down in Dawson by Anderson’s former secretary, acting as agent for Grimm, show the latter aimed to put us all out of the way.”

“Maybe this financier, Old Grimm, just wanted to keep tabs on Thorwaldsson,” Mr. Hampton said. “But I doubt that. The assaults on Thorwaldsson’s expedition, the vanishing of his ship and crew, all seem like pieces of a well-thought-out scheme to achieve Grimm’s goals no matter the cost to human life. And, to make matters worse, the attack on us by Lupo, who received a hefty payment in Dawson from Anderson’s old secretary, acting as Grimm's agent, shows that he intended to eliminate us all.”

“And all for money,” said Jack. “It’s hard to believe.”

“And all for money,” said Jack. “It’s hard to believe.”

“Ah, you don’t know Grimm,” said his father. “The man who develops this Arctic oil region may become the richest in the world. Grimm is ambitious for that position. He’s got a lot of money so far, in one crooked way or another. But he’s not one of the big ones yet, not one of the richest. And he wants to be supreme. Well, he has overreached himself this time, for I’ve got the evidence, and I’ll see that we get more in Dawson and Seattle and New York. Mr. Grimm will no longer have the power or freedom to toy with men’s lives when I get through with him.”

“Ah, you don’t know Grimm,” said his father. “The guy who develops this Arctic oil region could become the richest person in the world. Grimm is aiming for that spot. He’s managed to make a lot of money, one shady way or another. But he’s still not one of the big players, not one of the wealthiest. He wants to be at the top. Well, this time he’s gone too far, because I have the proof, and I’ll make sure we get more in Dawson, Seattle, and New York. Mr. Grimm won’t have the power or freedom to mess with people’s lives once I’m done with him.”

Although Thorwaldsson lay as in a stupor and could not be questioned, the full account of what had 190 befallen his expedition since it set out from Seattle was learned from the others. First of all, they had succeeded in retracing Farrell’s earlier footsteps, and had found the oil region and the river running through it. A thorough survey of the country had been made, with maps showing the outlet by water to the Arctic Ocean.

Although Thorwaldsson lay in a daze and couldn't be questioned, the complete story of what happened to his expedition since they left Seattle was gathered from the others. First off, they managed to retrace Farrell’s earlier route and discovered the oil area and the river flowing through it. They conducted a detailed survey of the region, creating maps that illustrated the waterway leading to the Arctic Ocean.

In fact, the party had made its way out the river into the Arctic Ocean and around the coast into the Coppermine. There they had encountered and made friends with a tribe of Eskimo. They had started down the Coppermine, or rather up, as it flows north into the Arctic, but had been attacked, losing half the members of their party and a large part of their equipment, including the radio. It was after this that the aviator of the expedition had attempted to fly to the outside with news of Thorwaldsson’s plight, the latter meanwhile being cared for through the following Winter by the friendly Eskimo at the mouth of the Coppermine, to which they had put back. The death of the aviator, near the MacKenzie, of course, was not known to the Thorwaldsson party until the news was imparted by the boys.

In fact, the group had made its way out of the river into the Arctic Ocean and around the coast into the Coppermine. There, they met and became friends with a tribe of Eskimo. They started traveling down the Coppermine, or rather up, since it flows north into the Arctic, but were attacked, losing half of their group and a lot of their gear, including the radio. After this, the pilot of the expedition tried to fly out with news of Thorwaldsson’s situation, while Thorwaldsson was taken care of through the following winter by the friendly Eskimo at the mouth of the Coppermine, where they had returned. The death of the pilot, near the MacKenzie, of course, was not known to the Thorwaldsson party until the boys shared the news.

The course followed as they struck southward was not that pursued by Farrell when he had made his way back to civilization. On that occasion he had frequently been light-headed, and it was felt it would be unwise to trust now to his guidance. Instead, 191 Mr. Hampton and Farnum decided to retrace their own trail back to the island in the lake where MacDonald had been encountered, and thence follow his course to the Fort of the Northwest Mounted Police.

The route they took southward wasn't the same one Farrell had followed when he returned to civilization. Back then, he had often felt dizzy, and it seemed unwise to rely on him for guidance now. Instead, 191 Mr. Hampton and Farnum chose to go back along their own path to the island in the lake where they had met MacDonald, and from there, they would follow his route to the Fort of the Northwest Mounted Police.

Day after day they pushed ahead, the nights ever growing longer and colder, with frost on the ground in the mornings. The honking of the wild geese overhead, as they made their way south, also was a warning that the mantle of Winter soon would settle down.

Day after day, they kept moving forward, with the nights getting longer and colder, and frost covering the ground in the mornings. The honking of the wild geese flying overhead on their way south was also a sign that winter was approaching.

“You see,” Art said to the boys one day, “Winter in this country not only means dreadful cold for which we ain’t prepared in the matter of clothing or snowshoes or nothing, but also it means there ain’t no food to be had. Yes, there’s plenty of game now, geese and duck everywhere along the streams, caribou plentiful. But you notice they’re all going south. When Winter strikes, there’ll be nothing in this wilderness but rabbit and beaver. Beaver’s all right—if you can dig ’em out o’ their huts. But rabbit—huh! Well, you can starve fine on rabbit.”

“You see,” Art said to the boys one day, “Winter in this country doesn’t just mean terrible cold that we’re not ready for in terms of clothing or snowshoes or anything, but it also means there’s no food available. Sure, there’s plenty of game now, with geese and ducks everywhere along the streams, and caribou are abundant. But you’ll notice they’re all heading south. When Winter hits, there will be nothing left in this wilderness except rabbit and beaver. Beaver’s okay—if you can dig them out of their huts. But rabbit—huh! Well, you can really starve on rabbit.”

192CHAPTER XXIII.—LONG JIM APPEARS.

Winter, after all, caught them in its icy grip far north of where they had planned to be when the cold should really set in. This was due to a variety of circumstances. The slowness of Thorwaldsson’s recovery was one of the retarding influences, which prevented them making the desired speed. After weeks of travel he was still in a comatose condition, and Mr. Hampton feared his brain had been affected by a bullet that ploughed along the left side of his head. The other wounded, although quick to recover, also acted as a hindrance, especially at the first.

Winter, after all, caught them in its icy grip far north of where they had planned to be when the cold really kicked in. This was due to several factors. The slow recovery of Thorwaldsson was one of the major reasons that prevented them from making the progress they wanted. After weeks of travel, he was still in a comatose state, and Mr. Hampton feared that his brain had been affected by a bullet that had traveled along the left side of his head. The other injured members, although quick to recover, also slowed them down, especially at first.

Then, too, the season was unusual. Winter arrived weeks ahead of the expected time. And daily, as the ice on stream and river thickened, it became increasingly hard to break a way. Yet the canoes could not be abandoned, for, once snow began to fly, the travelers would have been helpless on land, without sleds or snowshoes. Sleds of a sort could 193 be constructed, of course, and makeshift snowshoes made, too, but neither would be worth much, and the manufacture of them would take a good deal of time.

Then again, the season was unusual. Winter showed up weeks earlier than expected. Each day, as the ice on streams and rivers got thicker, it became harder to find a way through. But they couldn’t abandon the canoes because once the snow started falling, the travelers would be stranded on land without sleds or snowshoes. They could make some kind of sleds, of course, and whip up some makeshift snowshoes, too, but neither would be very useful, and making them would take quite a bit of time.

Two sentries were always posted at night now; one by a fire around which slumbered the prisoners, the other by a fire in the midst of a circle composed of the Hampton and Thorwaldsson parties combined. It was Jack’s turn to keep guard one cold but clear night, after a heavy snowfall, which had caused a great deal of suffering to all, and had brought them, indeed, to the verge of despair. For they were insufficiently clad, even though the skins of many animals slain for food in the past weeks had been saved and roughly cured for wraps; and, in addition, with the closing-in of Winter game had become so scarce that the camp was virtually on the verge of starvation.

Two guards were always on duty at night now; one by a fire where the prisoners were sleeping, and the other by a fire in the middle of a circle made up of the Hampton and Thorwaldsson groups combined. It was Jack’s turn to stand guard one cold but clear night, after a heavy snowfall, which had caused a lot of suffering for everyone and had really driven them to the edge of despair. They were not dressed warmly enough, even though they had managed to save and roughly prepare the skins of many animals they had killed for food in the past weeks; plus, as winter closed in, game had become so scarce that the camp was almost on the brink of starvation.

Jack was mounting guard by the fire around which lay his friends. One of the Thorwaldsson party, Swenson, did sentry duty by the other fire. Looking across the little space which separated the two parties, Jack could see the huddled figures of the half-breeds lying so close to the fire, which Swenson fed constantly with fuel, that they seemed almost to be in it. Around him the members of his own party were similarly disposed.

Jack was standing guard by the fire where his friends were gathered. One of the Thorwaldsson group, Swenson, was on watch by the other fire. Looking across the small gap that separated the two groups, Jack could see the huddled figures of the half-breeds lying so close to the fire that Swenson kept feeding with wood, they seemed almost to be in it. Around him, the members of his own group were spread out in a similar way.

With a sigh, Jack arose, caught up an armful of 194 wood and tossed it into the fire. The flames at once shot high and, as if that were a signal, out of the darkness beyond came a robust hail.

With a sigh, Jack got up, grabbed a bunch of wood, and tossed it into the fire. The flames immediately shot up high, and as if that were a signal, a hearty greeting came from the darkness beyond.

“Hello, there. Keep ’er goin’, sonny.”

“Hey there. Keep it going, kid.”

Into the light of the fire a moment later strode a big fur-clad figure of a man on snowshoes. On his back was a pack which he dropped to the ground with a sigh of relief. Then he leaned his rifle in the crook of an elbow and, pulling off great fur mittens, spread his hands to the blaze, working his fingers gratefully back and forth.

Into the light of the fire a moment later walked a large figure of a man dressed in fur and wearing snowshoes. He had a backpack on his back that he dropped to the ground with a sigh of relief. Then he rested his rifle in the bend of his arm and, taking off his big fur mittens, spread his hands toward the flame, moving his fingers gratefully back and forth.

“Cold an’ gittin’ colder,” he announced, casually. “Got a nice fire here.”

“It's cold and getting colder,” he said nonchalantly. “We've got a nice fire going here.”

Jack was nonplussed. In the first place, to find another wanderer in this wilderness which they believed unpeopled was exciting enough. But to have him walk in casually and without vouchsafing any explanation of his presence took Jack’s breath away for the moment. Yet Jack knew enough of the woodland lore to realize that hospitality is the first law of the wilds, and that questions distinctly would not be in order. He decided the best thing for him would be to wait for the other to take the lead in the conversation.

Jack was taken aback. First of all, it was thrilling to find another traveler in this wilderness they thought was deserted. But for him to just stroll in without offering any explanation for being there was a shock for Jack. Still, he knew enough about the ways of the woods to understand that hospitality is the fundamental rule of the wild, and that asking questions wasn’t appropriate. He figured the best course of action was to let the other person lead the conversation.

This the intruder was not slow to do, beginning even as he eased his stiffened fingers in the warmth of the fire. 195

This intruder didn't waste any time, starting right as he relaxed his stiff fingers in the warmth of the fire. 195

“Didn’t know there was anybody else in this country,” he said. “Been around here long?”

“Didn’t know there was anyone else in this country,” he said. “Have you been around here long?”

A look of clumsy craft from under shaggy brows accompanied the question. Jack had to smile to himself.

A silly expression peeked out from under messy brows as the question was asked. Jack couldn't help but smile to himself.

“No; not long,” he said composedly. “And you?”

“No, not for long,” he said calmly. “What about you?”

“Oh, I been huntin’ an’ trappin’ ’round here,” the other said.

“Oh, I’ve been hunting and trapping around here,” the other said.

To Jack it seemed the man was an honest enough, even a likeable, type, and yet that he was acting evasively. He decided it would be a good plan to get a more experienced head to help him deal with the situation. None of his party apparently was awake, all being worn out with the terrific strain of the day’s travel. But Art lay near him. In fact, his foot was not six inches from Jack.

To Jack, the man seemed pretty honest and even likeable, but he was definitely being evasive. He figured it would be smart to get someone more experienced to help him handle the situation. It looked like none of his friends were awake; they were all exhausted from the intense travel of the day. But Art was lying close by. In fact, his foot was less than six inches from Jack.

Unostentatiously, in order not to attract the newcomer’s attention, Jack moved his foot to a position where with his toe he could tap on Art’s ankles. It was sufficient for the purpose apparently, for, out of the tail of his eye Jack saw Art’s body stiffen and his head lift up slightly from the ground. For what followed, however, he was totally unprepared.

Unobtrusively, so as not to draw the newcomer’s attention, Jack shifted his foot to a spot where he could tap Art's ankles with his toe. This seemed to work, as Jack noticed out of the corner of his eye that Art's body tensed and his head lifted slightly off the ground. However, he was completely unprepared for what happened next.

Art sprang to his feet, leaped forward and began thumping the newcomer vigorously on the back.

Art jumped to his feet, rushed over, and started patting the newcomer hard on the back.

“Why, you ol’ son-of-a-gun,” he cried. “You ol’ son-of-a-gun.” 196

“Why, you old son of a gun,” he exclaimed. “You old son of a gun.” 196

“Li’l Artie, or I’m goin’ blind,” cried the other, seizing Art by the hand and pumping up and down.

“Little Artie, or I’m going blind,” shouted the other, grabbing Art's hand and pumping it up and down.

Jack turned in amazement to Art.

Jack turned in surprise to Art.

“Why—why—you know each other!” he cried.

“Why—why—you two know each other!” he exclaimed.

“Know each other? Har, har, har,” roared the giant, in a guffaw that aroused the others about the campfire. “Know each other? That’s a good one.”

“Know each other? Ha, ha, ha,” laughed the giant, in a loud burst of laughter that got the others around the campfire laughing too. “Know each other? That’s a good joke.”

Mr. Hampton, Farnum, Bob and Frank, Farrell and several of the others gathered around, looking their questions, and Art turned to satisfy them.

Mr. Hampton, Farnum, Bob and Frank, Farrell, and several others gathered around, looking for answers to their questions, and Art turned to satisfy them.

“Ever hear o’ Long Jim Golden?” he asked. “Well, this is him—the daggonedest trapper on the face o’ the earth. Ain’t seen him in years since he left Circle City in the rush. Where you been, Jim?”

“Ever heard of Long Jim Golden?” he asked. “Well, this is him—the craziest trapper on the face of the earth. Haven't seen him in years since he left Circle City during the rush. Where have you been, Jim?”

“Trappin’.” Jim looked around at the interested faces. “You tol’ who I am,” he said. “Now tell me who’s your friends, Artie.”

“Trappin’.” Jim glanced at the curious faces. “You told them who I am,” he said. “Now tell me who your friends are, Artie.”

“Sure,” said Art heartily, effecting introductions. “Here we all are,” he concluded, and then his face fell as he added: “but where we’ll be soon, I don’t know, nor what’s to become of us.”

“Sure,” said Art cheerfully, making introductions. “Here we all are,” he finished, and then his expression changed as he added: “but I don’t know where we’ll be soon, or what’s going to happen to us.”

Long Jim looked first at one, then at another, then his eyes roved over the camp.

Long Jim looked at one person, then at another, and then his eyes scanned the whole camp.

“How come?” he asked. “No sleds nor dogs nor snowshoes nor nothin’. How come?”

“How come?” he asked. “No sleds, no dogs, no snowshoes, nothing. How come?”

“Sit here by the fire and I’ll tell you, Jim,” said Art. “The rest o’ you, we won’t bother you none 197 with loud voices. We’ll jest whisper-like. You’ll want to turn in and sleep, so go to it.”

“Sit here by the fire and I’ll tell you, Jim,” said Art. “The rest of you, we won't disturb you with loud voices. We’ll just talk quietly. You’ll want to go to bed and sleep, so do that.” 197

Nothing loath, the others with the exception of Jack, who moved to one side so as not to intrude on the two old acquaintances thus strangely reunited, turned in and soon were once more asleep.

Nothing hesitant, the others, except for Jack, who stepped aside to avoid interrupting the two old friends who were oddly reconnected, turned in and quickly fell asleep again.

Briefly as possible, Art explained to Long Jim the circumstances leading up to their present position. From across the fire, Jack watched them. He saw that Long Jim paid close attention to Art’s narrative and that, indeed, it seemed to affect him strangely. For over his open, rugged features, not constructed to conceal their owner’s moods, swept doubt, uncertainty, indecision, as if within the man was going on a fight between two contending forces. Jack was puzzled. What could Long Jim be thinking of?

Briefly, Art explained to Long Jim the situation that led them to where they were now. From across the fire, Jack watched them. He noticed that Long Jim was really focused on Art’s story and that it seemed to impact him in an unusual way. Doubt, uncertainty, and indecision crossed Long Jim's open, rugged face, which wasn't built to hide his feelings, as if there was a struggle happening inside him between two opposing forces. Jack was confused. What could Long Jim be thinking?

Then Long Jim slowly rose to his feet, placing a hand on the shoulder of his companion who remained seated but looking up at him. Jack unconsciously moved closer as the big trapper appeared about to speak. He did not want to eavesdrop, but Long Jim’s expression had puzzled him greatly. What could it mean?

Then Long Jim slowly got up, putting a hand on the shoulder of his companion who stayed seated but was looking up at him. Jack instinctively moved closer as the big trapper seemed ready to say something. He didn't mean to eavesdrop, but Long Jim’s expression really confused him. What could it mean?

“Artie,” said Long Jim in a louder tone than that in which their whispered conversation had been carried on, and one that reached Jack’s ears, “Artie, my 198 boy,” he said, “I wish you didn’t have them skunks with ye.”

“Artie,” Long Jim called out in a louder voice than their earlier whispered conversation, one that Jack could hear, “Artie, my boy,” he said, “I wish you didn’t have those skunks with you.”

“Them breeds,” said Art, jerking a thumb back over a shoulder to indicate the prisoners sleeping about the other fire.

“Them breeds,” Art said, pointing back over his shoulder to indicate the prisoners sleeping near the other fire.

“Them same,” said Long Jim. “Cause why, you asks me? Cause I got a paradise to take you all to, where you can spend the Winter lapped in comfort. An’ I don’t want to take no rascals like them half-breeds there. But——”

“The same,” said Long Jim. “Why do you ask me? Because I have a paradise to take you all to, where you can spend the winter wrapped in comfort. And I don’t want to bring any troublemakers like those half-breeds there. But——”

Art was on his feet, excitement struggling with disbelief.

Art was on his feet, excitement battling with disbelief.

“What? What you mean, Long Jim?”

“What? What do you mean, Long Jim?”

“Jest what I says,” answered the other emphatically. “A paradise, I calls it. An’ a paradise it is. An’ the quicker we git there the better, so wake up your friends an’ let me talk to ’em. If we have to take them skunks, why, we’ll take ’em.”

“Just what I say,” the other responded emphatically. “I call it a paradise. And it really is a paradise. The sooner we get there, the better, so wake up your friends and let me talk to them. If we have to take those losers, then we’ll take them.”

199CHAPTER XXIV.—A TALE OF PARADISE.

At the insistence of Long Jim, Art and Jack, who had been called to join the pair, speedily re-aroused their friends.

At Long Jim's urging, Art and Jack, who had been asked to join him, quickly woke up their friends.

“I ain’t no hand for talkin’,” Long Jim declared in answer to Art’s requests for further information. “I got to tell this. But onct oughter be enough. No use my tellin’ you an’ then tellin’ the rest o’ them all over agin.”

“I’m not one for talking,” Long Jim said in response to Art’s requests for more information. “I need to say this. But once should be enough. There’s no point in telling you and then telling everyone else all over again.”

Jack smiled discreetly. Long Jim claimed he was “no hand for talking,” yet his tongue wagged continually. However, his heart seemed in the right place, and certainly he spoke emphatically enough of a haven not too far away to which they could go for refuge. What was it he called it? “Paradise.” Jack was anxious to hear, and wasted no time on gentle methods in arousing the sleepers.

Jack smiled quietly. Long Jim said he was “not much of a talker,” yet he kept chatting away. Still, his heart seemed to be in the right place, and he certainly spoke passionately enough about a place not too far away where they could find safety. What did he call it? “Paradise.” Jack was eager to listen and didn't waste any time gently waking up the others.

“Lookit here,” said Long Jim, as the circle gathered around him. “Art’s been tellin’ me the trouble you folks is in. Looks to me like you moughtn’t be able to make it out o’ this country.” 200

“Hey everyone,” said Long Jim as the group gathered around him. “Art has been telling me about the trouble you all are in. It seems to me like you might not be able to make it out of this country.” 200

Mr. Hampton nodded grave confirmation.

Mr. Hampton nodded seriously.

“Well, I know of a place that’s paradise,” said Long Jim, impressively. “An’ I’ll take ye all there, an’ ye can spend the Winter—warm, game, everything there. Only thing, like I tol’ Artie here, is I hate to have to take them skunks o’ half-breeds in there. They’ll be a-comin’ back later an’ ruin the country.”

“Well, I know a place that's paradise,” said Long Jim, confidently. “And I’ll take you all there, and you can spend the winter—nice and warm, with plenty of game and everything. The only thing, like I told Artie here, is I really don’t want to bring those half-breeds in there. They’ll come back later and ruin the place.”

“But I don’t understand,” said Mr. Hampton. “What is it you are talking about?”

“But I don’t get it,” said Mr. Hampton. “What are you talking about?”

“Don’t blame ye,” said Long Jim. “Think maybe the ol’ man’s crazy, don’t ye? Don’t blame ye for that, neither. But, look here, night’s dyin’ an’ if ye stand up an’ look where I’m pointin’ ye’ll see somethin’.”

“Don’t blame yourself,” said Long Jim. “You think the old man’s crazy, right? I don’t blame you for that, either. But, look, the night’s fading, and if you stand up and look where I’m pointing, you’ll see something.”

Mr. Hampton arose wonderingly, and the others also stood up.

Mr. Hampton got up in amazement, and the others stood up too.

“Thar,” said Long Jim, stretching an arm to the westward. “What d’ye see?”

“Over there,” said Long Jim, extending his arm to the west. “What do you see?”

“Why—a great bank of fog,” said Mr. Hampton, after gazing intently. “How strange. Fog in Winter. I don’t understand.”

“Why—a huge bank of fog,” said Mr. Hampton, after staring hard. “How odd. Fog in winter. I don’t get it.”

“An’ ye all think that’s fog, hey?” asked Long Jim, turning to the others.

“Do you all really think that’s fog, huh?” asked Long Jim, turning to the others.

Nodding heads answered.

Nodding heads responded.

“Well, it ain’t,” he said. “That’s the vapor from hot springs.” 201

“Well, it isn’t,” he said. “That’s the steam from hot springs.” 201

“Hot springs?” Mr. Hampton sounded frankly incredulous.

“Hot springs?” Mr. Hampton sounded genuinely skeptical.

“Wait’ll you see for yourself,” said Long Jim, tolerantly. “I wouldn’t believe it, neither, when I first saw it. I thought it was fog, too. But bein’ as how heavy fog in the Winter were strange, I went to investigate. An’ I found paradise.”

“Wait until you see for yourself,” said Long Jim, patiently. “I wouldn’t have believed it either when I first saw it. I thought it was fog, too. But since heavy fog in the winter is unusual, I went to check it out. And I found paradise.”

Then, under Mr. Hampton’s skillful questioning, Long Jim told his story. He declared he had lived in this region now these two years, and that since first arriving he had seen nobody except themselves. Drawn by the seeming fog to investigate, he had come upon an almost tropical valley through which ran not only one but several rivers of water forever at the boiling point. These rivers, moreover, he said, were fed by hundreds of hot springs, which bubbled out of the ground in all directions. It was the steam from these which, condensing as it rose above the valley and struck the cold Winter air, had formed the fog which first attracted his attention.

Then, with Mr. Hampton’s skilled questioning, Long Jim shared his story. He said he had lived in this area for two years and that since he arrived, he hadn’t seen anyone except for them. Drawn by the fog that seemed intriguing, he discovered an almost tropical valley where not just one, but several rivers of water were always boiling. He also mentioned that these rivers were fed by hundreds of hot springs that bubbled up from the ground in all directions. It was the steam from these springs that, as it rose above the valley and hit the cold winter air, had created the fog that first caught his attention.

“Once I were in South America,” said Long Jim. “Down clost to the Equator. Well, I’m tellin’ you, it were that hot all last Summer right in that valley. As for right now, ye’ll find it mighty pleasant an’ warm, an’ when snow falls it’s only rain by the time it passes through the heat hangin’ over that valley all the time.”

“Once I was in South America,” said Long Jim. “Down close to the Equator. Well, I’m telling you, it was so hot all last summer right in that valley. As for right now, you’ll find it really pleasant and warm, and when snow falls, it’s just rain by the time it passes through the heat hanging over that valley all the time.”

“Hurray,” cried Frank, exuberantly. “Let’s go. 202 No snow fellows. Get that? I’ve had all the snow I need for one season, anyway, and I guess I can get along without any more for some time to come.”

“Yay,” shouted Frank, full of excitement. “Let’s go. 202 No more snow, got it? I’ve had enough snow for one season, and I think I can manage without any more for a while.”

Mr. Hampton smiled, but, disregarding Frank’s jubilation, proceeded with his questioning. And Long Jim, delighted with an audience to which he could talk all he pleased, after having been without companions for several years, continued unfolding new wonders.

Mr. Hampton smiled, but ignoring Frank’s excitement, continued with his questioning. And Long Jim, thrilled to have an audience he could talk to without limit after being alone for several years, kept sharing new wonders.

This valley, he declared, was about 200 miles long and 40 miles wide. They were now near its upper end, to which point Long Jim had made his way by slow travel and exploration during the two years since his arrival at the southern end.

This valley, he said, was around 200 miles long and 40 miles wide. They were now close to its upper end, which Long Jim had reached through slow travel and exploration over the two years since he arrived at the southern end.

Game?

Game on?

At the question, Long Jim grew even more eloquent.

At the question, Long Jim became even more expressive.

He declared that, due to the heat generated by the hot springs and the boiling rivers, the fertility of the soil was amazing. The vegetation, in fact, achieved a jungle growth. Wild rose bushes grew tall as trees, with stems as thick as a man’s forearm and so dense that it was impossible to force a way through them. Willows grew to the size of big trees, with branches so thick it was possible to walk along them.

He said that because of the heat from the hot springs and the boiling rivers, the soil was incredibly fertile. The plants actually grew like a jungle. Wild rose bushes reached the height of trees, with stems as thick as a man's forearm and so dense that it was impossible to get through them. Willows grew as large as big trees, with branches thick enough to walk along.

“An’ birches,” added Long Jim, “git to be hunderds o’ feet tall, so tall, in fact, they can’t hold 203 themselves up but bend over an’ touch the ground.

“Then birches,” added Long Jim, “get to be hundreds of feet tall, so tall, in fact, they can’t support themselves and bend over and touch the ground. 203

“Likely you think I’m out o’ my head. Oh, I kin see it in your eyes. But I’m tellin’ you the God’s truth, men.” And Long Jim spoke with such honest sincerity, they were compelled to believe him. “In sich a place,” he continued, “it ain’t likely there wouldn’t be no game. Why, the animals there is thick as flees on a ol’ hound.

“Probably you think I’m crazy. Oh, I can see it in your eyes. But I’m telling you the honest truth, guys.” And Long Jim spoke with such sincere honesty that they had to believe him. “In a place like that,” he continued, “there’s no way there wouldn’t be any game. The animals there are as thick as fleas on an old hound."

“Mountain sheep, goats, caribou, moose, bear, deer, wolves, foxes, oh, every wild animal o’ the whole North kin be found there—down in that valley an’ in the mountains enclosin’ of it. An’ I tell you the truth,” he concluded, his voice sinking for effect, “the moose git so fat they’re almost square an’ they’re so darn tame ye can almost touch ’em.”

“Mountain sheep, goats, caribou, moose, bears, deer, wolves, foxes—every wild animal in the whole North can be found there, down in that valley and in the surrounding mountains. And I’m telling you the truth,” he finished, lowering his voice for emphasis, “the moose get so fat they’re almost square, and they’re so incredibly tame you can almost touch them.”

As Long Jim’s speech came to a halt, Mr. Hampton turned and stared across the brightening landscape to the distant bank of vapor. Soon the short days would end entirely, and the perpetual night of the Arctic would arrive. Only a miracle could save them from perishing, all unprepared to face further travel as they were. Could it be possible that miracle had occurred, and that this trapper was telling the truth?

As Long Jim finished speaking, Mr. Hampton turned and gazed over the brightening landscape towards the distant strip of mist. Soon, the short days would completely come to an end, and the endless night of the Arctic would settle in. Only a miracle could save them from perishing, especially since they were unprepared for any more travel. Could it be that a miracle had happened, and that this trapper was speaking the truth?

Jack looked at his father, and sensed what was passing through the older man’s mind. Truth to tell, some such thoughts were in his own. He went up to him and laid a hand across his shoulders. 204

Jack looked at his dad and felt what was going through the older man's mind. To be honest, he had similar thoughts himself. He walked over and put a hand on his shoulders. 204

“Come on, Dad,” he said. “I believe Long Jim is telling the truth. And we better make the effort to get to this valley. He may be exaggerating a little, but certainly it looks like a promised land.”

“Come on, Dad,” he said. “I think Long Jim is being honest. We should definitely try to get to this valley. He might be overdoing it a bit, but it really does seem like a promised land.”

“That’s right, Jack,” said his father, shaking off his reverie, and his alert self once more. “We’ll have a hard enough struggle getting there, what with having to cross this waste of new-fallen snow without snowshoes or sleds. Well, let’s see what can be done.”

“That’s right, Jack,” his father said, snapping out of his daydream and back to reality. “It’s going to be tough getting there, especially since we have to trek across this field of fresh snow without snowshoes or sleds. Let’s figure out what we can do.”

Eventually, the party got into motion. The canoes were cached, where they could be recovered in the Summer. There was little likelihood anybody else would pass that way, to appropriate them. Equipment was made into packs shouldered by everybody except Art and Bob. These two were to carry Thorwaldsson on a stretcher, improvised out of poles cut on the river bank, and blankets.

Eventually, the party got moving. The canoes were stored where they could be retrieved in the summer. There was little chance anyone else would come that way to take them. Equipment was packed into bundles that everyone except Art and Bob carried. Those two were responsible for transporting Thorwaldsson on a stretcher, made from poles cut from the riverbank and blankets.

Fortunately, the crest of the valley to which Long Jim was guiding them was distant not more than five or six miles. Even at that, however, the going was tremendously difficult because of the mass of new-fallen snow. Had it not been for Long Jim to break the way on his snowshoes, moreover, it is doubtful whether they could have made it, heavy laden as they were. But Long Jim worked patiently backward and forward, breaking down the snow, 205 and packing it a second and even a third time with his webs.

Luckily, the top of the valley that Long Jim was leading them to was only about five or six miles away. Even so, the journey was incredibly tough due to the thick layer of fresh snow. If it hadn't been for Long Jim clearing a path on his snowshoes, it's uncertain if they would have been able to make it, especially with all their heavy gear. But Long Jim worked tirelessly, moving back and forth, breaking down the snow, 205 and packing it down a second and even a third time with his snowshoes.

“How come you were out here, ol’ timer?” asked Art once, as Long Jim paused, and he caught up with him.

“How come you were out here, old timer?” Art asked as Long Jim paused, and he caught up with him.

“Well, I git lonesome a leetle,” said Long Jim. “I was prospectin’ around in the mountains rimmin’ the valley yestiddy, an’ I saw you across the snow. Jest leetle specks you were, but agin the snow I thought you were humans. I couldn’t hardly believe my eyes, but I come along investigatin’. An’ then when night come on, you lit your fires, an’——”

“Well, I get a little lonely,” said Long Jim. “I was exploring the mountains around the valley yesterday, and I saw you across the snow. You were just tiny specs, but against the snow, I thought you were people. I could hardly believe my eyes, so I came over to check it out. And then when night fell, you lit your fires, and——”

“Sure was lucky for us, Long Jim, if you ain’t a-lyin’,” said Art.

“Sure was lucky for us, Long Jim, if you’re not lying,” said Art.

Long Jim stiffened, and for a moment was prepared to stand on his dignity but then he smiled in a jolly way that sent crinkly wrinkles all around his blue eyes.

Long Jim stiffened, and for a moment, he was ready to act all high and mighty, but then he smiled in a cheerful way that created crinkly lines around his blue eyes.

“Don’t blame ye for that, Artie,” he said. “Sounds like I were crazy, don’t it? But jest wait till you see.”

“Don’t blame me for that, Artie,” he said. “Sounds like I’m crazy, doesn’t it? But just wait till you see.”

206CHAPTER XXV.—VOICES FROM THE WILDERNESS.

But Long Jim had not falsified. The valley proved, indeed, to be more even than he described, for as the world now knows important mineral deposits were discovered, including gold, silver, copper, coal, iron and oil. But of the development going on to bring not only this marvelous region but the vast oil region beyond the Coppermine into the world’s resources naught need be said now. Suffice it to say that such development is under way, for Mr. Hampton had the ear of the great financiers, and was able to bring it about; and also that Farrell and Long Jim are receiving handsome incomes from their shares in the various projects.

But Long Jim was truthful. The valley turned out to be even better than he described, as the world now knows significant mineral deposits were found, including gold, silver, copper, coal, iron, and oil. There’s no need to discuss the development happening to bring not only this amazing area but also the extensive oil region beyond the Coppermine into the world’s resources right now. It’s enough to say that such development is in progress, since Mr. Hampton had the attention of major financiers and was able to make it happen; and also that Farrell and Long Jim are earning good incomes from their shares in the various projects.

Here the party settled down, constructed huts, and prepared to await the coming of Spring when the snow should disappear from the vast wilderness separating them from the northern edge of the civilized lands and the ice in the rivers be unlocked.

Here the group set up camp, built huts, and got ready to wait for Spring when the snow would melt away from the vast wilderness separating them from the northern edge of the civilized world and the ice in the rivers would break apart.

One of the first things done by the boys was to 207 erect their radio plant, and they succeeded without much difficulty in opening communication with the little Fort of the Northwest Mounted Police on the farthest rim of the settled country. MacDonald and Dick, with their prisoners, had arrived only a day or two before communication was opened, and the two parties exchanged the stories of their adventures by radio.

One of the first things the boys did was to 207 set up their radio station, and they managed to easily establish communication with the small Fort of the Northwest Mounted Police on the edge of the settled area. MacDonald and Dick, along with their prisoners, had shown up just a day or two before the communication began, and the two groups shared their stories of adventure via radio.

To Long Jim the radio was as great a source of wonder as Long Jim’s valley was to the boys. He could never get over marveling at it, and every time that it was brought into use, Long Jim, if he were in the vicinity, was on hand, sitting in rapt and open-mouthed astonishment while the boys operated the instruments.

To Long Jim, the radio was just as amazing as Long Jim's valley was to the boys. He could never stop being in awe of it, and every time it was used, Long Jim would be nearby, sitting in wide-eyed wonder while the boys worked the instruments.

Much time was spent in exploring this wonderful valley, at the resources of which Mr. Hampton could never express sufficient astonishment.

A lot of time was spent exploring this amazing valley, and Mr. Hampton could never express enough surprise at its resources.

“It is a freak of nature, of course, boys,” he explained on one occasion.

“It’s a freak of nature, of course, guys,” he explained one time.

“How wonderful that it should have remained undiscovered for so long,” said Jack.

“How amazing that it stayed hidden for so long,” said Jack.

“Not so marvelous,” said his father. “Few, indeed, are the people who ever have penetrated any distance into all this vast wilderness of northern Canada. It was supposed, and still is generally supposed, to be bleak and uninhabitable. You know from experience that the contrary is the case. It 208 is delightful country in Summer, and man is so constituted that, if properly clothed and housed, he can stand any severity of Winter. Some day, I predict, all this vast wilderness through which we have been making our way will be settled. That day is far off, of course, but it is coming. The growth of world population will force the conquest of the sub-Arctic.”

“Not so amazing,” said his father. “Few, really, are the people who have ever ventured far into this vast wilderness of northern Canada. It was thought, and still is generally thought, to be desolate and unlivable. You know from experience that it’s actually the opposite. It’s a beautiful place in the summer, and people are made so that, if properly dressed and sheltered, they can handle any harshness of winter. Someday, I predict, all this vast wilderness we’ve been traveling through will be settled. That day is still far off, of course, but it’s coming. The growth of the world population will necessitate the taming of the sub-Arctic.”

The one thing making their stay in this valley of marvels unpleasant was the constant rainfall. For in the Arctic storm succeeds storm, sweeping down from the North Pole in never-ending succession. And these storms which they knew were burying the land beyond the valley under a pall of ice and snow poured torrents of water on them. The peaks of the mountain ranges rimming the valley were buried under snow, gleaming wan in the occasional moonlight between the storms, for by now the long night had come. But on them no snow fell, for as Long Jim had foretold the snow as it passed through the temperate air created by the eternally hot rivers and springs was transformed into rain.

The one thing that made their time in this valley of wonders unpleasant was the constant rain. In the Arctic, one storm follows another, tumbling down from the North Pole in an endless cycle. These storms, which they knew were covering the land beyond the valley with layers of ice and snow, poured heavy rain on them. The peaks of the mountain ranges surrounding the valley were buried in snow, shining faintly in the occasional moonlight between storms, since the long night had now arrived. But no snow fell on them, because, as Long Jim had predicted, the snow passing through the warm air created by the always hot rivers and springs turned into rain.

Two events of importance marked their stay. One was the escape of their prisoners, together with some rifles which they succeeded in stealing. Pursuit in the darkness, and through the jungle-like reaches of the forest was almost hopeless and was quickly abandoned. Nor, although vigilant watch 209 was kept to prevent surprise, did they ever see sign of the half-breeds again.

Two significant events marked their stay. One was the escape of their prisoners, along with some rifles that they managed to steal. Pursuing them in the darkness through the jungle-like parts of the forest was nearly impossible and was soon given up. Despite keeping a close watch to avoid any surprises, they never saw any sign of the half-breeds again. 209

“It’s a big valley,” said Mr. Hampton, “and I doubt whether they will attempt to attack us. Rather, they will keep out of our way. They are poorly armed and inferior in numbers, since we have all come together. Their escape, I imagine, was incited by a fear of what awaited them if we succeeded in getting them back to civilization and the courts. Well,” he said, with a sigh, “I regret, of course, the loss of witnesses to substantiate the charges of deviltry which I shall surely bring against Grimm. Nevertheless, I am glad to be rid of them.”

“It’s a big valley,” Mr. Hampton said, “and I doubt they’ll try to attack us. Instead, they’ll probably just steer clear of us. They’re poorly armed and outnumbered since we’re all together. I imagine they ran away because they were scared of what would happen if we brought them back to civilization and the courts. Well,” he sighed, “I regret losing witnesses who could back up the accusations of wrongdoing I’ll definitely make against Grimm. Still, I’m glad to be rid of them.”

It was a sentiment in which all concurred.

It was a feeling that everyone agreed with.

The other event referred to was the opening by means of relayed messages via the Mounted Post and Edmonton of communication by radio with Mr. Temple in faraway New York. When word reached Bob’s father that the Hampton party was safe and sound and wintering in the wilderness, he quit work for the day, despite the fact that a big business deal was clamoring for his attention, and sped by motor down to his Long Island home.

The other event mentioned was the opening of communication via radio with Mr. Temple in distant New York, using relayed messages through the Mounted Post and Edmonton. When Bob’s father heard that the Hampton party was safe and spending the winter in the wilderness, he left work for the day, even though a significant business deal needed his focus, and hurried by car down to his Long Island home.

Bob’s sister, Della, was sitting in the library, staring spiritlessly out at the Winter landscape. Mr. Temple stole up behind her and, reaching over her 210 shoulder, thrust the message from the radio corporation under her eyes.

Bob’s sister, Della, was sitting in the library, looking vacantly at the winter scenery. Mr. Temple quietly approached her and, leaning over her shoulder, pushed the message from the radio company in front of her. 210

Della’s glance fell and she began to read the printed words. Then she leaped up, whirled around, her eyes like two stars, and threw her arms around her father’s neck.

Della looked down and started reading the printed words. Then she jumped up, spun around, her eyes shining like two stars, and wrapped her arms around her father’s neck.

“Oh, Daddy, Dad-dee,” she screamed.

“Oh, Daddy!” she screamed.

He held her off at arm’s length and looked at her. Her eyes began to fill up with happy tears, and once more she threw herself into his arms.

He kept her at arm's length and looked at her. Her eyes started to fill with joyful tears, and once again she threw herself into his arms.

“Well, kiddy, cry all you want to,” he said, comfortingly, patting her on the back. “I guess that’s the medicine you needed. You’ll be all right now.”

“Well, kid, cry as much as you need to,” he said, reassuringly, patting her on the back. “I guess that’s the medicine you needed. You’ll be fine now.”

Mr. Temple’s words bore reference to the fact that for months Della’s health had been failing, and she had shown so little interest in her studies that it had been considered wiser to take her out of the boarding school which she attended, and bring her home.

Mr. Temple’s words referred to the fact that for months, Della’s health had been declining, and she had shown so little interest in her studies that it was deemed better to take her out of the boarding school she was attending and bring her home.

“Oh, yes, Dad-dee,” she sobbed, her face buried in his coat. “I’ll be all right now.”

“Oh, yes, Daddy,” she cried, her face buried in his coat. “I’ll be okay now.”

Then she lifted her tear-stained cheeks and asked anxiously:

Then she lifted her tear-streaked cheeks and asked anxiously:

“It says they are all safe—all? Doesn’t it?”

“It says they are all safe—all? Right?”

Mr. Temple nodded, a mischievous twinkle in his eyes.

Mr. Temple nodded, a playful sparkle in his eyes.

“Yes, kiddy,” he said. “Frank’s safe, too.” 211

“Yes, kiddo,” he said. “Frank’s safe, too.” 211

“Oh, Dad-dee, I didn’t mean that,” said Della, blushing furiously.

“Oh, Dad, I didn’t mean that,” said Della, blushing fiercely.

“No need to fib to me, kiddy,” said her father. “Bob is only a brother; but Frank——”

“No need to lie to me, kid,” said her father. “Bob is just a brother; but Frank——”

“No, you shan’t say it,” laughed Della, and she placed a hand over his mouth.

“No, you can’t say it,” laughed Della, and she put a hand over his mouth.

Nevertheless, it was to be noted that from that time on Della no longer moped and looked ill, but took an intense interest in all the daily affairs of life, even wanting to return at once to school.

Nevertheless, it should be noted that from that time on, Della no longer sulked or looked unwell; instead, she became very interested in all the everyday happenings of life, even wanting to go back to school right away.

“Marjie Faulkner will be dying to talk things over with me,” she explained to her mother.

“Marjie Faulkner is really eager to talk things over with me,” she told her mother.

“Why, dear, what do you mean?”

“Why, dear, what do you mean?”

“Well—you know—she’s sweet on Bob.”

"Well—you know—she likes Bob."

“Oh, you girls,” said Mrs. Temple, with a sigh. “You’ll be the death of me. At your age——”

“Oh, you girls,” Mrs. Temple said with a sigh. “You’re going to be the end of me. At your age—”

“At our age you were engaged to Father,” said Della. “Now don’t deny it. Dad has even told me how you planned to elope, but were overheard by your mother who persuaded you to be conventional and have a wedding at home.”

“At our age, you were engaged to Dad,” Della said. “Now don’t deny it. He even told me how you planned to run away together, but your mom overheard and convinced you to do the traditional wedding at home.”

Mr. Temple looked across the dinner table at his wife and grinned shamelessly.

Mr. Temple looked across the dinner table at his wife and grinned widely.

“George, did you tell her that?”

“George, did you say that to her?”

“Why not? It was the truth.”

“Why not? That was the truth.”

“Oh, George. Aren’t children nowadays hard enough to handle as it is, without letting them know how silly we older people were once?” 212

“Oh, George. Aren’t kids today tough enough to deal with as it is, without letting them know how ridiculous we older folks used to be?” 212

“Now, Mother,” said Della, rising quickly and going to her mother’s side, and kissing her. “Don’t scold Father. Can’t you see he’s dreaming of that day again?”

“Now, Mom,” said Della, quickly getting up and moving to her mother’s side, and kissing her. “Don’t be hard on Dad. Can’t you see he’s daydreaming about that day again?”

And dancing to her father’s side, Della dropped a kiss on the spot where his hair was thinning out, and then danced gaily from the dining-room.

And dancing over to her father's side, Della kissed the spot where his hair was thinning, and then cheerfully danced out of the dining room.

Once more Mr. Temple grinned at his wife, as he sipped his coffee. Then putting down the cup, he leaned forward and said confidentially:

Once again, Mr. Temple smiled at his wife while sipping his coffee. Then, setting down the cup, he leaned in and said privately:

“You do remember that time, don’t you, dear?”

“You remember that time, right, dear?”

Mrs. Temple started to say something sharp by way of reproof for his silliness, but a softened look came into her eyes as she stared back. The years that intervened since their youth seemed to slip away.

Mrs. Temple started to say something cutting to correct his foolishness, but a gentle look filled her eyes as she gazed back. The years that had passed since their youth seemed to fade away.

“Why, George,” she said. “You look positively handsome.”

“Why, George,” she said. “You look really handsome.”

As for Della, a telegram to her friend, Marjorie Faulkner, apprised the latter of the message from the Far North to the effect that the lost had been found. And Della soon followed her message in person. Thereafter the two girls were never tired of talking about the possible adventures that had befallen the boys, and while Marjorie sang Bob’s praises, Della sang Frank’s. Poor Jack, it is to be feared, was somewhat slighted in these discussions. 213

As for Della, she sent a telegram to her friend, Marjorie Faulkner, letting her know that the lost had been found. Della quickly visited her friend in person after sending the message. From then on, the two girls never got tired of chatting about the possible adventures that the boys might have experienced, and while Marjorie praised Bob, Della praised Frank. Poor Jack, however, seemed to be somewhat overlooked in their conversations. 213

“I’ll warrant you that Bob saved the day for them all,” Marjorie said on one occasion. “He’s so big and strong.”

“I bet Bob saved the day for everyone,” Marjorie said once. “He’s really big and strong.”

“Well,” flashed Della, “Bob’s my brother, and that’s all right. But if they ever got in a tight pinch, I’m sure it was Frank that got them out. He’s got more brains than all the rest put together.”

“Well,” said Della, “Bob’s my brother, and that’s fine. But if they ever found themselves in a tough situation, I’m sure it was Frank who helped them out. He’s got more smarts than everyone else combined.”

“Oh, Della, how can you say that?” cried Marjorie.

“Oh, Della, how can you say that?” Marjorie exclaimed.

“Well, just because Bob is my brother must I be always praising him?” demanded Della.

“Well, just because Bob is my brother do I have to always praise him?” Della asked.

For a moment the two girls positively glared at each other.

For a moment, the two girls stared each other down.

Then the twinkle began to come, and they laughed.

Then the sparkle started to appear, and they laughed.

Then they were hugging each other.

Then they were hugging each other.

And then they were at it again.

And then they were at it again.

214CHAPTER XXVI.—TREED BY WOLVES.

One more adventure, and that a serious one, was to befall the boys as a final taste of life in the wilderness. One day towards the end of Winter, when the sky cleared after several days of tremendous rain, the three boys who had been cooped up in their quarters and had worn out even the amusement of listening to the Edmonton radio concerts or communicating with the Post of the Mounted, announced they were going hunting.

One more adventure, and it was a big one, was about to happen for the boys as a last experience of life in the wild. One day toward the end of winter, when the sky cleared after several days of heavy rain, the three boys who had been stuck in their quarters and had grown tired of even listening to the Edmonton radio concerts or chatting with the Mounted Post, declared they were going hunting.

The supply of fresh meat had fallen pretty low, and additions to their larder would not be unwelcome. Accordingly, Mr. Hampton made no objection to their departure, but insisted that Art or Long Jim accompany them.

The supply of fresh meat had dropped quite low, and any additions to their storage would be appreciated. So, Mr. Hampton didn't object to their leaving but insisted that Art or Long Jim go with them.

“I’d be no good,” said Long Jim. “Sence I did that fool trick o’ cuttin’ my hand with the axe a couple-three days ago, I cain’t set finger to trigger. You better go, Art.”

“I wouldn’t be any good,” said Long Jim. “Ever since I did that stupid thing of cutting my hand with the axe a few days ago, I can’t even touch the trigger. You should go, Art.”

“All right, boys,” said Art. “I’d like to stretch a leg, too.” 215

“All right, guys,” said Art. “I’d like to stretch my legs, too.” 215

The four, accordingly, set out. In the forest surrounding the spot where they had chosen to erect their huts, there was no longer any game, for the animals had come to learn that these strange creatures brought destruction and had decamped elsewhere. Finally, after they had proceeded some distance without sighting anything, Art suggested they strike for a higher level on the adjacent mountain side. The huts had been erected near the foot of one of the ranges rimming the valley.

The four of them set out. In the forest around the area where they chose to build their huts, there was no game left because the animals had learned that these strange beings brought destruction and had moved elsewhere. After traveling for a while without seeing anything, Art suggested they head up to a higher spot on the nearby mountainside. The huts had been built near the base of one of the ranges surrounding the valley.

“Maybe we’ll run into a mountain sheep or a goat,” he said. “Anyhow, we can see better from a higher lever, for this forest down here is so thick you can hardly see a yard away. The moon’s out an’ up there the trees is thinner.”

“Maybe we’ll come across a mountain sheep or a goat,” he said. “Anyway, we can see better from a higher level because this forest down here is so dense you can hardly see a yard away. The moon’s out, and up there the trees are thinner.”

With Art leading the way, the party began its upward climb. For some time they toiled upward until presently they reached a level unaffected by the more temperate air of the valley floor, and where, as a consequence, snow covered the rocks. Across a bare shoulder of rock from which the wind had swept all but a trace of snow they made their way and then plunged into a thick woods beyond.

With Art in the lead, the group started their climb. They worked hard for a while until they finally reached a level that wasn't influenced by the milder air of the valley floor, where snow blanketed the rocks. They crossed a bare section of rock that the wind had cleared of nearly all the snow and then entered a dense forest beyond.

Frank, who was in the rear, laid down his rifle and bent over to adjust the clumsy lacing of a thick shoe pack of the kind they had made for themselves from the skins of slain animals. The others plodding along, head down, did not notice he had 216 stopped, and kept on going. He spent more time at the task than he had anticipated, and when finally he straightened up and picked up his rifle, they were not in sight.

Frank, who was in the back, set down his rifle and bent over to fix the awkward lacing on a heavy shoe pack they had made from the skins of animals they killed. The others, trudging along with their heads down, didn’t notice he had stopped and kept going. He took longer than he expected on the task, and by the time he stood up and grabbed his rifle, they were nowhere in sight.

Frank was not worried, however, for he felt sure he would be able to trace them in the snow and would soon catch up with them. He set out at a brisk pace. The snow grew deeper, however, where the wind had not had a chance to whisk it away, and the going was hard. He had proceeded some distance before he noticed that he had gotten off the trail left by his companions. Angry with himself for his carelessness, but still not worried, he halted to consider what was best for him to do.

Frank wasn't worried, though, because he was confident he could follow their tracks in the snow and catch up with them soon. He started off at a quick pace. Unfortunately, the snow got deeper in areas where the wind hadn't blown it away, making it tough to walk. He had traveled a good way before realizing he had strayed from the path his friends had taken. Frustrated with himself for being careless, but still not anxious, he stopped to think about what he should do next.

“Shucks,” he said aloud. “Guess I better go back over my steps till I find where I left their trail.”

“Dang it,” he said out loud. “I guess I should retrace my steps until I find where I lost their trail.”

And with this intention, he turned to go back. Even as he did so, he saw a pack of long gray bodies racing through the trees in his direction. At the same instant they gave tongue. It was a pack of wolves. They had scented him and were now lifting the cry which announced their prey was near.

And with that in mind, he turned to head back. Just as he did, he spotted a group of long gray shapes sprinting through the trees toward him. At the same moment, they began to howl. It was a pack of wolves. They had caught his scent and were now raising the call that signaled their prey was close.

Frank started to fling the rifle to his shoulder, but then he lowered it. The flitting forms were still yards away. And although moonlight sifted through the bare limbs of the trees, it did not sufficiently illumine the scene to make the wolves good targets. He decided his best plan would be to seek refuge 217 in a tree first of all, and then he could fire at the wolves at his leisure and with a sureness of aim that would not now be his. These thoughts or reflections flashed through his mind in an instant. The next moment he was putting his plan into execution, and climbing into a tall fir.

Frank raised the rifle to his shoulder but then lowered it. The moving shapes were still yards away. Even though the moonlight filtered through the bare branches of the trees, it wasn't bright enough to clearly see the wolves as targets. He figured the best strategy would be to find refuge in a tree first, and then he could shoot at the wolves at his own pace and with more accuracy than he had right now. These thoughts raced through his mind in a flash. The next moment, he was putting his plan into action and climbing up a tall fir.

He was not a moment too soon, either, for the baying came closer and closer and even as he struggled frantically to climb higher the leader of the wolf pack reached the foot of his refuge, and sprang high into the air. Frank heard the snap of the great jaws, and looked down into a yawning red cavern of a mouth.

He arrived just in time, as the howling got louder and louder. While he desperately tried to climb higher, the leader of the wolf pack reached the base of his hiding spot and leaped into the air. Frank heard the sharp snap of the massive jaws and looked down into a gaping, red maw.

The next moment his rifle slipped from his grasp, and fell on the snout of the wolf who leaped aside in temporary panic. Then the rest of the pack arrived on the scene, jumping and snarling, their heads in the air, their wicked eyes agleam as they scented the prey they had treed but which temporarily had escaped them.

The next moment, his rifle slipped from his grip and landed on the nose of the wolf, which jumped aside in a moment of panic. Then the rest of the pack showed up, leaping and growling, their heads held high, their fierce eyes shining as they caught the scent of the prey they had cornered but which had momentarily gotten away from them.

Frank threw an arm around the main trunk of the tree to steady himself, for he was sick with vexation at his own carelessness in not having properly, secured his rifle. Meantime the wolves circled close about the tree, looking up, and one big fellow even put his forefeet against the trunk and reared high till his head rested on the lowermost branch. Then 218 he retired to join the others, and all squatted in an expectant ring close about the foot of the tree.

Frank wrapped his arm around the main trunk of the tree to steady himself, feeling sick with frustration over his own carelessness for not securing his rifle properly. Meanwhile, the wolves circled closely around the tree, looking up, and one large wolf even put his front paws against the trunk and stood tall until his head rested on the lowest branch. Then he backed away to join the others, and they all sat in an expectant ring around the base of the tree.

When his vexation had passed, Frank set himself to a serious consideration of his position. And at once he realized that he must try before it was too late and they got out of earshot to attract the attention of his comrades. Perhaps already they had gotten beyond reach. At that he had a moment of panic. Then he grew calmer. If they had moved away, he told himself, they would discover his absence presently and retrace their steps in search of him.

When his frustration faded, Frank seriously thought about his situation. He quickly understood that he needed to try to get his friends' attention before it was too late and they were too far away to hear him. Maybe they had already gone out of reach. That thought caused him a brief moment of panic. Then he felt more at ease. If they had moved on, he reasoned, they would notice he was missing soon and come back to look for him.

He still had his revolver. At first he did not trust himself to handle it, because of the trembling of his hands. Then he grew cooler. His hand steadied. He thought he would shout to attract his companions’ attention first of all. And raising his voice, he sent call after call ringing through the forest.

He still had his revolver. At first, he didn't trust himself to handle it because his hands were shaking. Then he calmed down. His hand steadied. He thought he would shout to get his friends' attention first. Raising his voice, he sent call after call echoing through the forest.

The wolves gave back yelp for scream, and soon the whole pack was snarling and yowling and making a terrific, demoniac din.

The wolves responded to the screams with yelps, and soon the entire pack was snarling and howling, creating an incredible, terrifying noise.

The sound steadied him.

The sound calmed him.

“Good,” he thought, “the boys will know there are wolves, anyway.”

“Good,” he thought, “the guys will know there are wolves, at least.”

Their own snarls reacted on the wolves, exciting them. And once more they came up to the foot of the tree, rearing their forefeet against it and leaping 219 upward. It was Frank’s chance, and he took it.

Their own growls triggered the wolves, stirring them up. Once again, they approached the base of the tree, pushing their front paws against it and jumping upward. It was Frank's moment, and he seized it.

With one arm clasping the trunk of the tree, he leaned forward and took careful aim at the biggest of the grey shapes below. At that moment, the wolf opened his mouth in a jaw-clashing howl. It was his last. Frank’s bullet plunged down his throat, and the wolf rolled over in the snow.

With one arm wrapped around the tree trunk, he leaned forward and took careful aim at the biggest of the gray shapes below. At that moment, the wolf let out a jaw-cracking howl. It was his last. Frank’s bullet shot down his throat, and the wolf rolled over in the snow.

His mates without a second’s hesitation deserted their attempts to get at Frank, and began snarling over the dead body. The sight sickened Frank, and he closed his eyes a moment. Then the thought occurred that, if he added several more corpses to the ghoulish feast, he might divert the attention of the rest of the pack to such an extent that he would be able to slip away unseen, perhaps by making his way through the trees for a short distance before jumping to the ground.

His friends immediately gave up trying to reach Frank and started fighting over the dead body. The scene made Frank feel nauseous, and he shut his eyes for a moment. Then it occurred to him that if he added a few more bodies to the gruesome feast, he might distract the rest of the group enough to slip away unnoticed, maybe by making his way through the trees for a short stretch before dropping to the ground.

There was no need now for care in aiming, as the wolves were in a thick mass over the body of the fallen, so Frank fired several shots in rapid succession into the mass. The effect was instantly apparent, for two more wolves went down, and the tearing and crunching announced a renewal of the awful feast.

There was no need to aim carefully now, since the wolves were crowded together over the body of the fallen. Frank fired several shots in quick succession into the horde. The impact was immediate, as two more wolves fell, and the sounds of tearing and crunching signaled the continuation of the gruesome feast.

Now, thought Frank, was his time to escape, if possible. He had heard no answering replies, and believed his companions must have gotten out of 220 earshot. If so, he must depend on his own resources to make his escape. He was about to start swinging to a nearby tree, the branches of which interlocked with those of the tree in which he had found refuge, when the thought occurred that, perhaps, he would be able to obtain his rifle undiscovered by the wolves.

Now, Frank thought, it was his chance to escape, if he could. He hadn’t heard any responses and believed his companions must have moved out of 220 earshot. If that was the case, he would have to rely on his own skills to get away. He was about to start swinging to a nearby tree, whose branches intertwined with those of the tree he was hiding in, when he realized that maybe he could retrieve his rifle without being noticed by the wolves.

Cautiously he started to descend, his eyes alternately on the snarling wolf pack several yards from the tree and on the limbs he must grip in his descent. He had almost reached the lowermost limb when his grip slipped and he fell.

Cautiously, he began to climb down, keeping an eye on the snarling wolf pack just a few yards away from the tree and on the branches he needed to hold onto as he went down. He was almost at the lowest branch when his grip slipped, and he fell.

Frank thought his end had come, but as he struck the ground his hands closed on the coveted rifle, and he scrabbled to regain his feet, flinging the rifle to his shoulder as he did so.

Frank thought his time was up, but as he hit the ground, his hands grabbed the prized rifle, and he scrambled to get back on his feet, throwing the rifle over his shoulder as he did.

His fall had been seen. One of the wolves turned aside from the outskirts of the pack, where he was not getting his share of the gruesome feast, and sprang for him. The next moment, as a shot rang out from behind Frank, the wolf dropped quivering at his feet.

His fall was witnessed. One of the wolves strayed from the edge of the pack, where he wasn't getting his part of the brutal feast, and lunged at him. The next moment, as a shot echoed from behind Frank, the wolf fell, quaking, at his feet.

“Steady, Frank,” cried Art’s voice. “Give ’em all you’ve got.”

“Hang in there, Frank,” shouted Art. “Give it everything you’ve got.”

Without looking around, mastering his trembling by a supreme effort, Frank brought the rifle to his shoulder and began firing into the pack, even as the three rifles of his companions also opened fire. 221

Without glancing around, Frank steadied his shaking through sheer determination, raised the rifle to his shoulder, and started shooting into the group, while his three companions also started firing. 221

At that close range every shot told and not a wolf escaped. Eleven bodies, including the mutilated remains of the three which Frank had slain with revolver shots, were stretched on the snow under the trees.

At that close range, every shot mattered, and not a single wolf got away. Eleven bodies, including the mangled remains of the three that Frank had shot with his revolver, lay sprawled on the snow beneath the trees.

When it was all over, his companions gathered about Frank and explanations followed. Then they made their way back to camp.

When it was all over, his friends gathered around Frank, and they started explaining what happened. Then they headed back to camp.

222CHAPTER XXVII—CONCLUSION.

Far to the southward, late in the Summer, the party containing our friends and the Thorwaldsson party as well as Long Jim Golden, all bronzed and hardy, and with Thorwaldsson recovered in body and mind, swung around a bend in a river and came to the landing which marked the first outpost of civilization—the trading post where was also located the Fort of the Mounted.

Far to the south, late in the summer, the group with our friends, the Thorwaldsson party, and Long Jim Golden, all tanned and sturdy, and with Thorwaldsson healthy in both body and mind, rounded a bend in the river and reached the landing that marked the first outpost of civilization—the trading post where the Fort of the Mounted was also situated.

A little boy playing on the edge of the pier was first to see them, and whooping and shouting he ran up the bank towards the store. Out of the door of the trading post came a figure in uniform.

A little boy playing at the edge of the pier was the first to see them, and with excitement, he ran up the bank shouting towards the store. A figure in uniform stepped out of the trading post.

“Dick.”

"Dick."

“Art.”

"Art."

The two pals were reunited.

The two friends were back together.

And then followed the biggest surprise of all, for out of the store came Mr. Temple and Della. For ten minutes the kissing and hugging went on, while 223 Farnum, Thorwaldsson, Farrell and the rest stood to one side, their faces set in wide grins.

And then came the biggest surprise of all, because Mr. Temple and Della walked out of the store. For ten minutes, they kissed and hugged, while 223 Farnum, Thorwaldsson, Farrell, and the others stood to the side, their faces lit up with big smiles.

“What in the world?” demanded Mr. Hampton, at length, holding his partner and neighbor at arm’s length. “What in the world brought you here?”

“What on earth?” asked Mr. Hampton, finally holding his partner and neighbor at arm’s length. “What on earth brought you here?”

“A motor boat,” said Mr. Temple. “That was a surprise for you. When we received your radio message via the post here, which relayed it to Edmonton—that first one, you know, announcing you were leaving for the outside—I decided I would have to be on hand to greet you. So I got into communication with Captain Jameson, and learned from him that I could reach one of his posts farther south by motor car, and then come up the river in a launch. So I decided I would come here to the edge of the wilderness.”

“A motorboat,” Mr. Temple said. “That was a surprise for you. When we got your radio message sent by post to Edmonton—that first one, you know, letting us know you were leaving for the outside—I figured I needed to be here to welcome you. So I contacted Captain Jameson and found out I could get to one of his posts further south by car, and then take a launch up the river. So I decided to come here to the edge of the wilderness.”

He looked at his son, Bob, about whom he still kept an arm, and smiled.

He looked at his son, Bob, whom he still had an arm around, and smiled.

“Good old Dad,” said Bob, giving him a hug. “But what brought Della?”

“Good old Dad,” said Bob, giving him a hug. “But why did Della come?”

“Oh, the same means,” answered his father.

“Oh, the same way,” answered his father.

“No, Dad. You know what I mean. Was it love for her straying brother?”

“No, Dad. You know what I mean. Was it love for her wandering brother?”

“Well, now, Bob, you’ll have to form your own opinion,” said Mr. Temple, eyes a-twinkle.

“Well, now, Bob, you’ll have to form your own opinion,” said Mr. Temple, his eyes sparkling.

Della who had been standing close to Frank, her hands clasped in his, looked calmly at Bob.

Della, who had been standing near Frank with her hands in his, looked at Bob calmly.

“Marjie wanted to come, too, you know, Bob,” 224 she said. “But her mother wouldn’t let her. She sent you a message.”

“Marjie wanted to come, too, you know, Bob,” 224 she said. “But her mom wouldn’t let her. She sent you a message.”

“Huh.”

"Hmm."

Big Bob blushed, and let the conversation drop. Nevertheless, at the first opportunity he got his sister to one side, and, snatching the letter she tendered him, went off by himself to read it.

Big Bob flushed and let the conversation fade away. Still, as soon as he got the chance, he pulled his sister aside, grabbed the letter she offered him, and went off by himself to read it.

There was room for Mr. Hampton and the boys on the launch, and in a canoe towed behind, and so, after a short rest, a start downstream was made at once. Thorwaldsson and the others set off with them, but soon fell behind amid a gay waving of farewells. Mr. Hampton was to make arrangements for their reception at the next post and at Edmonton. The launch would be sent back for them when the post was reached.

There was space for Mr. Hampton and the boys on the boat, as well as in a canoe being towed behind it, so after a brief break, they headed downstream right away. Thorwaldsson and the others set off with them but quickly lagged behind while cheerfully waving their goodbyes. Mr. Hampton was supposed to organize their welcome at the next post and in Edmonton. The boat would be sent back for them once they reached the post.

At Edmonton, a thriving city which in the comparatively few years of its existence has grown to the proportions of a metropolis, the boys got their first taste of the publicity which was to pursue them across the continent, reaching its height on their arrival in New York. For word of their coming had gotten out, and hosts of reporters awaited them, representing the great newspapers and news-gathering syndicates of not only North America but of Europe, too.

At Edmonton, a bustling city that has quickly grown into a major metropolis in just a few years, the boys experienced their first taste of the publicity that would follow them across the continent, peaking when they arrived in New York. News of their arrival had spread, and numerous reporters gathered to meet them, representing the major newspapers and news agencies from both North America and Europe.

“You see, boys,” said Mr. Hampton, in their hotel rooms, when they protested to him at being besieged 225 every minute of the day by reporters, “you are the center of the romantic interest of the world. You rescued the Lost Expedition and discovered strange new territory. You have had the wildest kind of adventures. How do you expect the world to take that calmly? It can’t be done. No, you may as well submit gracefully, and talk when questioned.”

“You see, guys,” Mr. Hampton said in their hotel rooms when they complained about being hounded by reporters every minute of the day, “you are the focus of the world’s romantic interest. You rescued the Lost Expedition and found strange new lands. You’ve had the craziest adventures. How do you think the world is supposed to react to that? It can’t be just brushed off. No, you might as well accept it gracefully and answer questions when asked.”

The romance of Frank and Della also was exploited by the newspapermen, and pictures began to appear throughout the country, showing the daring young explorer and his sweetheart. When they were taken, neither Frank nor Della knew, but the truth of the matter was that they were together so much of the time it was the easiest matter in the world for a photographer to snap them.

The romance between Frank and Della was also taken advantage of by the reporters, and photos started to show up across the country, featuring the adventurous young explorer and his girlfriend. At the time the pictures were taken, neither Frank nor Della was aware, but the reality was that they spent so much time together that it was super easy for a photographer to catch them.

In New York the same thing was gone through with again, only, if anything, worse. And this time, the reporters finding that Marjorie Faulkner appeared to greet the returned heroes, scented a new romance, and questioned the boys about it. Bob and Frank refused to answer, but Jack slyly tipped off the newspapermen that between Marjorie and Bob a real romance was, indeed, budding.

In New York, the same situation played out again, but if anything, it was worse. This time, the reporters noticed that Marjorie Faulkner was there to welcome the returning heroes and sensed a new romance, so they grilled the guys about it. Bob and Frank didn’t answer, but Jack secretly hinted to the reporters that a genuine romance was developing between Marjorie and Bob.

In reprisal, Bob and Frank put their heads together, and gave the newspapermen a story to the effect that Jack was champing at the bit to be off to old Mexico, there to greet a sweetheart who 226 awaited him, none other, in fact, than the Senorita Rafaela y Calomares, daughter of an old Don who had a palace in the Sonora mountains. And in support of the story they told the newspapermen of their adventures several years before on the Mexican border, when they had rescued Mr. Hampton from captivity and Jack, they said, had fallen in love with the daughter of the Mexican leader responsible for Mr. Hampton’s capture.

In retaliation, Bob and Frank teamed up and fed the reporters a story claiming that Jack was eager to head off to Mexico to reunite with a sweetheart who was waiting for him—none other than Senorita Rafaela y Calomares, the daughter of an old Don with a palace in the Sonora mountains. To back up their story, they recounted their adventures from several years earlier on the Mexican border, when they rescued Mr. Hampton from captivity and mentioned that Jack had fallen in love with the daughter of the Mexican leader who was behind Mr. Hampton’s capture.

It all made good copy for the reporters, who had about exhausted the possibilities of the northern adventure, and who now plunged head first into this former adventure, of which nothing had been known at the time.

It all made great material for the reporters, who had pretty much explored all the angles of the northern adventure, and who now dove headfirst into this earlier adventure, about which nothing had been known at the time.

Jack was furious, and threatened to wreak dire vengeance on Bob and Frank. But the latter pointed out that they had but turned the tables on him.

Jack was furious and threatened to take serious revenge on Bob and Frank. But they pointed out that they had simply turned the tables on him.

“Well, anyway,” he said, finally, beginning to smile, “you haven’t got the best part of the story yet.”

“Well, anyway,” he said, finally starting to smile, “you still haven’t heard the best part of the story.”

Their curiosity aroused, they tried to get him to tell what he meant. But he refused. Several days later he disappeared. When they asked Mr. Hampton what had become of him he finally surrendered and gave the secret away.

Their curiosity piqued, they tried to get him to explain what he meant. But he refused. A few days later, he vanished. When they asked Mr. Hampton what had happened to him, he eventually gave in and revealed the secret.

“Well, boys,” he said, “when we returned I found a courteous note from Don Fernandez y Calomares, saying he was in Washington on business 227 connected with the government, and asking me to call. I guess Jack has taken a train for Washington, and gone calling.”

“Well, guys,” he said, “when we got back I found a polite note from Don Fernandez y Calomares, saying he was in Washington on government business and asking me to give him a call. I guess Jack has caught a train to Washington and gone to see him.”

With which happy forecast of good luck to come to all three of the Radio Boys, we shall leave them for the present, secure in the belief that if at any future date they go adventuring they will be well able to take care of themselves, and also that they will get into adventures well worth reading about.

With a hopeful sense of good fortune ahead for all three of the Radio Boys, we will leave them for now, confident that whenever they embark on new adventures, they will handle themselves just fine and that they will experience stories worth telling.

 

THE END

THE END

 
 
 


 
 

The Radio Boys Series

The Radio Boys Series

BY GERALD BRECKENRIDGE

BY GERALD BRECKENRIDGE

A new series of copyright titles for boys of all ages.

A fresh collection of copyright titles for boys of every age.

Cloth Bound, with Attractive Cover Designs.

Cloth Bound, with Eye-Catching Cover Designs.

PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH

$0.50 each

POSTAGE 10c EXTRA

POSTAGE $0.10 EXTRA

    THE RADIO BOYS ON THE MEXICAN BORDER
    THE RADIO BOYS ON SECRET SERVICE DUTY
    THE RADIO BOYS WITH THE REVENUE GUARDS
    THE RADIO BOYS’ SEARCH FOR THE INCA’S TREASURE
    THE RADIO BOYS RESCUE THE LOST ALASKA EXPEDITION
    THE RADIO BOYS IN DARKEST AFRICA
    THE RADIO BOYS SEEK THE LOST ATLANTIS
    THE RADIO BOYS WITH THE BORDER PATROL
    THE RADIO BOYS AS SOLDIERS OF FORTUNE

THE RADIO BOYS ON THE MEXICAN BORDER
    THE RADIO BOYS ON SECRET SERVICE DUTY
    THE RADIO BOYS WITH THE REVENUE GUARDS
    THE RADIO BOYS’ SEARCH FOR THE INCA’S TREASURE
    THE RADIO BOYS RESCUE THE LOST ALASKA EXPEDITION
    THE RADIO BOYS IN DARKEST AFRICA
    THE RADIO BOYS SEEK THE LOST ATLANTIS
    THE RADIO BOYS WITH THE BORDER PATROL
    THE RADIO BOYS AS SOLDIERS OF FORTUNE

For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the Publishers

For sale at all bookstores, or available upon payment from the Publishers.

A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK

A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23rd St., NEW YORK

 


The Golden Boys Series

The Golden Boys Series

BY L. P. WYMAN, PH.D.

BY L.P. WYMAN, PH.D.

Dean of Pennsylvania Military College.

Dean of Penn Military College.

A new series of instructive copyright stories for boys of High School Age.

A new series of educational copyright stories for high school boys.

Handsome Cloth Binding.

Stylish Cloth Binding.

PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH

$0.50 each

POSTAGE 10c EXTRA

POSTAGE 10¢ EXTRA

    THE GOLDEN BOYS AND THEIR NEW ELECTRIC CELL
    THE GOLDEN BOYS AT THE FORTRESS
    THE GOLDEN BOYS IN THE MAINE WOODS
    THE GOLDEN BOYS WITH THE LUMBER JACKS
    THE GOLDEN BOYS RESCUED BY RADIO
    THE GOLDEN BOYS ALONG THE RIVER ALLAGASH
    THE GOLDEN BOYS AT THE HAUNTED CAMP
    THE GOLDEN BOYS ON THE RIVER DRIVE
    THE GOLDEN BOYS SAVE THE CHAMBERLAIN DAM
    THE GOLDEN BOYS ON THE TRAIL

THE GOLDEN BOYS AND THEIR NEW ELECTRIC CELL
    THE GOLDEN BOYS AT THE FORTRESS
    THE GOLDEN BOYS IN THE MAINE WOODS
    THE GOLDEN BOYS WITH THE LUMBERJACKS
    THE GOLDEN BOYS RESCUED BY RADIO
    THE GOLDEN BOYS ALONG THE ALLAGASH RIVER
    THE GOLDEN BOYS AT THE HAUNTED CAMP
    THE GOLDEN BOYS ON THE RIVER DRIVE
    THE GOLDEN BOYS SAVE THE CHAMBERLAIN DAM
    THE GOLDEN BOYS ON THE TRAIL

For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the Publishers

For sale by all bookstores, or shipped upon receipt of payment by the Publishers

A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK

A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23rd St., NEW YORK

 


The Lakewood Boys Series

The Lakewood Boys Series

By L. P. WYMAN, Ph.D.

By L. P. WYMAN, Ph.D.

A new series of copyright stories for boys of High School Age by the Author of “The Golden Boys Series.”

A new collection of copyright stories for high school boys by the author of “The Golden Boys Series.”

Cloth Bound with Attractive Cover Designs.

Cloth-bound with attractive cover designs.

PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH

Price, 50 cents each

POSTAGE 10c EXTRA

SHIPPING $0.10 EXTRA

    THE LAKEWOOD BOYS ON THE LAZY S
    THE LAKEWOOD BOYS AND THE LOST MINE
    THE LAKEWOOD BOYS IN THE FROZEN NORTH
    THE LAKEWOOD BOYS AND THE POLO PONIES
    THE LAKEWOOD BOYS IN THE SOUTH SEA ISLANDS
    THE LAKEWOOD BOYS IN MONTANA
    THE LAKEWOOD BOYS IN THE AFRICAN JUNGLE

THE LAKEWOOD BOYS ON THE LAZY S
    THE LAKEWOOD BOYS AND THE LOST MINE
    THE LAKEWOOD BOYS IN THE FROZEN NORTH
    THE LAKEWOOD BOYS AND THE POLO PONIES
    THE LAKEWOOD BOYS IN THE SOUTH SEA ISLANDS
    THE LAKEWOOD BOYS IN MONTANA
    THE LAKEWOOD BOYS IN THE AFRICAN JUNGLE

For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the Publishers

For sale at all bookstores, or available upon request from the publishers for the price.

A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK

A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23rd St., NEW YORK

 


Boy Scout Series

Boy Scout Series

By LIEUT. HOWARD PAYSON

By Lt. Howard Payson

A series of stories in which self-reliance and self-defense through organized athletics are emphasized, also depicting an accurate description of Boy Scouts activities.

A collection of stories that highlight self-reliance and self-defense through organized sports, while also providing an accurate portrayal of Boy Scouts activities.

ATTRACTIVELY BOUND IN CLOTH

Nicely bound in fabric

PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH

PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH

POSTAGE 10c EXTRA

POSTAGE 10¢ EXTRA

    THE BOY SCOUTS OF THE EAGLE PATROL
    THE BOY SCOUTS ON THE RANGE
    THE BOY SCOUTS AND THE ARMY AIRSHIP
    THE BOY SCOUTS’ MOUNTAIN  CAMP
    THE BOY SCOUTS FOR UNCLE SAM
    THE BOY SCOUTS AT THE PANAMA CANAL
    THE BOY SCOUTS UNDER FIRE IN MEXICO
    THE BOY SCOUTS ON BELGIAN BATTLEFIELDS
    THE BOY SCOUTS WITH THE ALLIES IN FRANCE
    THE BOY SCOUTS AT THE PANAMA-PACIFIC EXPOSITION

THE BOY SCOUTS OF THE EAGLE PATROL
THE BOY SCOUTS ON THE RANGE
THE BOY SCOUTS AND THE ARMY AIRSHIP
THE BOY SCOUTS’ MOUNTAIN CAMP
THE BOY SCOUTS FOR UNCLE SAM
THE BOY SCOUTS AT THE PANAMA CANAL
THE BOY SCOUTS UNDER FIRE IN MEXICO
THE BOY SCOUTS ON BELGIAN BATTLEFIELDS
THE BOY SCOUTS WITH THE ALLIES IN FRANCE
THE BOY SCOUTS AT THE PANAMA-PACIFIC EXPOSITION

For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the Publishers

For sale at all bookstores, or available upon request for the price from the Publishers.

A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK

A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23rd St., NEW YORK

 


Border Boys Series

Border Boys Series

By Fremont B. Deering

By Fremont B. Deering

Mexican and Canadian Frontier Stories for Boys 12 to 16 Years.

Mexican and Canadian Frontier Stories for Boys Ages 12 to 16.

PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH

$0.50 each

POSTAGE 10c EXTRA

POSTAGE $0.10 EXTRA

With Individual Jackets in Colors.

With individual jackets in colors.

Cloth Bound

Cloth-bound

    BORDER BOYS ON THE TRAIL
    BORDER BOYS ACROSS THE FRONTIER
    BORDER BOYS WITH THE MEXICAN RANGERS
    BORDER BOYS WITH THE TEXAS RANGERS
    BORDER BOYS IN THE CANADIAN ROCKIES
    BORDER BOYS ALONG THE ST. LAWRENCE RIVER

BORDER BOYS ON THE TRAIL
BORDER BOYS ACROSS THE FRONTIER
BORDER BOYS WITH THE MEXICAN RANGERS
BORDER BOYS WITH THE TEXAS RANGERS
BORDER BOYS IN THE CANADIAN ROCKIES
BORDER BOYS ALONG THE ST. LAWRENCE RIVER

For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the Publishers

For sale at all bookstores, or available by mail upon receiving payment from the publishers.

A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK

A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23rd St., NEW YORK

 


The Ranger Boys Series

The Ranger Boys Series

BY CLAUDE H. LA BELLE

BY CLAUDE H. LA BELLE

A new series of copyright titles for Boys 12 to 16 years telling of the adventures of three boys with the Forest Rangers in the state of Maine.

A new series of copyright titles for boys aged 12 to 16, sharing the adventures of three boys with the Forest Rangers in the state of Maine.

Handsome Cloth Binding.

Stylish Cloth Binding.

PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH

$0.50 each

POSTAGE 10c EXTRA

POSTAGE $0.10 EXTRA

    THE RANGER BOYS TO THE RESCUE
    THE RANGER BOYS FIND THE HERMIT
    THE RANGER BOYS AND THE BORDER SMUGGLERS
    THE RANGER BOYS OUTWIT THE TIMBER THIEVES
    THE RANGER BOYS AND THEIR REWARD

THE RANGER BOYS TO THE RESCUE
    THE RANGER BOYS FIND THE HERMIT
    THE RANGER BOYS AND THE BORDER SMUGGLERS
    THE RANGER BOYS OUTSMART THE TIMBER THIEVES
    THE RANGER BOYS AND THEIR REWARD

For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the Publishers

For sale by all bookstores, or sent upon receiving payment by the Publishers.

A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK

A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23rd St., NEW YORK

 


The Boy Troopers Series

The Boy Troopers Series

BY CLAIR W. HAYES

BY CLAIR W. HAYES

Author of the Famous “Boy Allies” Series.

Author of the well-known “Boy Allies” Series.

The adventures of two boys with the Pennsylvania State Police.

The adventures of two boys with the Pennsylvania State Police.

For Boys 12 to 16 Years.

For Boys Ages 12 to 16.

All Copyrighted Titles.

All Copyrighted Works.

Cloth Bound, with Attractive Cover Designs.

Hardcover, with attractive cover designs.

PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH

PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH

POSTAGE 10c EXTRA

POSTAGE $0.10 EXTRA

    THE BOY TROOPERS ON THE TRAIL
    THE BOY TROOPERS IN THE NORTHWEST
    THE BOY TROOPERS ON STRIKE DUTY
    THE BOY TROOPERS AMONG THE WILD MOUNTAINEERS

THE BOY TROOPERS ON THE TRAIL
    THE BOY TROOPERS IN THE NORTHWEST
    THE BOY TROOPERS ON STRIKE DUTY
    THE BOY TROOPERS AMONG THE WILD MOUNTAINEERS

For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the Publishers

For sale at all bookstores, or can be sent upon payment by the Publishers.

A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK

A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23rd St., NEW YORK

 


Frank Armstrong Series

Frank Armstrong Series

By MATTHEW M. COLTON

By Matthew M. Colton

Six Exceptional Stories of College Life, Describing Athletics from Start to Finish. For Boys 10 to 15 Years.

Six Amazing Stories of College Life, Covering Athletics from Beginning to End. For Boys Ages 10 to 15.

PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH

$0.50 each

POSTAGE 10c EXTRA

POSTAGE $0.10 EXTRA

Cloth Bound

Cloth-bound

With Attractive Jackets in Colors.

With stylish jackets in colors.

    FRANK ARMSTRONG’S VACATION
    FRANK ARMSTRONG AT QUEENS
    FRANK ARMSTRONG’S SECOND TERM
    FRANK ARMSTRONG, DROP KICKER
    FRANK ARMSTRONG, CAPTAIN OF THE NINE
    FRANK ARMSTRONG AT COLLEGE

FRANK ARMSTRONG’S VACATION
FRANK ARMSTRONG AT QUEENS
FRANK ARMSTRONG’S SECOND TERM
FRANK ARMSTRONG, DROP KICKER
FRANK ARMSTRONG, CAPTAIN OF THE NINE
FRANK ARMSTRONG AT COLLEGE

For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the Publishers

For sale at all bookstores, or can be sent upon receipt of payment by the Publishers.

A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK

A.L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23rd St., NEW YORK

 


The Boy Allies

The Boy Allies

(Registered in the United States Patent Office)

(Registered with the U.S. Patent Office)

With the Army

In the Army

BY CLAIR W. HAYES

BY CLAIR W. HAYES

For Boys 12 to 16 Years.

For Boys Aged 12 to 16 Years.

All Cloth Bound

All Hardcover

Copyright Titles

Copyright Titles

PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH

Price: 50 cents each

Postage 10c extra.

Shipping an additional 10 cents.

In this series we follow the fortunes of two American lads unable to leave Europe after war is declared. They meet the soldiers of the Allies, and decide to cast their lot with them. Their experiences and escapes are many, and furnish plenty of good, healthy action that every boy loves.

In this series, we follow the adventures of two American guys who can't leave Europe after war is declared. They meet the Allied soldiers and choose to join them. Their experiences and escapes are numerous and provide plenty of exciting action that every boy enjoys.

    THE BOY ALLIES AT LIEGE;
    or, Through Lines of Steel.
 
    THE BOY ALLIES ON THE FIRING LINE;
    or, Twelve Days' Battle Along the Marne.
 
    THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE COSSACKS;
    or, A Wild Dash Over the Carpathians.
 
    THE BOY ALLIES IN THE TRENCHES;
    or, Midst Shot and Shell Along the Aisne.
 
    THE BOY ALLIES IN GREAT PERIL;
    or, With the Italian Army in the Alps.
 
    THE BOY ALLIES IN THE BALKAN CAMPAIGN;
    or, The Struggle to Save a Nation.
 
    THE BOY ALLIES ON THE SOMME;
     or, Courage and Bravery Rewarded.
 
    THE BOY ALLIES AT VERDUN;
    or, Saving France from the Enemy.
 
    THE BOY ALLIES UNDER THE STARS AND STRIPES;
    or, Leading the American Troops to the Firing Line.
 
    THE BOY ALLIES WITH HAIG IN FLANDERS;
    or, The Fighting Canadians of Vimy Ridge.
 
    THE BOY ALLIES WITH PERSHING IN FRANCE;
    or, Over the Top at Chateau Thierry.
 
    THE BOY ALLIES WITH MARSHAL FOCH;
    or, The Closing Days of the Great World War.

THE BOY ALLIES AT LIEGE;
or, Through Lines of Steel.

THE BOY ALLIES ON THE FIRING LINE;
or, Twelve Days of Battle Along the Marne.

THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE COSSACKS;
or, A Wild Dash Over the Carpathians.

THE BOY ALLIES IN THE TRENCHES;
or, Amidst Shot and Shell Along the Aisne.

THE BOY ALLIES IN GREAT PERIL;
or, With the Italian Army in the Alps.

THE BOY ALLIES IN THE BALKAN CAMPAIGN;
or, The Struggle to Save a Nation.

THE BOY ALLIES ON THE SOMME;
or, Courage and Bravery Rewarded.

THE BOY ALLIES AT VERDUN;
or, Saving France from the Enemy.

THE BOY ALLIES UNDER THE STARS AND STRIPES;
or, Leading the American Troops to the Firing Line.

THE BOY ALLIES WITH HAIG IN FLANDERS;
or, The Fighting Canadians of Vimy Ridge.

THE BOY ALLIES WITH PERSHING IN FRANCE;
or, Over the Top at Chateau Thierry.

THE BOY ALLIES WITH MARSHAL FOCH;
or, The Closing Days of the Great World War.

For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the Publishers

For sale at all bookstores, or available by mail upon receipt of payment from the Publishers.

A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK

A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23rd St., NEW YORK

 


The Boy Allies

The Boy Allies

(Registered in the United States Patent Office)

(Registered with the United States Patent Office)

With the Navy

In the Navy

BY ENSIGN ROBERT L. DRAKE

BY ENSIGN ROBERT L. DRAKE

For Boys 12 to 16 Years.

For Boys Aged 12 to 16.

All Cloth Bound

All Cloth-Bound

Copyright Titles

Copyright Titles

PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH

Price: 50 cents each

Postage 10c Extra

Postage 10¢ extra

Frank Chadwick and Jack Templeton, young American lads, meet each other in an unusual way soon after the declaration of war. Circumstances place them on board the British cruiser, “The Sylph,” and from there on, they share adventures with the sailors of the Allies. Ensign Robert L. Drake, the author, is an experienced naval officer, and he describes admirably the many exciting adventures of the two boys.

Frank Chadwick and Jack Templeton, two young American guys, meet in an unusual way shortly after the war is declared. Circumstances land them on the British cruiser, “The Sylph,” and from there, they have adventures alongside the Allied sailors. Ensign Robert L. Drake, the author, is a seasoned naval officer, and he wonderfully describes the many exciting adventures of the two boys.

    THE BOY ALLIES ON THE NORTH SEA PATROL;
    or, Striking the First Blow at the German Fleet.
 
    THE BOY ALLIES UNDER TWO FLAGS;
    or, Sweeping the Enemy from the Sea.
 
    THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE FLYING SQUADRON;
    or, The Naval Raiders of the Great War.
 
    THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE TERROR OF THE SEA;
    or, The Last Shot of Submarine D-16.
 
    THE BOY ALLIES UNDER THE SEA;
    or, The Vanishing Submarine.
 
    THE BOY ALLIES IN THE BALTIC;
    or, Through Fields of Ice to Aid the Czar.
 
    THE BOY ALLIES AT JUTLAND;
    or, The Greatest Naval Battle of History.
 
    THE BOY ALLIES WITH UNCLE SAM’S CRUISERS;
    or, Convoying the American Army Across the Atlantic.
 
    THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE SUBMARINE D-32;
    or, The Fall of the Russian Empire.
 
    THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE VICTORIOUS FLEETS;
    or, The Fall of the German Navy.

THE BOY ALLIES ON THE NORTH SEA PATROL;
or, Striking the First Blow at the German Fleet.

THE BOY ALLIES UNDER TWO FLAGS;
or, Sweeping the Enemy from the Sea.

THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE FLYING SQUADRON;
or, The Naval Raiders of the Great War.

THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE TERROR OF THE SEA;
or, The Last Shot of Submarine D-16.

THE BOY ALLIES UNDER THE SEA;
or, The Vanishing Submarine.

THE BOY ALLIES IN THE BALTIC;
or, Through Fields of Ice to Aid the Czar.

THE BOY ALLIES AT JUTLAND;
or, The Greatest Naval Battle of History.

THE BOY ALLIES WITH UNCLE SAM’S CRUISERS;
or, Convoying the American Army Across the Atlantic.

THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE SUBMARINE D-32;
or, The Fall of the Russian Empire.

THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE VICTORIOUS FLEETS;
or, The Fall of the German Navy.

For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the Publishers

For sale at all bookstores, or available by mail upon receipt of payment from the Publishers.

A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK

A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23rd St., NEW YORK

 


The Oakdale Academy Series

The Oakdale Academy Series

BY MORGAN SCOTT

BY MORGAN SCOTT

A series of real boys’ stories at the Oakdale Academy. Ben Stone, the hero, wins his way under peculiar circumstances and against great odds.

A collection of true stories about boys at Oakdale Academy. Ben Stone, the main character, succeeds in unusual situations and faces significant challenges.

Clean-cut stories of real experiences in athletics and sports of academy life, with adventures, mysteries and clever descriptions.

Clean-cut stories of real experiences in athletics and sports from academy life, featuring adventures, mysteries, and sharp descriptions.

Just the kind of books a boy 12 to 16 years would like to read.

Just the kind of books a boy aged 12 to 16 would enjoy reading.

HANDSOME CLOTH BINDING.

Stylish cloth cover.

JACKETS IN COLORS

Colored jackets

PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH

50 cents each

POSTAGE 10c EXTRA

POSTAGE $0.10 EXTRA

Copyright Titles

Copyright Titles

    BEN STONE AT OAKDALE
    BOYS OF OAKDALE ACADEMY
    RIVAL PITCHERS OF OAKDALE
    OAKDALE BOYS IN CAMP
    THE GREAT OAKDALE MYSTERY
    THE NEW BOYS AT OAKDALE

BEN STONE AT OAKDALE
BOYS OF OAKDALE ACADEMY
RIVAL PITCHERS OF OAKDALE
OAKDALE BOYS IN CAMP
THE GREAT OAKDALE MYSTERY
THE NEW BOYS AT OAKDALE

For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the Publishers

For sale at all bookstores, or available upon payment from the publishers.

A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK

A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23rd St., NEW YORK

 


The Rex Kingdon Series

The Rex Kingdon Series

By GORDON BRADDOCK

By GORDON BRADDOCK

A fine series of stories for boys of High School age, written in an interesting and instructive style.

A great collection of stories for high school-aged boys, written in an engaging and educational style.

Rex Kingdon, the hero, a real, wide-awake boy, interested in outdoor games, enters into the school sports with enthusiasm. A rattling good baseball story holds the interest to the very end. Rex and his Ridgewood friends establish a campfire in the North woods; there, mystery, jealousy and rivalry enter to menace their safety, fire their interest and finally cement their friendship.

Rex Kingdon, the hero, a lively and alert boy, deeply enjoys outdoor games and jumps into school sports with excitement. A thrilling baseball story keeps the reader engaged until the very end. Rex and his friends from Ridgewood set up a campfire in the North woods; there, mystery, jealousy, and rivalry threaten their safety, spark their interest, and ultimately strengthen their friendship.

Stories boys will want to read.

Stories boys will want to read.

CLOTHBOUND. JACKETS IN COLORS.

Hardcover. Jackets in colors.

Copyright Titles.

Copyrighted Titles.

PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH

Price: 50 cents each

POSTAGE 10c EXTRA

POSTAGE $0.10 EXTRA

    REX KINGDON OF RIDGEWOOD HIGH
    REX KINGDON IN THE NORTH WOODS
    REX KINGDON AT WALCOTT HALL
    REX KINGDON BEHIND THE BAT
    REX KINGDON ON STORM ISLAND

REX KINGDON OF RIDGEWOOD HIGH
    REX KINGDON IN THE NORTH WOODS
    REX KINGDON AT WALCOTT HALL
    REX KINGDON BEHIND THE BAT
    REX KINGDON ON STORM ISLAND

For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the Publishers

For sale at all bookstores, or available upon payment from the Publishers.

A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK

A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23rd St., NEW YORK




        
        
    
Download ePUB

If you like this ebook, consider a donation!